PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 1

Introduction 19. 09. 2022

Pāḷi - Pāḷi Piṭaka (discourses taught by the Blessed One)

Pāḷi Bhāsā (Language used by the Blessed One)

Indo Aryan Language Family

- Old Indo Aryan ~ Vedic Sanskrit
- Middle Indo Aryan ~ Classical Sanskrit, Pāḷi, …
- New Indo Aryan ~ Hindi and so on

Pāḷi is an inflected Language

Y
Akkharasamūho padaṃ (group of letters becomes a word)
Padasamūho vākyaṃ (group of words becomes a sentence.)

SR
Four parts of speech in Pāḷi;
- nāma (noun)
- ākhyāta (verb)
- upasagga (prefix)
- nipāta (particle)
.I
Nāma and ākhyāta are inflected
Upasagga and nipāta are indeclinable one.
EN

Nāma (declension)
Ākhyāta (conjugation)

Retroflex

41 Alphabets
V

8 vowels
33 consonants

a ā = aa

Short long
-a - ā (guttural)
-I - ī (palatal)
(ṛ) (ṛ) (lingual)
(lṛ) (-) (dental)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 2

- u - ū (labial)
- e (ai)
- o (au)

3 short vowels, 5 long vowels

33 Consonants
25 group consonants
8 groupless consonants

25 Group Consonants
Gutturals k kh g gh ṅ

Y
akkhi (eye)
kk kkh (kg, kgh, kṅ) (khaki)

SR kk, kkh, gg, ggh

agga (tip)
aggha (value)
ṅk, ṅkh, ṅg, ṅgh (ṅṅ)
paṅka, saṅkhata, aṅga, iṅgha
.I
-k + g- > kg (kk, gg)

ṅ, ñ, ṇ, n, m = ṃ
EN

saṃ + buddha > sambuddha

saṃ + kara > saṅkara

21. 09. 2022

V

Palatals c ch j jh ñ
cc cch
sacca (truth)
taccha (truth)
jj
ajja (today)
jjh
bojjhaṅga (enlightenment factor)
ññ
paññā (wisdom)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 3

cc cch jj jjh ññ
ñc ñch ñj ñjh
pañca (five)
añcha
añja

Retroflex ṭ ṭh ḍ ḍh ṇ
ṭṭ ṭṭh ḍḍ ḍḍh ṇṇ
ṇṭ ṇṭh ṇḍ ṇḍh

Dentals t th d dh n
tt tth dd ddh nn

Y
nt nth nd ndh
Labials p ph b bh m
pp pph bb bbh mm

SR mp mph

Groupless Consonants
Semivowels y (I <—> y ) [palatal]
mb mbh

I (y)am > I’m

.I
√si (to lie down) + a
√si + a > saya
EN

v ( v <-> u/ ū/ o) [labial]

r (r <-> ṛ {skt})
l (l <-> lṛ {skt})
Sibilant s (s, ś, ṣ {skt})
√dis (to see) {skt- √dṛś}
V

Aspirate h

Lingual ḷ {ḷ > ḍ}

Nasal ṃ (niggahita)
aṃ iṃ uṃ
āṃ > aṃ
īṃ (ī > I + ṃ)
ūṃ > uṃ
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 4

Inflection
Inflection of ‘nāma’ is declension.
Inflection of ‘ākhyāta’ is conjugation.

Ākhyāta (verb)
- 3 tenses and 3 moods
{present tense, past tense, and future tense}
{imperative mood, optative mood, and conditional mood}

- person (first person, second person, and third person)

(third person, second person, and first person)

Y
- number (singular and plural) {skt. dual}

23 Sep 2022

SR Lesson One
Verb derived from 3 parts
-root (to eat)
-conjugational sign (7 types)
-verbal termination (tense/ mood, person, and number)
.I
[root + sign + vt > verb]

-√dhāv (to run)

-a (sign, active voice)
EN

-ti (vt; present tense, 3rd person, singular)

dhāvati ~ he/she/it runs.

-√chid (to cut)

-ṃ - a
-ti
V

chiṃdati (ṃ>n) chindati ~ he cuts

-root + sign > base form

-base form + present tense vt > present

√dhāv + a > dhāva + ti > dhāvati ~ he runs.

dhāva + (a)nti > dhāvanti ~ they run
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 5

Present Tense VT
Sl Pl
3rd -ti (a)nti
2nd -si -tha
1st -mi -ma

base form + VT
dhāvati ~ he runs.
dhāvanti ~ they run.
dhāvasi ~ you run.
dhāvatha ~ you run.
dhāvami > dhāvāmi ~ I run.

Y
dhāvama > dhāvāma ~ we run.
Note ~ before -mi/ ma ‘a’ becomes long ‘ā’.
[ a > ā + mi/ma]

SR √dhāv (a)ti > dhātti > dhatti

dhāvati > dhāvti

chindati > chidti
.I
chindati ~ he cuts
chijjati ~ it is cut.
EN

26 Sep 2022

root + sign + vt > verb

root + sign > verbal base + vt > verb

list of vocabulary
V

1st group of root with ‘a’ sign

√dhāv ~ to run (dhāva)
√vas ~ to dwell (vasa)
√gam ~ to go {m>cch} (gaccha)
ā √gam ~ to come (āgaccha)
apa √gam ~ to go away (apagaccha)
√ṭhā ~ to stand {ṭhā > tiṭṭh} (tiṭṭha)
ud √ṭhā ~ to stand up, to get up (uttiṭṭha/ uṭṭhaha)
ni √sad ~ to sit {sad > sīd} (nisīda)
√si ~ to lie down (saya)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 6

√ṭhā > tiṭṭh/ ṭhah

ud + tiṭṭh > udtiṭṭha > uttiṭṭha {dt > dd/ tt}

{-i/ ī > e > ay + vowel}

√si + a > si > se > saya
√nī (to lead) > ne > nay + a > naya

-root + sign + vt
-prefix + root + sign + vt

uttiṭṭhāmi {uttiṭṭha + mi {1st, sl. Present}}

uttiṭṭha {ud √ṭhā > tiṭṭh}

Y
to translate Pāḷi into English
- find vt (tense/ mood, person, number)

SR
- analyze the verbal base to guess the meaning

to translate English into Pāḷi

- verb denotes infinitive meaning of root in Pāḷi, tense
- subject denotes person and number.
.I
we get up.
get up ~ uttiṭṭha
we ~ 1st, Pl. ~ ma
EN

uttiṭṭhāma

they are lying down. They lie down

they ~ 3rd, pl ~ (a)nti
lie down ~ saya
sayanti
V

28 Sep 2022

Lesson 1 : way of forming verb, present tense, 1st group sign ‘a’

Lesson 2

Verbal base ending in -a

-ā
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 7

-e
-o
7 conjugational signs; ‘a’, ‘ṃ-a’, ‘ya’, ‘ṇu*, ṇā, uṇā’, ‘nā’, ‘o’, and ‘e, aya’

Ending in -a
(1) 1st group sign ‘a’
E.g., √dhāv + a > dhāva
√gam + a > gaccha

(2) 2nd group sign ‘ṃ-a’

E.g., √chid + ṃ-a > chiṃda > chinda
√bhuj + ṃ-a > bhuṃja > bhuñja

Y
(3) 3rd group sign ‘ya’
E.g., √ghā + ya > ghāya

(4)
SR √sā + ya > sāya

Ending in ‘ā’
4th group sign ‘ṇu*, ṇā, uṇā’
E.g., √su + ṇā > suṇā
.I
pa √āp + uṇā > pāpuṇā

(5) 5th group sign ‘nā’

E.g., √ci + nā > cinā
EN

√ji + nā > jinā

Ending in ‘o’
(6) 6th group sign ‘o’
E.g., √kar + o > karo
√tan + o > tano
V

Ending in ‘e’
(7) 7th group sign ‘e’ ‘aya’
E.g., √cur + e > core
√cur + aya > coraya
√dis + e > dese
√dis + aya > desaya
*NB; a > ā, i, ī > e, u, ū > o + e, aya

√kī (to buy, purchase) + nā {ī > i, n > ṇ} > kiṇā

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 8

-ti -anti
kiṇāti, kiṇā + (a)nti > kiṇānti > kiṇanti
-si -tha
kiṇāsi kiṇātha
-mi -ma
kiṇāmi kiṇāma

√dis (to expound, preach) + e > dese

-ti -(a)nti
deseti desenti
-si -tha
desesi desetha

Y
-mi -ma
desemi desema

SR
√kar (to do, to make) + o > karo
-ti
karoti
-si
-(a)nti
karonti
-tha
karosi karotha
.I
-mi -ma
karomi karoma

pa √āp (to reach, to attain) + uṇā > pāpuṇā

EN

√ji (to conquer, to win) + nā > jinā

√cur (to steal) + e > core
√tan (to spread, to extend) + o > tano
√su (to listen, to hear) + ṇā > suṇā
√bhū (to develop) + e > bhoe > bhave > bhāve {ū > o > av > āv}
[o > av + vowel]
V

pappoti > pappo < pa √āp + ṇu > paāpṇu > pāpṇu > pāppu > pappu > pappo
pa √āp + ṇu > pappo {‘a’ is dropped, ‘ā > a’, pṇ > pp, u > o}
[long vowel > short v. + double consonants]
Pappoti

30 Sep 2022

Summary of Lesson Two

-7 conjugational signs
-4 vowels endins of the verbal base
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 9

Prefix + root + sign

-cons./ vowel + CVC/V + V/C
Prefix + root
C+C ~ change;
V+V ~ elision, change, insertion
Root + sign
C+C ~ change;
V+V ~ elision, change

pa √āp > pāp

ud √ṭhā > uṭṭhā

Y
jānāti > jānā < √ñā (to know, to understant) + nā
chādeti > chāde < √chad (to cover up) + e

SR
cināti > cinā < √ci (to collect, heap up, pile up) + nā

pāpuṇā
Jinā
Suṇā
.I
Jānā
cinā
core
Bhāve
EN

chāde
tano
Pappo

-ti (a)nti
-si -tha
V

-mi -ma

root sign base meaning Present remark

form

√dhāv -a dhāva To run dhāvati

√gam a gaccha To go gacchati M > cch

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 10

Lesson 3

Regular form; Root + sign + VT

Irregular form; Root + VT

√as (to be)

-ti anti
-si tha
-mi ma

asti > atthi {st > tth}

(a)santi > santi

Y
a(s)si > asi
astha > attha {sth > tth}
asmi/ > amhi {s > h, (ahmi) hm > mh}

SR asma/ amha

atthi (he is there, there is him)

santi (they are there, there are them)
asi (you are) attha (you are)
.I
asmi, amhi (I am) asma, amha (we are)

√brū (to say)

EN

brūti
brū(v)anti > brūvanti
brūanti > bravanti {u/ū > o > av + vowel}
brūsi
brūtha
brūmi
V

brūma

√han (to kill, to hurt)

√han + a > hana

hanati, hanti* hananti

hanasi hanatha
hanāmi hanāma
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 11

Exercise (a)

I am ~ I (1st, sl. ~mi), am (present tense, √as

asmi, amhi
You kill ~ you (2nd, sl./pl. ~ si/ tha), kill (present tense, √han, hana)
hanasi/ hanatha
Exercise (b)
brūma (√brū + ma) ~ we say
hanti (√han + ti) ~ he kills

√ṭhā > tiṭṭh

√ṭhā > ṭhah

Y
Redublicated verb
(skt) √sthā (sth > ṭṭh) (Pāḷ) √(ṭ)ṭhā

SR
√sthā > (s)t(h)āsthā > tāsthā > tisthā > tiṭṭhā + a

√ṭhā > ṭhāṭhā > ṭhaṭhā > ṭhahā + a

.I
In preceding syllable
- ā>i
- aspirate ‘h’ is lost such as ṭh > ṭ
- ā>a
EN

- h>j
- In following syllable ‘ṭh’ > h

√hā > hāhā > hahā > jahā

√pā > pāpā > pipā > pibā/ pivā
V

When two vowels meet together,

- one of them is dropped,
- changed into consonant, or
- a guest consonant is inserted

√brū ‘v’ anti > brūvanti

√brū > bro > brav + anti > bravanti {u/ū > o > av + vowel}
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 12

05 Oct 2022
Lesson 4
Personal Pronouns
Dhāvati (he runs.)
So dhāvati
So ~ [tad ~ that, nom, sl.] he
Dhāvanti ~ they run
Te dhāvanti
Te ~ [tat ~ that, nom, pl.] they
3rd sl. / pl. Subj. ~ so and te
So gacchati ~ he goes. Te gacchanti ~ they go.
so/ te

Y
2nd sl./ pl. Subj. ~ tvaṃ/ tumhe
Dhāvasi ~ you run.

SRTvaṃ dhāvasi ~ you run.

Dhāvatha ~ you run.
Tumhe dhāvatha ~ you run.

1st sl./ pl. Subj. ~ ahaṃ/ mayaṃ

.I
Dhāvāmi ~ I run.
Ahaṃ dhāvāmi ~ I run.
Bhāvemi ~ I develop.
Ahaṃ bhāvemi ~ I develop.
EN

Dhāvāma ~ we run.
Mayaṃ dhāvāma ~ we run.
Uggaṇhāmi ~ I learn. {ud √gah + nā + mi} [dg > gg, n> ṇ, hṇ > ṇh]
Ahaṃ uggaṇhāmi ~ I learn Pāḷi, I am learning Pāḷi.
V

Mayaṃ uggaṇhāma ~ we learn.

Personal pronouns for subjects

3rd subj. So te
2nd subj. Tvaṃ tumhe
1st. Subj. ahaṃ mayaṃ, amhe

Atthi santi
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 13

Asi attha
Asmi, amhi asma, amha

So atthi ~ he is (there).
Te santi ~ they are (there).
Tvaṃ asi ~ you are.
Tumhe attha ~ you are.
Ahaṃ asmi/ amhi~ I am.
Ahaṃ sisso asmi. {I aṃ a student.}
Mayaṃ asma/ amha ~ we are.
Mayaṃ buddhasāvakā asma. {we are disciples of the Buddha.}

Y
√i ~ to go + ti{√i > e}
eti ~ he goes. enti ~ they go.

SR
√gam ~ to go
So gacchati ~ he goes.

ā √gam ~ to come
.I
So āgacchati ~ he comes.

ā √i ~ to come {a/ā + i > e}

eti ~ he comes.
EN

√cint (to think) + e > cinte

√bhū (to be, become) + a > bhava {ū > o > av + a}

Bhavati bhavanti
Bhavasi bhavatha
V

Bhavāmi bhavāma

√bhū (to develop) + e > bhāve {ū > o > av > āv + e}

√dis (to see) + a > passa {dis ~ pass}

Passati passanti
Passasi passatha
Passāmi passāma
Vipassanā (insight meditation)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 14

√dis (to teach, expound) + e > dese

Deseti desenti
Desesi desetha
Desemi desema
Desanā (discoure)

To be
I am,
You are
He is

3rd so te

Y
2nd tvaṃ tumhe
1st ahaṃ mayaṃ, amhe

SRSo (3rd, sl.) ~ he

Mayaṃ (1st. Pl ~ we)
kasati (3rd, sl.) ~ ploughs.

Sayāma (√si > se > say + a + ma ~ 1st. Pl. present tense ~ lie down)
We lie down.
Te (3rd, pl. ~ they)
.I
Vapanti (√vap + a + anti~pres, 3rd, pl~ grow)
Te vapanti ~ they grow, sow.

You (2nd, sl/pl ~ si/ tha) ~ tvaṃ/ tumhe

EN

come (e) {esi/ etha}

Tvaṃ esi/ tumhe etha.
I (ahaṃ + mi)
smell (ghāya)
Ahaṃ ghāyāmi
V

Lesson 5
Future Tense (will, shall)

{verbal base + future tense vt= future verb}

Sl. Pl.
3rd. ssa + ti > ssati ssa + (a)nti > ssanti
2nd. ssa + si > ssasi ssa + tha > ssatha
1st. ssa + mi > ssāmi ssa + ma > ssāma
[ssa + present tense vt = future tense]
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 15

Future Tense VT
Sl. Pl.
3rd. (i)ssati (i)ssanti
2nd. (i)ssasi (i)ssatha
1st. (i)ssāmi (i)ssāma

Kasati ~ he ploughs. > kasa (to plough)

Kasa + issati, issanti, issasi, issatha, issāmi, issāma >kasissati, etc.,
Suṇā + issati, issanti, issasi, issatha, issāmi, issāma > suṇissati, etc.,
Bhāve + ssati, ssanti, ssasi, ssatha, ssāmi, ssāma > bhāvessati, etc.,
Tano + issati, issanti, issasi, issatha, issāmi, issāma > tanissati, etc.,

Y
√dis (to see/ to expound)

SR
√dis + e + mi > desemi
Desetvā (gerund form)
Dese + ana > desanā (discourse)

10 Oct 2022
.I
Verbal base + future tense vt = future verb
- Ending vowel of bases is mostly dropped except ‘e’
EN

√as (to be) atthi [no future form]

√bhū (to be) + a > bhava

3rd bhavissati bhavissanti

2nd bhavissasi bhavissatha
V

1st bhavissāmi bhavissāma

Ahaṃ bhavissāmi (fut. 1st. sl.) ~ I will be.

Ahaṃ vasissāmi {vasa (to live) + fut. 1st. Sl. issāmi ( I will/shall)}
~ I will live.

Ahaṃ uṭṭhahissāmi {uṭṭhaha (ud √ṭhā ~ to get up) + issāmi (fut. 1st. Sl. ~ I
shall)} ~ I will get up.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 16

ud √ṭhā > ṭhāṭhā > ṭhahā + a > ṭhaha {ud + ṭhaha (dṭh > ṭṭh)} > uṭṭhaha

Ahaṃ jānissāmi {jānā + issāmi} ~ I shall know.

√ñā + nā > (ñānā) jānā

√jñā > jjā > jā
√jñā > ññā > ñā + ana > ñāṇa (knowledge)
pa √jñā > ññā + a > paññā (wisdom)

I shall know {I shall~ 1st. Sl. ~ ahaṃ + issāmi} {know ~ jānā}

Ahaṃ jānissāmi

Y
Lesson 6
Imperative Mood (may, let)

SR[Verbal base + imperative mood vt = imperative verb]

Imperative Mood VT
Sl. Pl.
.I
3rd. tu (a)ntu
2nd. hi tha
1st. mi ma
EN

√dhāv + a > dhāva (to run)

So dhāvatu
- He may run.
- May he run!
- Let him run!
V

Te dhāvantu
- They may run.
- May they run.
- Let them run.

Tvaṃ dhāvahi

-a, ā, o, e
For ‘a’ ending base; dhāva, etc.,
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 17

-a + hi {a > ā} > -āhi {i.e., dhāvahi > dhāvāhi}

-a + hi {hi is dropped} > -a {i.e., dhāvahi > dhāva}

Tvaṃ dhāvāhi/ dhāva.

For ‘ā’ ending base; kiṇā, etc.,

-ā + hi > -āhi {i.e., kiṇāhi}
-ā + hi {ā > a, ‘hi’ is dropped} > -a {i.e., kiṇāhi > kiṇa}
Tvaṃ kiṇāhi/ kiṇa.

- You may run.

- May you run.

Y
- {Let you run*}
- Run

SR
Tumhe dhāvatha.

Ahaṃ dhāvāmi
Mayaṃ dhāvāma
.I
I may run.
May I run.
Let me run.
We may run.
EN

May we run.
Let us run.
12 Oct 2022

- Dhāva
- Kiṇā
V

- Karo
- dese

Dhāva
Dhāvatu dhāvantu
Dhāvāhi, dhāva dhāvatha
Dhāvāmi dhāvāma

kiṇā
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 18

Kiṇātu kiṇantu
Kiṇāhi, kiṇa kiṇātha
Kiṇāmi kiṇāma

Karo
Karotu karontu
Karohi karotha
Karomi karoma
Dese
Desetu desentu
Desehi desetha
Desemi desema

Y
√as (to be)

SR
Present Tense
Asti > atthi
Asanti > santi
Assi > asi
Astha > attha
.I
asmi/ amhi
asma/ amha

Imperative Mood VT
EN

√as + tu > astu {st > tth}> atthu

Atthu ~ he may be, may he be, let him be.

√as + antu > asantu > santu

V

√as + hi > ashi {as > a > ā}> āhi

√as + tha > astha > attha

√as + mi > asmi/ amhi
√as + ma > asma/ amha

mā ~ don’t
mā + imperative verb ~ don’t V, i.e., don’t go, don’t run and so on.

Mā dhāvatu ~ he may not run, may he not run, let him not run.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 19

Mā dhāvāhi ~ don’t run.

Local Adverbs
Demonstrative pronoun
-ta (that)
-ima (this)
-tra, ttha (at, in, on + location)
Ta + tra > tatra (in that place = there)
Ta + ttha > tattha (in that place = there)

Ima (this) > i, a, e + tra, ttha, dha

Y
Ima > a + tra > atra (in this place = here)
Ima > i > e + ttha > ettha (here)
Ima > i + dha > idha/ iha (here)

SR
Relative Pronoun
Ya ~ what, which

Tra, ttha, hiṃ (at, in, on + location)

.I
Ya + tra > yatra (in which place = where)
Ya + ttha > yattha
Ya + hiṃ > yahiṃ (where)
EN

Interrogative Pronoun
Kiṃ ~ (wh?)
Kiṃ > ka, ku

-tra, ttha, hiṃ, haṃ (at, in, on + location)

Kiṃ > ku + tra > kutra (where?)
V

Kiṃ > ka + ttha > kattha

Kiṃ > ku + hiṃ > kuhiṃ
Kiṃ > ka + haṃ > kahaṃ

-to (from + location)

Ta + to > tato (from that place = from there)
Ima + to > ato/ ito (from this place = from here)
Ya + to > yato (from where)
Kiṃ + to > kuto (from where?)
Kuto tvaṃ āgacchasi ~ from where do you come?
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 20

Yato tvaṃ āgacchasi ~ where you come

Temporal Adverbs

-dā, dāni, dācanaṃ (at time)

Ta + dā > tadā (at that time/ then)

Ima + dāni > idāni (at this time/ now)

Ya + dā > yadā (at what time/ when)

Kiṃ + dā > kadā (at what time?/ when?)

Y
Kiṃ + dācanaṃ > kudācanaṃ (at what time?/ when?)

14 Oct 2022

SR
Demonstrative adverbs ~ ta (that), ima (this)
Relative adverbs ~ ya (which or what)
Interrogative adverbs ~ kiṃ (wh?)
.I
Ahaṃ dhāvāmi (I run)
Ahaṃ ito dhāvāmi (I run from here)
EN

Subj + Verb
Subj + adv + verb

So vasati (he dwells)

So tatra vasati (he dwells there)
Ahaṃ idha vasāmi (I live here)
V

Ahaṃ idāni desemi (I am teaching now)

Tadā te bhāventi (then they develop)
Ya <-> Ta

Ahaṃ gacchāmi. (I go)

So vasati. (he lives)

Ahaṃ tattha gacchāmi. (I go there)

Yattha so vasati. (where he lives.)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 21

Yattha so vasati ahaṃ tattha gacchāmi. (I go there where he lives)

Yadā so āgacchati. (when he comes)

Tadā ahaṃ apagacchāmi. (then I go away)

Yadā so āgacchati tadā ahaṃ apagacchāmi. (I go away when he comes.)

Tvaṃ gacchasi (you go)

Kattha tvaṃ gacchasi. (where do you go?)

Kadā tvaṃ uttiṭṭhasi. (when do you go?)

Y
Tumhe āgacchatha. (you come)
Kuto tumhe āgacchatha. (where do you come from?)

SR
So idha vasa/tu

vasa (to live)

tu (imp. 3rd. Sl ~ he + may/ let)
.I
Vasatu ~ he may live, may he live, let him live
Idha (here)
So idha vasatu (he may live here, may he live here, let him live here)
EN

Let them come here

Let (imp)
Them (3rd. Pl. ~ te + antu)
Come (āgaccha)
Te Āgacchantu
V

Here (idha, iha, atra, ettha)

Te idha āgacchantu

I am going where they are

I am going (there) [ahaṃ tatra/ tattha gacchāmi]
where they are [yattha/ yatra/ yahiṃ te santi/ bhavanti]
[Yatra te santi ahaṃ tattha gacchāmi.]

Don’t kill there

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 22

Mā tvaṃ tatra hana/ hanāhi

Mā tumhe tatra hanatha

17 Oct 2022

Lesson 7
Optative Mood VT (may, might, should, would)

Sl. Pl.
3rd. eyya, e eyyuṃ
2nd. eyyāsi, esi eyyātha, etha
1st. eyyāmi, emi eyyāma, ema

Y
dhāva + eyya > dhāveyya, dhāve

SRdhāva + eyya, e > dhāveyya, dhāve

dhāva + eyyuṃ > dhāveyyuṃ
dhāva + eyyāsi, esi > dhāveyyāsi, dhāvesi
dhāva + eyyātha, etha > dhāveyyātha, dhāvetha
dhāva + eyyāmi, emi > dhāveyyāmi, dhāvemi
.I
dhāva + eyyāma, ema > dhāveyyāma, dhāvema

Dhāvema ~ we may run, we might run, we should run, we would run.

EN

kiṇā + eyya, and so on

Kiṇeyya, kiṇe kiṇeyyuṃ
Kiṇeyyāsi, kiṇesi kiṇeyyātha, kiṇetha
Kiṇeyyāmi, kiṇemi kiṇeyyāma, kiṇema

Karo + eyya and so

V

Kareyya, kare kareyyuṃ

Kareyyāsi, karesi kareyyātha, karetha
Kareyyāmi, karemi kareyyāma, karema

Dese + eyya and so on

Deseyya, dese deseyyuṃ
Deseyyāsi, desesi deseyyātha, desetha
Deseyyāmi, desemi deseyyāma, desema

Irregular Verb with Opt.

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 23

√as
√kar

Special Opt VT for irregular verbs

Sl. PL.
3rd. (i)yā (i)yuṃ
2nd. (i)yāsi (i)yātha
1st. (i)yāmi (i)yāma

√kar + (i)yā > kariyā (r <-> y = y-r) > kayirā

√kar + (i)yuṃ > kariyuṃ > kayiruṃ

Y
√kar + (i)yāsi > kariyāsi > kayirāsi
√kar + (i)yātha > kariyātha > kayirātha
√kar + (i)yāmi > kariyāmi > kayirāmi

SR√kar + (i)yāma > kariyāma > kayirāma

Kareyya, kare, kayirā

Kareyyāmi, karemi, kayirāmi

kareyyuṃ, kayiruṃ
Kareyyāsi, karesi, kayirāsi kareyyātha, karetha, kayirātha
kareyyāma, karema, kayirāma
.I
3rd. Sl. √as + (i)yā > asiyā > siyā
√as + yā > asyā (sy > ss) assā > assa
3rd. Sl. siyā, assa
EN

3rd. pl. √as + (i)yuṃ > asiyuṃ > siyuṃ

√as + yuṃ > asyuṃ > assuṃ > assu
3rd. pl. siyuṃ, assu
3rd. Pl. siyaṃsu {siyuṃ}
Past tense 3rd. Pl. uṃ, iṃsu, aṃsu
N.B., Siyaṃsu is taking analogy form of past tense such as aṭṭhaṃsu and so on
V

2nd. Sl. √as + (i)yāsi > asiyā > siyā

√as + yāsi > asyā > assā > assa
2nd. Sl. siyā, assa

2nd. pl. √as + yātha (yatha)> asyātha > assātha > assatha

1st. Sl.√as + (i)yāmi (yaṃ)> asiyām > asiyāṃ > asiyaṃ > siyaṃ
√as + yaṃ > asyaṃ > assaṃ
1st. Sl.siyaṃ, assaṃ
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 24

1st. pl.√as + yāma > asyāma > assāma

Sl. Pl.
3rd. siyā, assa siyuṃ, assu, siyaṃsu*
2nd. siyā, assa assatha
1st. siyaṃ, assaṃ assāma

19 Oct 2022

So gacchati ~ he goes.

Y
So na gacchati ~ he does not go.
So gaccheyya ~ he might go.
So na gaccheyya ~ he might not go.

SR
Ta ~ demonstrative pronoun
Ya ~ relative pronoun.
[where is ‘ya’ there is ‘ta’]
.I
Tathā ~ in that way
Yathā ~ in what way
Yathā + tathā ~ as
EN

Sace, yadi, ce (if)

sace / yadi + subj. + verb.

Subj. + ce + verb

Sace/ yadi so gaccheyya ~ if he (might) goes.

V

No ce buddhaṃ sareyyātha ~ if you could not remember the Buddha’s attributes.

√sar ~ to remember ~ sarati

√sak (to be able) + ṇu > sakṇu (kṇ > kk, u > o) > sakko + ti > sakkoti ~ he is able, he
can.

√kas (to plough) + a + ti > kasati ~ he ploughes.

√vap (to sow) + a + ti > vapati ~ he sows.
√cint (to think, consider) + e + ti > cinteti ~ he thinks, considers.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 25

Yatra te vaseyyuṃ, mayaṃ tatra gaccheyyāma

Where they would stay, we there should go.

We should go there where they (would) stay.

Yahiṃ te nisīdeyyuṃ, tato tumhe apagaccheyyātha.

Where they would sit, from there you would go away.
You should go away from there where they (would) sit.

I should stay here.

Y
Ahaṃ idha vaseyyāmi.

Where should they run?

SR
Kattha/ kutra/ kuhiṃ te dhāveyyuṃ.

Where should we purchase from?

Kuto mayaṃ kiṇeyyāma
.I
pa √āp + uṇā > pāpuṇā (to attain, to approach)

How should they conquer?

Kathaṃ te jineyyuṃ
EN

You may do as I do. [as ~ yathā + tathā]

Yathā ahaṃ kareyyāmi, tathā tvaṃ kareyyāsi.

Bhavatu sabbamaṅgalaṃ. (praying, wishing)

May there be all blessings to you!
V

Averā hontu
Arogā hontu

No ce buddhaṃ sareyyātha, atha dhammaṃ sareyyātha.

If you could not remember the Buddha, then you should remember the Dhamma.

21 Oct 2022
Lesson 8
Past Tense (Aorist)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 26

- Optionally ‘a’ is inserted before the root in the past tense.

- ‘s’ is always inserted before VT for the verbal base ending in ‘e’ and for some
roots such as √ṭhā, √dā and so on.

Past Tense VT
Sl. Pl.

3rd. i uṃ, iṃsu, aṃsu*

2nd. o, i ittha
1st. iṃ imhā, imha

Y
Verbal base + Past Tense VT = past tense verb

SRdhāva + i > dhāvi

dhāva + uṃ/ iṃsu > dhāvuṃ, dhāviṃsu

dhāva + o/ i > dhāvo, dhāvi

dhāva + ittha > dhāvittha
.I
dhāva + iṃ > dhāviṃ
dhāva + imhā/ imha > dhāvimhā, dhāvimha
EN

(a)dhāvi (a)dhāvuṃ, (a)dhāviṃsu

(a)dhāvo, (a)dhāvi (a)dhāvittha
(a)dhāviṃ (a)dhāvimhā, (a)dhāvimha

So (a)dhāvi~ he ran.
V

Te (a)dhāvuṃ/ (a)dhāviṃsu~ they ran.

kiṇā + i > (a)kiṇi

(a)kiṇi (a)kiṇuṃ, (a)kiṇiṃsu

(a)kiṇo, (a)kiṇi (a)kiṇittha
(a)kiṇiṃ (a)kinimhā, (a)kiṇimha

karo + i > (a)kari

(a)kari (a)karuṃ, (a)kariṃsu
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 27

(a)karo, (a)kari (a)karittha

(a)kariṃ (a)karimhā, (a)karimha

dese + ssati > desessati [future tense]

dese + (s)i > desesi

(a)desesi (a)desesuṃ, (a)desesiṃsu

(a)deseso, (a)desesi (a)desesittha
(a)desesiṃ (a)desesimhā, (a)desesimha

(a)√ṭhā (to stand) + i > aṭhāsi (ṭh > ṭṭh) > aṭṭhāsi

Y
√sthā (skt) = (sth > ṭṭh > ṭh)√ṭhā

aṭṭhāsi aṭṭhaṃsu

SR
aṭṭhāsi aṭṭhāsittha
aṭṭhāsiṃ aṭṭhāsimhā, aṭṭhāsimha

√dā (to give) + i

adāsi adaṃsu
.I
adāsi adāsittha
adāsiṃ adāsimhā, adāsimha

(a)√as (to be) + i > aasi > āsi

EN

a √as > ās + i > āsi

āsuṃ, āsiṃsu

āso, āsi āsittha

āsiṃ āsimhā, āsimha
V

So āsi {he was}

Te āsuṃ {they were}
Tvaṃ āsi {you was}
Tumhe āsittha {you were}
Ahaṃ āsiṃ {I was}
Mayaṃ āsimhā {we were}

Verbal base is derived from

- Root + conjugaltional sign
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 28

E.g., √dhāv (to run) + a > dhāva (to run)

- Prefix + root + conjugational sigh
E.g., ā √gam > gacch (to come) + a > āgaccha (to come)

pa √vis (to enter) + a + ti

pavisati

pa (a)√vis + a > pavisa > pāvisa + i > pāvisi

pavisiṃsu

24 Oct 2022

Y
‘Mā’ + Imp. verb and past tense verb = prohibition

Mā karohi ~ don’t do

SR
Mā akari ~ don’t do.

Mā gaccha/ gacchāhi ~ don’t go.

Mā agacchi ~ don’t go.
.I
Yadā tvaṃ tato āgacchi, tadā mayaṃ tatra āsimhā

Yadā tvaṃ tato āgacchi,

When you from there came > when you came from there,
EN

tadā mayaṃ tatra āsimhā.

Then we there were > then we were there.
a√as > ās (to be)

Yato ahaṃ ajāniṃ, tato avadiṃ.

V

√vad (to speak) + a > vada + iṃ > vadiṃ/ avadiṃ

Yato ~ from where, wherefore,

Tato ~ from there, therefore,
[Yato + tato ~ because]

From where I knew, from there I said.

Wherefore I knew, therefore I said. ~ I said because I knew.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 29

Yadi evaṃ siyā, ahaṃ idha āgaccheyyāmi.

Yadi evaṃ siyā,

If (he/she/it) would be thus/ in this way

If it would be thus = if it is thus = if it is so/ if so

I should come here

{Tumhe} mā idha vasittha.

You don’t stay here. = tumhe idha na vasittha.

Y
(no subj.) Don’t stay here.

Mā te evaṃ kariṃsu

SR
They did thus. They did not do thus.
Don’t let them do thus.
May they not do thus.

Mā + past tense {imperative meaning}

.I
They went there.
EN

They ~ te (3rd. pl.)

Went ~ (gaccha, past tense) ~iṃsu
Te tatra gacchiṃsu.

When did you come from there?

When ~ kadā
V

You ~ tvaṃ/ tumhe

Did come ~ āgaccha, past temse
From there ~ tato

Kadā tato tvaṃ āgacchi/ tumhe āgacchittha

We went there when you were here.

We went there.
Mayaṃ tatra gacchimhā.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 30

When you were hṃere.

Yadā tumhe idha āsittha

Yadā tumhe idha āsittha, (tadā) mayaṃ tatra gacchimhā.

When I touched then I knew.

Yadā ahaṃ phusiṃ tadā ahaṃ jāniṃ

When we heard then we thought.

Yadā mayaṃ suṇimhā, tadā mayaṃ cintesimhā.

Y
26 Oct 2022

SR
3rd. Person
Present Tense

sl.

-ti
pl.

-(a)nti
Verbal Termination

Imperative Mood

sl.

-tu
pl.

-(a)ntu
Future Tense

sl.

-(i)ssati
pl.

-(i)ssanti
.I
2nd. Person -si -tha -hi -tha -(i)ssasi -(i)ssatha

1st. Person -mi -ma -mi -ma -(i)ssāmi -(i)ssāma

EN

Verbal Termination

Optative Mood Past Tense

V

Common Special

sl. pl. sl. pl. sl. pl.

3rd. Person -eyya, -e -eyyuṃ -(i)yā -(i)yuṃ -i -uṃ, -iṃsu,

-aṃsu

2nd. Person -eyyāsi, -eyyātha, -(i)yāsi -(i)yātha -o, -i -ittha

-esi -etha -(i)yā -yatha

1st. Person -eyyāmi, -eyyāma, -(i)yāmi -(i)yāma -iṃ -imhā, -imha

-emi -ema -(i)yaṃ
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 31

√gam > gacch

√sad > sīd
√ṭhā > tiṭṭh, ṭhah

√dis > dese

Desesi, (a)desesi,
Lesson one to eight ~ finite verb (main verb)

Lesson nine ~ absolutive verb or gerund verb, infinitive verb

√root + gerund suffix > gerund verb

Y
- Prefix (upasagga)
- Indeclinable particle (nipāta)
-
- SRNāma (noun, pronoun, adj, participle adj. And so on)
Verb (ākhyāta)
Nāmā
- Nāmanāma (pure noun)
- Sabbanāmā (pronoun)
.I
- Samāsanāma (compound noun) ~ {N + N, Adj. + N, Adj. + Adj, etc.,}
- Taddhitanāma (secondary derivative noun) ~ {Noun + Suffix}
- Kitanāma (primary derivative noun) ~ {root + suffix}
Two kinds of Kita
EN

(1) Root + suffix > declinable word (part of nāma)

(2) Root + suffix > dependant verb (gerund, infinitive) {part of verb}

Gerund verb and infinitive verb

Na + verb > negative verb

V

So gacchati ~ he goes.
So na gacchati ~ he does not go.
Tvaṃ idha vasasi ~ you stay here.
Tvaṃ idha na vasasi ~ you don’t stay here.

Te dhāvanti ~ they run.

Te na dhāvanti ~ they do not run.

So gacchati ~ he goes.
Api so gacchati ~ does he go?
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 32

Api nu so gacchati ~ does he go?

Kiṃ so gacchati ~ does he go?
So gacchati kiṃ ~ does he go?

Gerund Verb
Gerund suffix -tvā, -ya

Gerund verb is derived from

(1) Root + tvā {change, Elison, or Assimilation of conso./ vow.}
√gam (to go) + tvā > gamtvā {m > n} > gantvā
√kar (to do) + tvā > kartvā (r is elided) > katvā
√kī (to buy) + tvā > kītvā (ī > e) > ketvā

Y
(2) Verbal base + (i)tvā {‘i’ is inserted before ‘tvā’}
ni √sad > sīd + a > nisīda + (i)tvā > nisīditvā

SR
√kī + nā > kiṇā + (i)tvā > kiṇitvā

√gam (to go)

Gantvā
(1) Having V-ed {having gone}
.I
(2) After V-ing {after going}
(3) Verb and {go and}
So tatra gacchati ~ he goes there.
So tatra vasati ~ he lives there.
EN

So tatra gantvā (tatra) vasati ~ having gone there, he lives.

After going there, he lives.
He goes there and lives.

Ahaṃ tatra vasiṃ. I lived there.

V

Ahaṃ Pāḷiṃ uggaṇhiṃ. I studied Pāḷi.

Ahaṃ tatra {vasa + (i)tvā} vasitvā Pāḷiṃ uggaṇhiṃ.

I lived there and studied Pāḷi.

28 Oct 2022

- Subj of gerund and main verb can be the same or different.

So tato apagacchati. Mayaṃ tatra pāpuṇāma.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 33

{he goes away from there. We arrive there}

So tato apagantvā, mayaṃ tatra pāpuṇāma.
After he going away from there, we arrive there.

- action of gerund can be earlier than or the same as that of main verb.
Suriyo uggacchati. The sun rises up.
Andhakāro antradhāyati. The darkness disappears.
Suriyo uggantvā andhakāro antradhāyati. As soon as the sun rises up the
darkness disappears.

- {the sense of gerund can be reason or mark of the time}

Y
Infinitive Verb (to express the purpose of main verb)
Infinitive suffix~tuṃ

SR
Infinitive verb is derived from
(1) Root + tuṃ {change, Elison, or Assimilation of conso.}
√han (to kill) + tuṃ > hantuṃ {to kill}
√kar + tuṃ (r is dropped, a > ā) > kātuṃ
√kar + tuṃ (rt > tt) > kattuṃ
.I
√su + tuṃ (u > o) sotuṃ {to listen}
(2) Verbal base + tuṃ {‘i’ is inserted before ‘tuṃ’}
√kī + nā > kiṇā + (i)tuṃ > kiṇituṃ
√chid + -ṃ-a > chinda + tuṃ > chindituṃ {to cut}
EN

√dis + e > dese + tuṃ > desetuṃ

√is (to wish) > icch + a > iccha + ti > icchati ~ he wishes.
√is (to seek)> es + a > esa + ti > esati ~ he seeks.

So tatra visituṃ gantvā idha āgacchati.

V

Having gone there to stay, he comes here.

√gam + (i)tvā > gamitvā

gamati

Ud √ṭhā (dṭh > ṭṭh)> uṭṭhā + ya > uṭṭhāya, uṭṭhatvā*

Ud √ṭhā > ṭhah (dṭh > ṭṭh) uṭṭhah + a + ti > uṭṭhahati > uṭṭhaha + (i)tvā >
uṭṭhahitvā

31 Oct 2022
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 34

ni √sad + ya (dy > jj) > nisajja

{t, th, d, dh, n + y}
{ty, thy, dy, dhy, ny}
ty > cc
thy > cch
dy > jj
dhy > jjh
ny > ññ

pa √āp + uṇā > pāpuṇā

pa √āp + ṇu (pappu)> pappo + ya > pappoya > pappuyya

Y
{long vowel + single cons. = short vowel + double cons.}
[oy > uyy]
aā

SR iī
uū
e {a + i}
o {a + u}
patvā
.I
pa √āp + tvā > paāptvā > pāptvā > paptvā > patvā

gantvā, indriya
EN

√ñā {√jñā > (jñ > ññ > ñ} ñā) {jñ > jj > jā}
jānāti
ñatvā
paññā

√cur + e > core + tvā > coretvā, + tuṃ > coretuṃ

V

Desetvā, desetuṃ
Bhāvetvā, bhāvetuṃ

√rud + a > roda/ ruda

√ruh (to grow) + a > ruha/ roha

√i = √gam (to go)

ā √i = ā √gam (to come)

√i > e
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 35

ā √i > e

√dis (to see) > pass + a > passa +(i) tvā > passitvā/ passituṃ
√dis + tvā > distvā > ditvā?/ disvā
√dis + tuṃ {st > tth/ ṭṭh} > diṭṭhuṃ?/ daṭṭhuṃ
√dis = <(ṛ > i, ś > s) √dṛś
√dṛś + tuṃ (ṛ > a, ś > s) > dastuṃ (st > ṭṭh) > daṭṭhuṃ

ṛ>a
kṛta > kata
ṛ>i
ṛśi > isi (ascetic)

Y
ṛ>u
ṛju > uju (straight)
ṛ > ar

SR √kṛ = √kar
ṛ > ra

√dis (to see) + a

√dis + e (causative)> dese (to let sb see)
.I
√cur > curati

02 Nov 2022
EN

√ad (to eat) + a + ti > adati ~ he eats

su (well) √ad (to eat well ~ to taste) + ya + ti > suadati > svadyati (sv > ss > s) > sad >
sā + ya + ti
√sad > sā (√kar > kā, √gam > gā)
[u/ū > v + vowel]
[double consonants at very beginning ~ (1) one of them is dropped, (2)
V

vowel ‘a, i, or u’ is inserted between them ]

√sā (to taste) + ya + ti > sāyati

√nī (to carry) + tvā > netvā/ netuṃ

√ji (to conquer) + tvā > jetvā/ jetuṃ

√kī (to buy) ~ kiṇāti

vi √kī (to sell) ~ vi(k)kiṇāti
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 36

√krī (kr > kk > k) > √kī

[r + n > ṇ/ t > ṭ]

√k(r)ī + nā (ī > i, n > ṇ) > kiṇā

vi √krī + nā (kr > kk, ī > i, n > ṇ) > vikkiṇā

√bhuj (to eat) + ṃ-a > bhuṃja > bhuñja + ti

Bhuñja + (i)tvā > bhuñjitvā/ bhuñjituṃ

√bhuj + tvā > bhujtvā > bhutvā

Y
√bhuj + tuṃ > bhujtuṃ (jt > tt) bhuttuṃ (u>o) > bhottuṃ

√kar + o + ti > karoti

SR
karo + (i)tvā/ (i)tuṃ > karitvā, karituṃ
√kar + tvā > kartvā > katvā
√kar + tuṃ > kartuṃ (rt > tt) > kattuṃ
√kar > kā + tuṃ > kātuṃ
[long vowel + single cons = short vowel + double cons.]
.I
[short vowel + single cons = long vowel]
√jan > jā
√kar > kā
√gam > gā
EN

anu √sās (to admonish) + a + ti > anusāsati

anusāsitvā, anusāsiya

√pā > piv (to drink) + a + ti > pivati

V

Ajja ~ today
Hiyyo ~ yesterday
Suve, sve ~ tomorrow
So ~ he
Sā ~ she

Four stages of Pāḷi Language [William Geiger]

(1) Jātaka, dhammapada, suttanipāta (poetic type)
(2) Prose type
(3) Commentaries and sub-commentaries
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 37

(4) Other Texts written in Pāḷi

Root + tvā (1 stage)

Gerund & Infinitive

(1) Root + suffix (change, elision, assimilation)
(2) Verbal + suffix (‘i’ is inserted before suffix)

Gerund ~ (1) having V-ed/en, (2) after V-ing, (3) Verb and
Infinitive ~ {used to denote purpose of main verb} ~ to do

04 Nov 2022

Y
So tatra nisīditvā tato uṭṭhāti.
uṭṭhāti ~ uṭṭhā (ud √ṭhā ~ to stand up) + ti (present tense, 3rd, sl.) ~ he stands up.

SR
tato uṭṭhāti ~ he stands up from there.

tatra nisīditvā < nisīda {ni √sad > sīd ~ to sit down}+ (i)tvā
- Having sat down there
- After sitting down there
.I
- Sit down there and

Mayaṃ (subj) idāni āgantvā vapituṃ tahiṃ gacchissāma

EN

Gerund / infinitive (indeclinable ~ adv.)

Adv before the verb it is connected with

Sace tumhe tato āgamma idha vaseyyātha, mayaṃ tatra gantvā vasituṃ sakkuṇissāma.

√sak + ṇu (kṇ > kk, u > o)+ ti > sakkoti ~ can/ be able
V

√sak + uṇā + ti > sakkuṇāti

Sakkuṇā + issāma

[sace/ yadi/ ce + opt. Verb]

If you like to live here, come and stay.

If ~ yadi/ sace
You ~ tvaṃ/ tumhe
Like ~ icchati ~ iccheyyāsi/ iccheyyātha
To live here ~ idha vasituṃ
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 38

Sace tvaṃ idha vasituṃ iccheyyāsi

Sace tumhe idha vasituṃ iccheyyātha,
Come and {verb and} ~ āgantvā
Stay ~ vasāhi/ vasatha
āgantvā vasāhi/ vasatha

Sace tvaṃ idha vasituṃ iccheyyāsi, āgantvā vasāhi.

Sace tumhe idha vasituṃ iccheyyātha, āgantvā vasatha.

[In Pāḷi there is a single main Verb in a single sentence, if more than one,
previous verbs will be replaced by gerund verb.]

Y
Come and stay.
Come ~ āgacchāhi > ā
Stay ~ vasāhi

SR
[ceva ….. ca = either …. or]
So gacchati ceva dhāvati ca.

07 Nov 2022
.I
I wish /to go there and expound. = ahaṃ tattha gantvā desetuṃ icchāmi.
I = Ahaṃ
Wish = icchati > icchāmi
EN

go and = gantvā
There = tatra/ tattha/ tahiṃ
To expound = desetuṃ
To go there and expound = tattha gantvā desetuṃ
I wish = ahaṃ icchāmi
V

To go there and expound

To go there = gantuṃ
To expound = desetuṃ

Ahaṃ tatra gantuṃ icchitvā desemi = I wish and to go there expound.

Mayaṃ tatra kiṇituṃ na gacchāma.

Te idha āgantvā pacitvā gacchanti, tumhe bhutvā pivitvā sayatha.

Te tatra kasitvā idha āgacchiṃsu.
Mayaṃ hantuṃ na icchāma.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 39

Āma, ahaṃ jānāmi, tvaṃ coretuṃ icchasi.

Sace so tatra gantuṃ iccheyya, so gacchatu.

Iccheyya - would/ might wish

{sace/ yadi + opt. Verb}

Sace so tatra gaccheyya, (so) gacchatu.

If he (would) go there, let him go.

Te tatra pāpuṇituṃ icchiṃsu.

Sace tvaṃ tatra gantvā desesi > deseyyāsi, te suṇeyyuṃ.

Y
21 Nov 2022
Ito gantvā kattha tvaṃ tatra vasissasi.

SRSace tvaṃ iccheyyāsi, idha vasāhi.

Tvaṃ pacituṃ icchasi kiṃ.
So jinituṃ na sakkoti.
Ahaṃ passituṃ/ daṭṭhuṃ sakkomi.
.I
-ṇu, -ṇā, -uṇā
√sak (to be able) + ṇu (sakṇu) {kṇ > kk, u> o} > sakko + ti

Lesson 10 ~ Nouns
EN

4 Parts of Speech
Prefix (upasagga/ upasāra)
Indeclinable particle (nipāta)
Nouns (nāma)
Verb (Ākhyāta)
V

5 kinds of nouns
Nāma (nouns, adjectives)
Sabbanāma (pronouns, pronominal adjectives)
Samāsanāma (compound noun)
Taddhitanāma (secondary derivative noun)
Kitanāma (primary derivative noun)

2 kinds of Nāma (nouns)

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 40

(1) Vowel ending noun; such as buddha, dhamma, isi, and so on

(2) Consonantal ending noun; manas, rājan, satimat, and so on

Forms of Nouns are changed in three genders, two numbers, and eight cases;
Three Genders
(1) Masculine gender
(2) Neuter gender
(3) Feminine gender

Two Numbers
(1) Singular
(2) Plural

Y
Eight Cases
(1) Nominative case (subject)

SR
(2) Vocative case
(3) Accusative case
(addressing, calling)
(object)
(4) Instrumental case (with, by)
(5) Dative case (to, for)
(6) Ablative case (from)
.I
(7) Genitive case (of, -’s)
(8) Locative case (at, in, on)

(1) Masculine Vowel ending noun can end in -a, -i, -ī, -u, -ū, -o*;
EN

Buddha (the Buddha)

Muni (a sage)
Senānī (a general)
Garu (a teacher)
Vidū (a wise one)
Go (an ox)
V

(2) Neuter vowel ending noun in -a, -i, -ī, -u, -ū.
(3) Feminine vowel ending noun in -ā, -i, -ī, -u, -ū.
(4) Consonantal ending noun in -t, -n, -s, -r.

23 Nov 2022
Masculine Noun ending in Vowel -a, -i, -ī, -u, -ū.
Lesson 10, 11 ~ Nominative
{Lesson 12 ~ adjective & some words’ usage}
Lesson 13 ~ Vocative and Accusative
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 41

Lesson 14 ~ Instrumental and Ablative

{Lesson 15 ~ Past Participle}
Lesson 16 ~ Dative and Genitive
Lesson 17 ~ Locative

Neuter Noun ending in Vowel -a, -i, -ī, -u, -ū. Lesson 18.
Feminine Noun ending in Vowel -ā, -i, -ī, -u, -ū. Lesson 19 & 20.

Consonantal Nouns ~ Lesson 21, 22, 23, & 24.

Masculine Nouns
Nominative Case

Y
Stem Singular Plural
-a > -o > -ā
-i -i > -ī, -ayo
-ī
-u
-ū
SR -ī
-u
-ū
-ī, > -ino
> -ū, -avo
-ū, > -uno
.I
Buddha > buddho Buddhā (the Buddhas)
-s -ah {-ā/ -o}
{a + s > as > o} {a + ah > ā > ā}
EN

Muni > muni munī, munayo {muni + o}

{i + s > is > i} {i + ah > ih > ī}
{i + ah (> o) > i > ay + o > ayo}
Senānī> senānī senānī, senānino {senānī > in + o}
Garu > garu garū, garavo {garu > av + o}
Vidū > vidū vidū, viduno {vidū > un + o}
V

Lesson 11
- Subject is expressed by the Nominative.
- Subject = finite verb in Number and Person.
ava > o √gam + a + ti > ogacchati
√ruh > roh + a + ti > rohati

-ya- {passive sign suffix}

√jan > jā + ya + ti > jāyati ~ is produced
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 42

25 Nov 2022
Masculine Nouns Ending in Vowels
Nominative Case -s, -ah/o

Stem Remark Singular Remark Plural

-a -a + s > -o -a + ah > -ā

-i -i + s > -i -i + ah > ih > -ī,

-i > ay + o > -ayo

-ī -ī + s > -ī -ī + ah > -ī,

-ī > in + o > -ino

Y
-u -u + s > -u -u + ah > -ū,
-u > av + o > -avo

SR
Upajjhāya
-ū

So Bhavati ~ he is
-ū + s > -ū -ū + ah >
-ū > un + o >
-ū,
-uno

Setu bhavati ~ the bridge is.

.I
Setu atthi ~ there is a bridge.
Sumaṅgalo ayaṃ kālo.

Kacci khamanīyaṃ kacci yāpanīyaṃ

EN

28 Nov 2022
Lesson 12
Adjectives;
Three Functions of Adj.;
(1) modifier to a noun,
V

(2) a predicate (as a verb function), and

(3) a subject complement (with some verbs such as √bhū, √as, and so on)

If adj. is used as a modifier

- Adj. = Noun in Gender, Number, and Case
E.g., seto (adj. white) asso (masc. nom. sl. ~ horse) ~ the white horse.
- Adj. (if a single one) + Noun ~ seto asso
- Noun + Adj. (if two or more) ~ kutumbiko (masc. N. nom. sl.) aḍḍho
mahaddhano mahābhogo,
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 43

If adj. is used as a predicate or subject complement function

- If predicate is a noun, generally Subj. = Noun. in Gender, Number, and Case (at
least in Case) ~ Puttā {masc. Nom. pl.} manussānaṃ vatthu {neut. Nom. sl.}
(children are men’s wealth.)
- If predicate is adj., Subj. = Adj. in Gender Number, and Case
saṅkhārā aniccā (predicate).
Pañho kallo hoti (subject complement) ~ the question is clever.
Bhavati > (bh > h, ava > o) > hoti ~ fut. Hehiti, hohiti, hehissati, hohissati.
Noun as a Modifier to another Noun is called ‘Noun in Apposition’
- Generally Noun = Noun in Gender, Number, and Case (at least in Case)
William, a teacher
Sāriputto mahāthero ~ the Great elderly monk, Sāriputta

Y
Nāma ~ named, by name
Sāriputto nāma thero ~ the thera Sāriputta by name,
Rājā nāma ajātasattu ~ the king named Ajātasattu

SR
Natthi (na + atthi) {there is not, there are not} (particle)
Musā (lie) as a predicate
.I
Some Euphonic Combinations;
-a + -a > ā
-i + -i > ī
-u + -u > ū
EN

-o + -a, -i, -u > -o’

-ṃ > m + vowel

30 Nov 2022

Sat (good) + dhamma > saddhamma

V

Sat + purisa > sappurisa

kuṭubmika
Ayya (masc.) ayyā (fem.)
Dur + vaṇṇa > duvvaṇṇa > dubbaṇṇa
Dur + labha > dullabha
Dur + gandha > duggandha
Su + gandha > sugandha
Pāpa, pāpaka
Kusala ~ wholesome
Akusala ~ unwholesome
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 44

Abhi (special) + rūpa > abhirūpa

Saha (together) + dhana (property) > sadhana
Dhana + ika (having) > dhanika
Dhamma + ika > dhammika
Saṁgha + ika > saṁghika / saṅghika

Ud √pad + ya + ti (dp > pp, dy > jj) > uppajjati

√kam (to move) + a + ti > kamati

nikkhamati < nis + √kam + a + ti (sk > kkh) ~ sets out
√gam (to go) + a + ti > gacchati
niggacchati < nir + √gam + a + ti (rg > gg) ~ sets out

Y
{ni / nis / nir}
ni + √sad + a + ti > nisīdati ~ he sits

SR
Ajja, suve, sve, hiyyo

Kiso tvamasi {tvaṃ + asi} dubbaṇṇo

Tvaṃ kiso dubbaṇṇo asi. You are lean and discloured.
.I
Idāni kasmā so puriso ito nikkhamati?

5 Dec 2022
EN

Subj ~ Nom.
Adj./ noun → subj. ~ nom.
adj./ noun (predicate/ subj -complement) ~ nom.
1. Saṅkhārā na sassatā.

Lesson 13
V

Vocative Case & Accusative Case

Masculine Nouns Ending in Vowels

Vocative Case

Stem Remark Singular Remark Plural

-a -a -a -ā

-i -i -i The same as -ī,

Nominative -ayo
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 45

-ī -ī > -i Plural form -ī,

-ino

-u -u -u -ū,
-avo

-ū -ū > -u -ū,
-uno

Buddha Buddha Buddhā

Muni Muni Munī, Munayo
Senānī > Senāni Senānī, Senānino

Y
Garu Garu Garū, Garavo
Vidū > Vidu Vidū, Viduno

SR
Masculine Nouns Ending in Vowels
Accusative Case -ṃ (sl.)

Stem

-a
Remark

-a + ṃ
Singular

-aṃ
Remark

-a >
Plural

-e
.I
-i -i + ṃ -ī,
-ayo
-iṃ
-ī -ī > i + ṃ The same as -ī,
EN

Nominative -ino
Plural form
-u -u + ṃ -ū,
-avo
-uṃ
-ū -ū > u + ṃ -ū,
-uno
V

NB. -ṃ is always added to the short vowel, or before -ṃ long vowel always
becomes short.

Buddha Buddhaṃ Buddhe

Muni Muniṃ
Senānī Senāniṃ
Garu Garuṃ
Vidū Viduṃ
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 46

7 Dec 2022
√bhuj (to eat) + -ṃ-a > bhuṃja > bhuñja + ti
√vand + a + ti > vandati
√vad + -ṃ-a + ti
√si (to lie down){si > se > say} + a > saya + ti > sayati
√nī (to lead, carry) {nī > ne > nay} + a > naya + ti > nayati
[aya> e, ava > o] [ayi/ avi > e]
Sayati {aya > e} > seti
Nayati {aya > e} > neti
√bhū {bhū > bho > bhav}+ a > bhava + ti > bhavati
Bhavati {ava > o} > bhoti > hoti
Sādhu > sāhu

Y
Idha > iha

Macchariya {ariya > ayira > era}> macchera

SR
Ācariya > ācera
√bhū > bho > bhav + a > bhava + issati > bhavissati
Bhavissati {bh > h, avi > e} > hessati
√bandh + a + ti > bandhati ~ ties up
Men tie up a raft
.I
Manussā kullaṃ bandhanti.

Tvaṃ, Brahmaṇa, jiṇṇo asi.

Jiṇṇo tvaṃ asi, brahmaṇa.
EN

So adhammaṃ na bhaje.

Idāni Vihāraṃ Gacchāma, mitta.

V

Ud √gah + nā {dg > gg, n > ṇ, hṇ > ṇh} > uggaṇhā + ti > uggaṇhāti
Ava √jñā {jñ > jj > j} + nā + ti > avajānāti

√hā {hāhā > hahā > jahā}+ ti > jahāti

Pa √hā {hāhā > hahā > jahā}+ a > pajaha + ti > pajahati
Vi + pa (pra) √hā {hāhā > hahā > jahā}+ a > vippajaha + ti > vippajahati

√pā (to drink) {pāpā > pipā} + a + ti > pipati {p > b} > pibati {b > v} > pivati
Pipāsā
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 47

√nas + ya + ti {sy > ss} > nassati

Pari √vajj + e + ti > parivajjeti

√jar + a + ti > jarati ~ he decays

√jar + na {a > i, n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ} > jiṇṇa ~ decayed

Ud √ṭhā > ṭhe {dṭh > ṭṭh }+ hi > uṭṭhehi

Brahmin

12 Dec 2022
Lesson 14

Y
Instrumental & Ablative Case

Instrumental case ~ with, by, by means of, because of

SR Ablative case ~ from, than

Instrumental Case -nā / -bhi

.I
Stem Remark Sl. Remark Pl.

-a -a > e + nā > na -ena -a > e + bhi/ hi -ebhi, -ehi

-i -i + nā -i > ī + bhi/ hi
EN

-inā -ībhi, -īhi

-ī -ī > i + nā -ī + bhi/ hi

-u -u + nā -u > ū + bhi/ hi
-unā -ūbhi, -ūhi
-ū -ū > u + nā -ū + bhi/ hi
V

Buddha buddhena buddhebhi, buddhehi

Muni muninā munībhi, munīhi
Senānī senāninā senānībhi, senānīhi
Garu garunā garūbhi, garūhi
Vidū vidunā vidūbhi, vidūhi

N.B., before singular case long vowel > short,

Before plural case short vowel > long

[Together + with]
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 48

Saddhiṃ, saha (together) + Instr. Word

Buddhena saddhiṃ ~ together with the Buddha
Buddhena saha ~ together with the Buddha

Ablative Case -smā (> mhā, ā) / -bhi

Stem Remark Sl. Remark Pl.

-a -a + smā, mhā, ā -asmā, -ebhi, -ehi

-amhā,
-ā The same as
Instrumental
-i -i + smā, mhā, (n)ā -ismā, Case Plural

Y
-imhā, Form -ībhi, -īhi
-ī -ī > i + smā, mhā, (n)ā -inā

-u

-ū SR -u + smā, mhā, (n)ā

-ū > u + smā, mhā, (n)ā

-usmā,-
umhā,-u
nā
-ūbhi, -ūhi
.I
Buddha buddhasmā, buddhamhā, buddhā
Muni munismā, munimhā, muni(n)ā
Senānīsenānismā, senānimhā, senāni(n)ā
Garu garusmā, garumhā, garu(n)ā
EN

Vidū vidusmā, vidumhā, vidu(n)ā

N.B., sm {s > h}> hm > mh

Gāma (a village) ~ gāmato, nagara (a town) ~ nagarato

Arahant, gacchant ~ arahato, arahantassa, gacchato, gacchantassa
V

Bhagavant ~ bhagavato, bhagavantassa

Vinā ~ without, except, apart from

Vinā + Acc./Ins./ Abl. word
Vinā buddhaṃ, buddhena, buddhasmā
Ahaṃ mittaṃ vinā gantuṃ sakkomi

14 Dec 2022
Saha, saddhiṃ (together)+ -inst. (with)
E.g., mittena saha, mittena saddhiṃ
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 49

Buddhehi saha, buddhehi saddhiṃ

Instrumental case mostly denotes helping tool for the action of verb.
Pādena gacchati ~ he goes on foot.
Yānena gacchati ~ he goes by a vehicle.

Ablative case denotes starting point of the action.

Gāmasmā nagaraṃ gacchati. He goes from a village to a town.

Vinā (without, except, apart from) + acc./ inst./ abl.

Buddhaṃ/ buddhena/ buddhasmā vinā ahaṃ jīvituṃ na sakkomi

Y
Api ~ also, even
So api, so’pi ~ he also, even he

SRPana, tu ~ but, as for

Vā, udāhu ~ or,

vā ….. vā ~ either … or
.I
kodha/ akkodha [na > a + kodha = krodha]
Na > (1) a + Cons, (2) an + Vowel.
Ariya ~ noble
EN

Na > an + ariya > anariya ~ ignoble

Assa ~ a horse
Na > an + assa > anassa ~ not a horse

Brahman ~ a brahmin
Na > a + brahman > abraham ~ abrahmā ~ non brahmin
V

Dur + gata > duggata

√cu (cyu) + a + ti
Instrumental case ~ adverb
Dhamma ~ righteousness
Dhammena ~ with righteousness, righteously, in accordance with the dhamma.
Upa + saṃ √kam + a + ti > upasaṅkamati ~ approaches

16 Dec 2022
Lesson (15) Past Participle
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 50

Kita {root/ verbal base + suffix} (1) declinable one (nāma) such as p.p, pr.p, agent noun
and so on, (2) indeclinable one (verb) such as gerund, infinitive and so on

Past Participle Suffix; ta, na, va*

● Formation of Past Participle

(1) Root + ta/ na {change or elision will be applied}
(2) Verbal Base + ta {‘i’ will be inserted}
√gam + ta > gata
Dhāva + (i)ta > dhāvita
Dese + (i)ta > desita
Cinte + (i)ta > cintita

Y
[1] -r, -m, -n + ta {r, m, n, get dropped.}
mata, kata, gata, rata, hata, khata

SR √mar + ta > mata

√kar + ta > kata
√gam + ta > gata
√ram + ta > rata
√har + ta > hata
.I
√han + ta > hata
√khan + ta > khata

[2] -r + na {a> i, n>ṇ & rṇ > ṇṇ}

EN

√tar + na > tiṇṇa, tarati ~ tara + (i)ta > tarita

ā √car + na > āciṇṇa,
√jar + na > jiṇṇa

19 Dec 2022
[3] -d + na {dn>nn}
V

√chād + na > channa,

√chid + na > chinna,
√bhid + na > bhinna,
pa √sad + na > pasanna, [pasīdati]
ni √sad > sīd + na > nisinna [nisīdati]

[4] -s + ta {st > ṭṭh/ tth}

√dis + ta > diṭṭha,
√tus + ta > tuṭṭha, saṃ √tus + ta > santuṭṭha
√vas + ta > vuttha
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 51

√dis = √dṛś
√tus = √tuṣ
√vas = √vas

[5] -dh/bh + ta {dht/bht > ddh}

√budh + ta > buddha,
√labh + ta > laddha

[6] -r + t/ n {t >ṭ / n > ṇ}

√har + ta > hata > haṭa
√kar + ta > kata (adj. done)/ kaṭa (noun. A mat)
√kar + ana > karana > karaṇa/ √har + ana > haraṇa

Y
[7] -ā + ta/ na {ā > i/ ī}
√ṭhā + ta > ṭhita,

SR√pā + ta > pīta,

√hā + na > hīna
√dhā + ta > hita
√dā {dādā > dād > did}+ na {didna} > dinna
.I
Ṭhāna {√ṭhā + ana}

[8] -h + ta {ht > ḍḍh}

√dah + ta > daḍḍha
EN

[9] -h + ta {a/u > ū, ht > ḷh ~ ūḷh}

√ruh + ta > rūḷha, {ht ~ t > ḷ~hḷ > ḷh}
√vah + ta > vūḷha

[10] va > vu/ ma > mu ~ {labialization}

V

saṃ √majj + ta > sammuṭṭha,

ni √majj + ta > nimuṭṭha {ni √majj + va{jjv > jv > gv > gg?} > nimugga}
ud √majj + ta > ummuṭṭha {ummugga}

[11] -jj + ta {jjt > jt > ṭṭh}

saṃ √sajj + ta > saṃsaṭṭha

[12] any other cons. + t > tt {any other cons. follow ‘t’ in assimilation}
√bhuj + ta > bhutta,
√muc + ta > mutta,
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 52

√vap + ta > vutta,

√vac + ta > vutta,
√vad + ta > vutta

[13] c > k, j > g ~

√pac + (ṇ)a > pāka (a cook),
√bhuj + (ṇ)a > bhoga (property),
√caj + (ṇ)a > cāga (donation),
√yuj + (ṇ)a > yoga (practice),
yoga + in > yogin {dhana + in > dhanin}

21 Dec 2022

Y
√bhaj + a + ti > bhajati > bhajita
√bhaj + (i) ta > bhajita

SR
Bhaja + (i) ta > bhajita

√chid + ta/ na {dn > nn}

Chidda
.I
√cur + e + ti > coreti > core + (i)ta > corita
√cu > co > cav + a + ti > cavati
√cu + ta > cuta
√ḍas + a + ti > ḍasati
EN

√ḍas + -ṃ-a > ḍaṃsa + ti > ḍaṃsati

√bhū > Bhāveti

√bhū + ta > bhūta (bhavati ~ been)
Bhāve + (i)ta > bhāvita
Core + (i) ta> corita
V

√kar > karoti > kata

√kar + e + ti > kāreti > kāre + (i)ta > kārita

Root + pp. Suffix (ancient form)

Verbal base + pp. Suffix (later development)

√dis (pass) > passati

√gah + nā > gaṇhā + ti > gaṇhāti > gahita/ gaṇhita

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 53

√hā + (a) + ti {hā > hāhā > jāhā > jahā }>
Jahā + a > jahati/ jahāti
pajahati

23 Dec 2022

√jan janeti~ prouduces /jāyati ~ is produced, is born

√jan > jā + ta > jāta
√kar > kā
√gam > gā

√muc + e + ti > moceti

Y
√muc + -ṁ-a > muñca + ti > muñcati
√muc + ya + ti > muccati
√muc + ta > mutta

SR moce + (i)ta > mocita

muñca + (i)ta > muñcita
mucca + (i)ta > muccita
√pac + va > pakva > pakka
[√pac + ta > pakta > pakka/ patta]
.I
Ni √majj + na {a > u, jj > j > g}> nimugna {gn > gg} > nimugga
Pa √āp + ta {pt > tt, a + ā > ā > a} > patta < pāpuṇāti/ pappoti

Pa √hā > pajahāti

EN

Pa √hā + na {ā > ī} > pahīna

Pajahā + (i)ta > pajahita
√sā + ya + ti > sāyati > sāyita

The Contextual Meaning of Past Participle;

(1) Past tense,
V

(2) Present perfect,

(3) Past perfect,
(4) Adjective, and
(5) Gerund or absolutive

Past participle + hoti ~ present perfect

E.g., puriso āgato hoti ~ a man has come.

Past participle + ahosi ~ past perfect

E.g., puriso āgato ahosi ~ a man had come.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 54

Āgato puriso ~ the man that came, a coming man

So vihāramhā idhāgato [idha + āgato] idāni tahiṁ sayati.
He after coming here from the monastery sleeps there now.

(1) Intransitive Root > active past participle = subject

(2) Transitive Root > passive past participle = object

Puriso āgacchati.
Āgato puriso ~ a man that came,.../ puriso āgato ~ a man came, a man has come,
a man had come.

Y
Sūdo odanaṁ pacati ~ the cook cooks rice.
Sūdena Pacito odano ~ rice cooked by the cook
Sūdena pacitaṃ odanaṃ

SR
Subject
Sūdena odano pacito ~ rice is cooked by the cook.

Object Verb
26 Dec 2022

nom. acc. Active

.I
inst./gen. nom. Passive
E.g., puriso odanaṁ pacati ~ a man cooks rice.
√pac + (i/ī)ya + ti/te > paccati/ pacīyati ~ is cooked
e.g., purisena odano paccati/ pacīyati. Rice is cooked by a man.
EN

Purisena odano pacito ~ rice is cooked by a man.

Purisena pacito odano ~ rice cooked by a man

Purisā rukkhe chindanti. Men cut trees.

purisehi rukkhā chinnā ~ trees are cut by men.
V

Gāmamhā āgataṃ purisaṁ na passāmi.

Puriso gāmamhā āgacchati/ āgato.
Gāmamhā āgato puriso ~ the coming man from the village

*** The past participle is ending in ‘a’, so it declines as ‘buddha’ for masc. and as
‘citta’ for neut. For fem. ‘ā’ is added to the past participle and declines as ‘kaññā’.

To use a past participle in a perfect active sense

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 55

-ta + vant/ vat/ āvin > -tavant/ -tavat/ -tāvin ~

√kar + ta > kata ~ done
kata + vant > katavant ~ have done
Kammaṃ kataṃ ~ the work is done.
Puriso kammaṁ katavanto ~ a man has done the work.
√bhū + a + ti > bhavati > hoti
a + ho + (s)i > ahosi
a + {ho} he + (s)uṁ > {ahosuṁ} ahesuṁ
Rukkhamhā patitvā ~ having fallen down from the tree
Mataṃ puttaṁ disvā ~ having seen the son who passed away

Having seen the son who fell down from the tree and died

Y
28 Dec 2022
The rice cooked by the cook was eaten by the servants.

SR
The rice cooked by the cook ~ odana pacita sūdena > sūdena pacito odano
was eaten ~ ahosi bhutta > bhutto ahosi
by the servants. ~ sevakehi

Sūdena pacito/ pakko odano sevakehi bhutto/ bhuñjito ahosi.

.I
Kuhiṁ idha āgato puriso atthi

30 Dec 2022
Past Participle (adj.)
EN

Adj. (1) modifier, (2) predicate

(1) As modifier (Adj.) + N (gender, number, and case)
(2) As predicate (adj.) + Subj. (gender, number, and case)
Past Participle is derived from Verb.
(3) Agent of past participle is expressed with the instrumental case.
Puriso Bhuñjati ~ he eats
V

Purisena bhutta

1. The rice cooked by the cook was eaten by the servants.

Sūdena Pacito Odano Sevakehi bhutto ahosi. [bhutto/ bhuñjito]
Sevakā odanaṁ bhuñjanti
Sevakehi bhutta odana
Sūdo Pacati > sūdena pacita/ pakka

2. We saw the fallen tree.

Mayaṁ patitaṁ rukkhaṁ passimhā
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 56

Patati > patita

3. Where is the man that has come here?

Kattha idha āgato puriso atthi
Āgacchati > āgata

4. The boy ran from here and fell down there.

Kumāro ito dhāvitvā tatra patito.

5. Where has he come from?

Kuto so āgato (hoti)

Y
6. I saw a deer that had been bitten by a snake and had died.
Ahaṁ ahinā ḍasitaṁ mataṁ migaṁ passiṁ.
Ahi Ḍasati > ahinā daṭṭha/ ḍasita

SRMarati > mata

7. The man seeing (having seen) his son returned from the village became happy (glad).
Puriso/ purisā gāmasmā paccāgataṁ puttaṁ disvā tuṭṭho [ahosi/ ahesuṁ].
hoti/ honti
.I
Tussati > tuṭṭha/ tusita
Pati + ā + √gam > paccāgacchati > paccāgata

Tvaṁ abhirūpo asi/ hosi/ bhavasi

EN

8. The house built by the carpenter was bought by the householder.

Kārunā Kārito Geho gahapatinā kīto [ahosi]

Gahapatinā geho kīto, =

Geho .
V

Gahapati Kiṇāti > kīta/ kiṇita

√kar + e + ti > kāreti ~ causes to do = builds
Kāru Kāreti > kārita
√mā (to measure) + āpe + ti > māpeti ~ causes to measure = builds
Kāru Māpeti > māpita

9. The trees cut by the servants fell down.

Sevakehi Chinnā Rukkhā patitā.
Chindati > chinna/ chindita
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 57

10. The men who went to the monastery saw the Thera and bowed down.
Vihāraṁ Gatā Purisā theraṁ disvā vandiṁsu.
Gacchati > gata

11. Where have those men come from?

Kuto te purisā āgatā [honti].

Ta (that) so (nom.sl.) it/ he/ so puriso ~ the man

Te (nom. pl.) they ~ te purisā ~ the men/ those men

02 Jan 2023
Lesson 16

Y
Dative & Genitive

Stem

-a

-i
SR
Dative & Genitive Case ~ -ssa, -no & -naṁ

Remark

+ ssa

+ -ssa, -no
Singular

assa

-issa, -ino
Remark

a > ā + naṁ

i > ī + naṁ
Plural

-ānaṁ

-īnaṁ
.I
-ī ī > i + ssa, -no -issa, -ino ī + naṁ -īnaṁ

-u + ssa, -no -ussa, -uno u > ū + naṁ -ūnaṁ

EN

-ū ū > u + -ssa, -no -ussa, -uno ū + naṁ -ūnaṁ

N.B., Before singular case ending ‘ssa, no’ long vowel becomes short.
Before plural case ending ‘naṁ’ short vowel becomes long.

Buddha buddhassa buddhānaṁ

V

Muni munissa, munino munīnaṁ

Senānī senānissa, senānino senānīnaṁ
Garu garussa, garuno garūnaṁ
Vidū vidussa, viduno vidūnaṁ

Dāyako buddhassa pupphaṁ deti.

Upāsako bhikkhussa bhattaṁ deti.
Dative Case = to, for
Genitive Case = of, -’s
Buddhassa sāvako
Bhukkhūnaṁ cīvarāni
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 58

Special dative case singular sign -āya

Savana ~ listening ~ savanāya ~ for listening/ to listen
Atthāya, hitāya, sukhāya

Abhi √ruh + a + ti > abhiruhati, abhirūḷha

Ava √ruh + a + ti {ava > o} > oruhati, orūḷha

04 Jan 2023

Y
General Word Order In Pāḷi Sentence

(adv.) subj. (adv.) obj. verb (adv.)

SR
(time/ place)

Subj. obj.
(acc. Inst. dat.
abl. loc.)

verb
(time/ place)

Idāni Buddho dhammaṁ deseti jetavanae.

.I
Idāni Buddho sāriputtena saddhiṁ sāvatthinagarasmā rājagahaṁ gacchati.

Subj. obj. Verb

EN

Arahaṁ bhagavā Buddho dhammaṁ deseti.

Sabbaññunā desito dhammo vihāraṁ gatehi senānino puttehi suto.

Suṇāti > Suta ~ adj. Predicate nom. Sl. (main verb)

Deseti > Desita > desito
V

Dhamma > dhammo

Putta > puttehi
Gacchati > gata

N.B., Gen. shows connection, possession and it is put immediately before a noun
connected with it.

The dhamma expounded by the Omniscient One is listened by the sons of general (the
ge), who have gone to the monastery.

Senānino puttā sabbaññunā desitaṁ dhammaṁ sotuṁ vihāraṁ gatā.

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 59

Alagaddena daṭṭho migo tattheva patitvā mato.

Marati > mata > mato ~ nom. Sl.

Dasati > daṭṭha > daṭṭho ~ bitten, which is bitten, which was bitten, which has
been bitten, which had been bitten
Miga > migo
Patati > patitvā

A deer bitten by a snake has fallen there itself and died.

Alagadden daṭṭho migo

06 Jan 2023

Y
Exercise (b)

1. The ox beaten with a bamboo by the householder’s servant ran away.

SR
apadhāvati > apadhāva + i > apadhāvi
Beat = paharati > pahaṭa (pp)
Servant = sevaka
Adj - modifier (before a noun) and predicate (after a noun)
Gahapatino Sevakena veḷunā Pahaṭo go apadhāvi.
.I
2. The ascetic climbed down (from) the mountain and entered the village for alms.
orūḷho/ oruhito pabbatamhā odanāya gāmaṁ paviṭṭho
Isi/tāpaso pabbatamhā āruhito odanāya/ piṇḍāya gāmaṁ paviṭṭho.
EN

3. The man having seen the thief that entered the house, went and brought the
policemen.
Āneti > ānesi
Puriso gehaṁ paviṭṭhaṁ coraṁ disvā gantvā rājapurise ānesi.
V

Puriso coraṁ gehaṁ paviṭṭhaṁ disvā

4. The householder saw (his) son fallen from the tree and died, and wept.
Gahapati rukkhato patitaṁ mataṁ puttaṁ disvā rodi.
Rukkhato patitvā mataṁ puttaṁ

5. The house bought by the merchant was burnt by (his) enemies.

Geho kīta vāṇijena arīhi
Vāṇijena kīto geho (tassa) arīhi daḍḍho ahosi.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 60

6. Men go to heaven by means of dhamma.

Manussā dhammena saggaṁ gacchanti.

7. Even the heroes were attacked by death.

Vīrāpi maccunā pahaṭā ahesuṁ.

8. Alas, the world will perish!

Nassissati vata loko!
√nas + ya + ti > nassati
Vi √nas + ya + ti > vinassati

9. Rice cooked by the cook was eaten by the beggar’s dog.

Y
Sūdena Pacito odano yācakassa sunakhena bhutto.

10. The man’s oxen were lost (vanished).

SR Purisassa goṇā naṭṭhā ahesuṁ.

Ox = go, ~ go gāvo

Goṇa ~ goṇo goṇā

.I
09 Jan 2023
Lesson 17
Locative Case
EN

Locative case singular (1)-smiṁ {>smi, s > h, (hmi) hm > mh } > (2)- mhi, >(3) -i

Locative Case ~ -smiṁ, -mhi, -i & -su

Stem Remark Singular Remark Plural

V

-a + -smiṁ, -mhi, -i -asmiṁ, -amhi, -a > e + -su -esu

{ai >} -e

-i + -smiṁ, -mhi -ismiṁ, -imhi -i > ī + -su -īsu, -isu

-ī -ī > i + -smiṁ, -mhi -ismiṁ, -imhi -ī + -su -īsu

-u + -smiṁ, -mhi -usmiṁ, -umhi -u > ū + su -ūsu, -usu

-ū -ū > u + -smiṁ, -mhi -usmiṁ, -umhi -ū + su -ūsu

N.B., long vowel before singular case ending becomes short.
Short vowel before plural case ending becomes long.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 61

{a > e}
Buddha buddhasmiṁ, buddhamhi, buddhe buddhesu
Muni munismiṁ, munimhi munīsu, munisu
Senānīsenānismiṁ, senānimhi senānīsu
Garu garusmiṁ, garumhi garūsu, garusu
Vidū vidusmiṁ, vidumhi vidūsu
N.B., Locative case ending is equivalent to English preposition; at, in, on, or among.

pa √vaj (<vvarj<vraj) + a + ti > pabbajati {vraj > vvaj > bbaj} ~ goes forth
Vajati - goes, moves

- pabbajati ~ becomes a religious person

Y
- agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati ~ goes forth from home life to homeless life.

pa √sad > sīd + a + ti > pasīdati/ pa √sad + na > pasanna

SR
√vass + a + ti > vassati
√vass + ta {a > u, sst > st > ṭṭh}> vuṭṭha
√vidh + ya + ti {dhy > jjh} > vijjhati
√vidh + ta {dht > ddh} > viddha
√mā (to measure) + āpe + ti > māpeti ~{causes to measure} to build
.I
māpe + (i)ta > māpita
ud √pad + ya + ti {dp > pp, dy > jj} uppajjati ~ is born, arises
ud √pad + na {dp > pp, dn > nn} > uppanna
upa √pad + ya + ti {dy > jj} > upapajjati ~ is born in
EN

upa √pad + na {dn > nn} upapanna

Manusso sagge uppajjati ~ a man is born in a heaven.
Manusso saggaṁ upapajjati ~ a man is born in a heaven.

[long vowel + single cons. = short vowel + double cons.]

Mātūnaṁ = mātunnaṁ
V

Dvīnaṁ = dvinnaṁ
[long vowel = short vowel + single cons.]
Rājan > rājā, attan > attā

11 Jan 2023
Exercise (a)
1. Ahaṁ hiyyo bhātikassa gehe vasitvā ajja pāto’va idhāgacchiṁ.
Idha + āgacchiṁ
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 62

Yesterday I stayed in (my) brother’s house and came here in the early morning
today.

2. Idāni thero vihārasmiṁ dhammaṁ deseti, kiṁ tumhe dhammaṁ sotuṁ na

gacchatha?
Now the elder expounds the dhamma in the monastery. Don’t you go there to
listen to the dhamma.

3. Girisu tatra tatra ahayo vicaranti.

Snakes move around here and there in the mountain.

4. Idāni devo vassati, mā bahi gacchittha.

Y
Now the rain is falling, don’t go outside.

5. Ajja bahū manussā gāme sannipatiṁsu.

SR
Saṁ + ni √pat + a + ti > sannipatati ~ gathers, assembles.
Today many people gathered in the village.
Saṃ + ā + √gam + a + ti > samāgacchati ~ comes together

6. Maggesu rathā calanti.

.I
Chariots move in roads.

7. Viduno buddhe pasannā.

The wise people are delighted in the Buddha.
EN

Loc. + pasīdati

8. Bahū manussā dhamme pasannā dhammaṁ caritvā saggesu uppannā ahesuṁ.

Many people were delighted in the dhamma, practised the dhamma, and were
born in the heavens.
V

9. Sissā ārāme sannipatitvā kandukehi kīḷiṁsu.

Students gathered in the park and played with the balls.

10. Gahapatino kumārā vijjālayamhā āgantvā bhutvā idāni mañcesu sayanti.

Boys of the householder come from the college, enjoy and lie down in bed now.
Exercise (b)
1. Monkeys move about on the trees.
Vānarā rukkhesu vicaranti.

2. Today many people will gather in the monastery.

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 63

Ajja bahū manussā vihāre sannipatissanti.

3. Good people are delighted in Dhamma.

Sappurisā dhamme pasannā honti.

4. They, having seen the disadvantage of sensual pleasures, entered the order of
monks.
Te kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ disvā pabbajitā.

5. The king, having delighted in the dhamma expounded by the Buddha, went for
refuge to the Buddha, Dhamma, and Saṅgha.
Buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi.

Y
Rājā buddhena desite dhamme pasanno buddhaṁ ca dhammaṁ ca saṅghaṁ ca
saraṇaṁ gacchi.
Rājan, attan, brahman > rājā, attā, brahmā (nom.sl.)

SR
6. The boys moved about in the grove with (their) bad friends, shot and killed many
birds.
Pāpakehi mittehi vanasmiṁ vicaritā bālakā vijjhitvā bahū sakuṇe haniṁsu.
Bālakā vanasmiṁ pāpakehi mittehi vicaritvā vijjhitvā bahū sakuṇe haniṁsu.
.I
13 Jan 2023
7. Now there is a quarrel among people in the village.
Idāni gāme manussesu/ manussānaṁ kalaho atthi.
EN

[adv. subj. + obj. + verb + adv.]

8. Oh friends, you may abstain from killing.

Tumhe, āvuso, pāṇātipātā viramatha/ virameyyātha.
9. The Buddha stayed in the vihāra built by the householder with his friends.
Buddho gahapatinā sahāyakehi/mittehi saddhiṁ māpite/kārite vihāre vasi/ vihari.
V

10. Among gods and men the righteous are the best.
Devamanussesu dhammikā seṭṭhā/ uttamā honti.

Lesson 18 Neuter Nouns

Neuter Nouns end in -a, -i, -ī, -u, -ū.

Only their nominative, vocative and accusative forms are different from
masculine nouns.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 64

Nominative Case Vocative Case Accusative Case

Stem
Sl. -s Pl. -ni Sl. -s Pl. -ni Sl. -ṁ Pl. -ni

-a -aṁ -ā, -āni -a -ā, -āni -aṁ -e, -āni

-i -i -ī, -īni -i -ī, -īni -iṁ -ī, -īni

-ī -ī -ī, -īni -i -ī, -īni -iṁ -ī, -īni

-u -u -ū, -ūni -u -ū, -ūni -uṁ -ū, -ūni

-ū -ū -ū, -ūni -u -ū, -ūni -uṁ -ū, -ūni

Y
Nominative Forms
Phala phalaṁ phalā, phalāni
Aṭṭhi aṭṭhi aṭṭhī, aṭṭhīni
Sudhī
SR
Cakkhu
Gotrabhū
sudhī
cakkhu
gotrabhū

Vocative Forms
sudhī, sudhīni
cakkhū, cakkhūni
gotrabhū, gotrabhūni
.I
Phala phala phalā, phalāni
Aṭṭhi aṭṭhi aṭṭhī, aṭṭhīni
Sudhī sudhi sudhī, sudhīni
Cakkhu cakkhu cakkhū, cakkhūni
EN

Gotrabhū gotrabhu gotrabhū, gotrabhūni

Accusative Forms
Phala phalaṁ phale, phalāni
Aṭṭhi aṭṭhiṁ aṭṭhī, aṭṭhīni
Sudhī sudhiṁ sudhī, sudhīni
V

Cakkhu cakkhuṁ cakkhū, cakkhūni

Gotrabhū gotrabhuṁ gotrabhū, gotrabhūni

16 Jan 2023

Eka + aṁsa > ekaṁsa

Pāpaṇika, vāṇija
Ekaṁ + antaṁ > ekamantaṁ ~ at one side
Karma > kamma
Dharma > dhamma
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 65

-tta
arahat/ arahant (adj.)~ worthy, arahant
Arahat + tta > arahatta (nt.)~ arahatship
mahat/ mahant (adj.) ~ great
Mahat + tta > mahatta (nt.)~ greatness

-(ṇ)ya
Kusala (adj.) ~ clever, skillful
Kusala + (ṇ)ya > kosalya > kosalla (nt.)~ cleverness

Dalidda (adj.) ~poor

Dalidda + (ṇ)ya > dālidd(i)ya (nt.) ~poverty

Y
R + t > ṭ, n > ṇ, l > ḷ

Ā √rabh + a + ti > ārabhati ~ begins

SR
Viriyaṁ ārabhati ~ makes an effort
Ā √rabh + ta {bht > ddh} > āraddha

Ava > o + √dhā > dhādhā > dahā + a + ti > odahati ~ puts down
Sotaṁ odahati ~ gives ear to
.I
Ava > o √dhā {hi}+ ta > ohita

Pa √jñā + āpe + ti > paññāpeti

Paññāpe + (i)ta > paññāpita
EN

Paññāpe + ta > paññāpta > paññatta

Pati > paty > pacc + ā √gam + a + ti > paccāgacchati

Abhi √vad + e + ti > abhivādeti/ abhivādita

V

noun/ adj./ adv. + suffix + vt > verb {denominative verb}

Mama + āya + ti > mamāyati ~

Apa √nī > ne > nay + a + ti > apanayati
Apanayati {aya > e} > apaneti
18 Jan 2023
Exercise (A)
1. Brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā uttarāsaṅgaṁ ekaṁsaṁ karitvā daharānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ
pāde vandi.
Āsanā uṭṭhāya āsanā
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 66

The brahmin stood up from the seat, put the upper robe on one shoulder, and
worshipped the feet of young monks.

2. Therā viriyaṁ ārabhanti.

The elders make an effort.

3. Te sotaṁ odahanti.
They give ear.

4. Bhikkhū bhojanaṁ bhuñjanti.

Bhikkhus enjoy the food.

Y
5. Bālā akusalāni kammāni karonti.
The foolish ones commit unwholesome deeds.

SR
6. Gahapatino cittaṁ pasīdati.
The householder’s mind is pleased.

7. Pāmojjaṁ uppajjati.
Joy arises.
.I
8. Tumhe āvuso ānanda rāgassa pahānaṁ paññapetha, dosassa pahānaṁ
paññapetha, mohassa pahānaṁ paññapetha.
EN

9. Mayaṁ piṇḍapātaṁ bhuñjāma neva davāya na madāya na maṇḍanāya na

vibhūsanāya.
We enjoy/eat alms neither for amusement nor for enjoyment nor for adornment
nor for ornament.

10. Natthi bhikkhave paṇḍitato bhayaṁ.

V

Bhikkhus there is no fear of the wise one.

11. Pāpaṇiko mahattaṁ pāpuṇāti bhogesu.

The merchant obtains prosperity in wealth.

12. Yannūnāhaṁ mahānāmaṁ ekamantaṁ apanetvā dhammaṁ deseyyāmi.

How good would it be if I (would) lead Mahānāma to one side and expound the
Dhamma.

13. Bhikkhū paññattesu āsanesu nisīdiṃsu.

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 67

The bhikkhus sat on the prepared seats.

14. Akusalaṁ bhikkhave pajahatha, sakkā bhikkhave akusalaṁ pajahituṁ.

Bhikkhus, get rid of unwholesome deed.
Sakkā, labbhā ~ is able, is possible
It is possible to get rid of unwholesome deed.
The unwholesome deed is possible to be got rid.
Bhikkhus, One could get rid of unwholesome deed.
root/ base + tuṁ
15. Cakkhūni hāyanti mamāyitāni.
Eyes regarded as one’s own become decayed.

Y
20 Jan 2023
Exercise (B)
1. Monks made an attempt to attain Arahatship.

SR
Bhikkhū arahattaṁ pāpuṇituṁ viriyaṁ ārabhiṃsu.
2. The Buddha expounded the doctrine for getting rid of lust, anger, and delusion.
Buddho rāgassa ca dosassa ca mohassa ca pahānāya dhammaṁ desesi.
√gam > Gacchati ~ goes
√gam + ana > gamana ~ going
.I
Pa √hā + ti > pahāti ~ gets rid
Pahā + ana > pahāna ~ getting rid

3. We went to the house of the general and sat down on the seats that had been
EN

prepared.
Mayaṁ senānino gehaṁ gantvā paññattesu āsanesu nisīdimhā.
Āsanesu paññattesu (loc. Absolute construction)
When seats are prepared,

4. If you become lazy, certainly you will fall into poverty.

V

Sace tvaṁ kusīto bhaveyyāsi, nissaṁsayaṁ tvaṁ dāliddiyaṁ pāpuṇissasi.

Sace + opt.
√pat + a + ti > patati ~ falls
Dāliddiyaṁ patati
Pa √ap + uṇā + ti > pāpuṇāti ~ reaches, attains
Dāliddiyaṁ pāpuṇāti
Sace + opt = opt., present, future verb.

5. How good would it be if I go forth from home to homelessness.

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 68

Yannūnāhaṁ (yannūna ahaṁ) agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyāmi

(pabbajeyyaṁ).
√vaj ~ to go, to move
Pa √vaj (vraj) + a + ti > pavajati > pabbajati
Saggaṁ upapajjati ~ is born in Sagga.
Sagge uppajjati ~ is born in Sagga.

6. They gave ear to hear the teaching of the Buddha.

Te buddhassa dhammaṁ sotuṁ sotaṁ odahiṁsu.
7. Having gone to Jetavana, they saw the Buddha and paid homage (to him).
Jetavanaṁ gantvā te buddhaṁ disvā vandiṁsu.

Y
8. Many meritorious deeds were done by the wise family.
Bahūni puññāni kammāni sudhinā kulena katāni ahesuṁ.

SR
9. In the battlefield many enemies were killed by the general and (his) soldiers.
Saṅgāme bahū arayo senāninā ca yodhehi ca hatā ahesuṁ.

10. The monk went to the forest and sat down at the foot of a tree.
Bhikkhu araññaṁ gantvā rukkhassa mūle nisīdi.
.I
11. Then the Buddha stayed in Nigrodhārāma in the vicinity of the city,
Kapilavatthu.
Atha kho buddho kapilavatthussa nagarassa samīpe nigrodhārāme vihari.
EN

12. The farmers worked in the field in the daytime and returned to (their) houses in
the evening.
Kassakā divā khette kammaṁ katvā sāyaṁ gehe paccāgacchiṁsu.
Kammaṁ karoti ~ works
V

13. Many soldiers were standing at the gate of the city.

Bahū yodhā nagarassa dvāre ṭhitā ahesuṁ (aṭṭhaṁsu).

14. We see visible forms with (our) eyes, hear sounds with (our) ears, and smell
odours with (our) nose.
Mayaṁ cakkhūhi rūpāni passāma, sotehi saddāni suṇāma, ghānena gandhāni
ghāyāma.
{The words withing brackets are not to be translated.}
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 69

23 Jan 2023
Lesson 19
Feminine Nouns

The feminine nouns end in -ā, -i, -ī, -u, -ū as follows;

kaññā (a girl)
ratti (night)
nadī (river)
yāgu (gruel)
vadhū (woman)

Y
Nominative Case -s, -yo

Stem Sl. Pl.

SR -ā

-i

-ī
-ā

-i

-ī
-ā, -āyo

-ī, -iyo
.I
-u -u
-ū, -uyo
-ū -ū
Kaññā kaññā kaññā, kaññāyo
EN

Ratti ratti rattī, rattiyo

{rat(ti)yo > ratyo} {jāt(i)yo > jacco}
Nadī nadī nadī, nadiyo {nad(i)yo > nadyo > najjo}
Yāgu yāgu yāgū, yāguyo
Vadhū vadhū vadhū, vadhuyo
Vocative Case -s, -o
V

Stem Sl. Pl.

-ā -e -ā, -āyo

-i
-i -ī, -iyo
-ī

-u
-u -ū, -uyo
-ū
kaññā kaññe kaññā, kaññāyo
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 70

Ratti ratti rattī, rattiyo

Nadī nadi nadī, nadiyo
Yāgu yāgu yāgū, yāguyo
Vadhū vadhu vadhū, vadhuyo

Accusative Case -ṁ, -yo

Stem Sl. Pl.

-ā -aṁ -ā, -āyo

-i
-iṃ -ī, -iyo

Y
-ī

-u
-uṁ -ū, -uyo

kaññā
Ratti
SR kaññaṁ
rattiṁ
-ū
.I
Nadī nadiṁ
Yāgu yāguṁ
Vadhū vadhuṁ
EN

Nominative Case

Masc Masculine Gender Neuter Gender Feminine Gender

. & Singula Plural Singula Plural Fem. Singula Plural
Neut. r -ah > r -ni Stem r -yo
Stem -s ā/o -s -s
V

-a -o -ā -aṁ -ā, -āni -ā -ā -ā, -āyo

-i -i -ī, -ayo -i -i -i
-ī, -īni -ī, -iyo
-ī -ī -ī, -ino -ī -ī -ī

-u -u -ū, -avo -u -u -u
-ū, -ūni -ū, -uyo
-ū -ū -ū, -uno -ū -ū -ū

Vocative Case
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 71

Masc Masculine Gender Neuter Gender Feminine Gender

. & Singula Plural Singula Plural Fem. Singula Plural
Neut. r -ah > r -ni Stem r -yo
Stem -s ā/o -s -s

-a -a, -ā -ā -a -ā, -āni -ā -e -ā, -āyo

-i -i -ī, -ayo -i -i
-ī, -īni -i -ī, -iyo
-ī -i -ī, -ino -i -ī

-u -u -ū, -avo -u -u
-ū, -ūni -u -ū, -uyo

Y
-ū -u -ū, -uno -u -ū

SRAccusative Case

Masc
. &
Masculine Gender Neuter Gender

Singula Plural Singula Plural Fem.

Feminine Gender

Singula Plural
Neut. Stem
.I
r -ah > e/o r -ni r -yo
Stem -ṁ -ṁ -ṁ

-a -aṁ -e -aṁ -e, -āni -ā -aṁ -ā, -āyo

EN

-i -ī, -ayo -i
-iṁ -iṁ -ī, -īni -iṁ -ī, -iyo
-ī -ī, -ino -ī

-u -ū, -avo -u
-uṁ -uṁ -ū, -ūni -uṁ -ū, -uyo
-ū -ū, -uno -ū
V

Formation of Feminine Gender

Masculine Gender Feminine Gender Sign Feminine Gender

Suffix

mūsika -ā mūsikā

mānusa -ī mānusī

gahapati -ānī gahapatānī

rāja -inī rājinī

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 72

bhikkhu -unī bhikkhunī

upāsaka -aka > -ikā upāsikā

Dāraka (boy) dārikā (girl)

Miga (deer) migī (doe)

Kāruṇika (m.n) > kāruṇikā

√viṭh/ veṭh + e + ti > veṭheti

Vi √bhā + ti > vibhāti

Y
√nhā + ya + ti > nhāyati, n(a)hāyati
Nis √car + a + ti {sc > cch}> niccharati
Ava √tar + a + ti >otarati

SR
Ava √tar + na (ava > o, n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ) > otiṇṇa
√ge {e > āy} + a + ti > gāyati/ √ge + ta > gīta
√jhe + a + ti > jhāyati/ jhāna
√rud + a + ti > rudati/ rodati
√pāl + e + ti > pāleti
.I
Saṁ + ni √pat + a + ti > sannipatati

adj/ noun -> noun

EN

-ta/ -na > -a > ā

Kata > katā

Kārita vihāra (masc.)

Kārito vihāro kāritā vihārā
V

Kārita raṭṭha (neut.)

Kāritaṁ raṭṭhaṁ kāritāni raṭṭhāni
Kārita sīmā
Kāritā sīmā
Kāritāyo sīmāyo

25 Jan 2023
Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. Amma, mayaṁ idāni kuhiṁ gacchāma?
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 73

Mother, where are we going now?

2. Kaññāyo bhātikehi saddhiṁ chaṇaṁ passituṁ nagaraṁ gacchantu.

Girls may go to town to see a festival together with brothers.

3. Latāyo rukkhe veṭhenti.

Creepers coil trees.

4. Ratti candassa ālokena vibhāti.

The night shines by the light of the moon.

5. Mayaṁ nahāyituṁ nadiṁ otarāma.

Y
We descend to the river to take a bath.

6. Bhoti kaññe, kiṁ tvaṁ ajja vijjālayaṁ na gacchasi?

SR
Dear girl, don’t you go to school today?

7. Gahapatānī yottaṁ gahetvā vajaṁ gantvā dhenuṁ bandhitvā gehassa samīpaṁ

āneti.
8. Mayaṁ pāto uṭṭhāya yāguṁ pivitvā gehamhā nikkhamma khettaṁ gacchāma.
.I
We get up early morning, drink gruel, depart from the house, and go to the field.

9. Dārikāyo vijjālayassa avidgūre uyyāne sannipatitvā kīḷanti.

Girls gather together in the park near the school and play.
EN

10. Kāruṇikā vācā dārakānaṁ dārikānaṁ ca piyā hoti.

Kind word is pleasing to boys and girls.

11. Sevakehi khatā pokkharaṇī gambhīrā ca puthulā ca hoti.

The pond dug by the servants is deep and wide.
V

12. Yakkhassa mukhato jivhā niccharati.

The tongue comes out of the mouth of the demon.

13. Therena katā desanā bahūhi sutā hoti.

The teaching expounded by the elder is heard by many.

14. Kaññā ñātino gehaṁ āgatā.

A girl came to the house of kingsmen.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 74

15. Duggatā itthī dvāre ṭhatvā gītāni gāyati vīṇaṁ ca vādeti.

A poor woman, having stood at the gate, sings songs and plays a violin.

Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
1. Let us go to the river to take a bath.
Mayaṁ nahāyituṁ nadiṁ gacchāma.

2. The girl gone to the city with (her) elder brother saw an elephant and cried with
fear.

Y
Jeṭṭhakena Bhātikena Saddhiṁ Nagaraṁ Gatā kaññā hatthiṁ disvā bhayena rodi.

3. Many rivers flow from the mountain.

4.
SR Bahū nadiyo pabbatamhā sandanti.

The hunter takes a doe from the forest, goes to the town, and sells (it) to a
merchant.
Luddako vanasmā migiṁ gahetvā nagaraṁ gantvā (taṁ) vāṇijaṁ vikkiṇāti.
.I
5. The girl beaten by the elder brother with a cane, runs home, sits down in the bed,
and cries.
Jeṭṭhakena bhātikena vattena pahatā kaññā gehaṁ dhāvitvā mañce nisīditvā
EN

rodati.

Jeṭṭha > jeṭṭhena

Jeṭṭhaka > jeṭṭhakena

√nī > neti, nayati

V

√brū > brūti

√vad > vadati

27 Jan 2023
6. You may develop concentration and vipassanā and dispel craving.
Tvaṁ samādhiṁ ca vipassanaṁ bhāvetvā taṇhaṁ pajahāhi/ pajaheyyāsi.

7. We saw the pond dug out by the servants.

Mayaṁ sevakehi khataṁ pokkharaṇiṁ passimhā.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 75

8. The lake looks beautiful with blooming lotuses.

Vāpi vikasitehi/vikasamānehi padumehi sobhati.
Vikasati < vi √kas + a + ti
vikasant/ vikasamāna

9. Plantains do not grow in England.

Kadaliyo aṅgalavisaye na rohanti.

10. The queen governs the subjects (of the country) in righteousness.
Rājinī dhammena pajaṁ pāleti.
Pajā (subjects), parisā (audience), jana (people) always take singular form.

Y
Acc. inst (adv.)
Adj. + Acc. > adv.
Sukha ṁ > happily

SR
Noun + Ins > adv.

Lesson 20
Feminine Nouns
inst/ abl., dat./ gen., sl. -ya & -yā, but loc. -ya, -yā, & -yaṁ
.I
Instrumental & Ablative Case

Singular Plural
Stem
EN

-ya/ -yā -bhi/ -hi

-ā -āya -ābhi, -āhi

-i/ -ī -iyā -ībhi, -īhi

-u/ -ū -uyā -ūbhi, -ūhi

V

Kaññā kaññāya kaññābhi, kaññāhi, kaññānaṁ, kaññāsu

Ratti rattiyā rattībhi, rattīhi, rattīnaṁ, rattīsu, rattisu
Nadī nadiyā nadībhi, nadīhi, nadīnaṁ, nadīsu
Yāgu yāguyā yāgūbhi, yāgūhi, yāgūnaṁ, yāgūsu, yāgusu
Vadhū vadhuyā vadhūbhi, vadhūhi, vadhūnaṁ, vadhūsu

Loc. sl. Kaññāya, kaññāyaṁ

Rattiyā, rattiyaṁ
Nadiyā, nadiyaṁ
Yāguyā, yāguyaṁ
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 76

Vadhuyā, vadhuyaṁ

Nom. Voc. Acc. Pl. nadiyo > najjo

Ins, Abl, Dad, Gen. Loc sl. nadiyā {nad(i)yā} > nadyā {dy > jj} > najjā
Loc. sl. nadiyaṁ > najjaṁ
Jātiyo, jātiyā, jātiyaṁ = jacco, jaccā, jaccaṁ

Dative & Genitive Case

Singular Plural
Stem
-ya/ -yā -naṁ

Y
-ā -āya -ānaṁ

-i/ -ī -iyā -īnaṁ

SR -u/ -ū -uyā

Locative Case
-ūnaṁ

Singular Plural
.I
Stem
-ya/ -yā/ -yaṁ -su

-ā -āya, -āyaṁ -āsu

-i -īsu, -isu
EN

-iyā, -iyaṁ
-ī -īsu

-u -ūsu, -usu
-uyā, -uyaṁ
-ū -ūsu
V

Instrumental Case

Masc Masculine & Neuter Feminine Gender

. & Gender Fem.
Neut. Singular Plural Stem Singular Plural
Stem -nā -bhi {> -hi} -ya/ -yā -bhi

-a -ena -ebhi, -ehi -ā -āya -ābhi, -āhi

-i, -ī -inā -ībhi, -īhi -i, -ī -iyā -ībhi, -īhi

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 77

-u, -ū -unā -ūbhi, -ūhi -u, -ū -uyā -ūbhi, -ūhi

Ablative Case

Masc Masc. & Neut. Gender Feminine Gender

. & Fem.
Neut. Singular Plural Stem Singular Plural
Stem -smā {>mhā, >ā} -bhi {> -hi} -ya / -yā -bhi

-a -asmā, -amhā, -ā -ebhi, -ehi -ā -āya -ābhi, -āhi

-i, -ī -ismā, -imhā, -inā -ībhi, -īhi -i, -ī -iyā -ībhi, -īhi

Y
-u, -ū -usmā, -umhā, -unā -ūbhi, -ūhi -u, -ū -uyā -ūbhi, -ūhi

. &

Stem
SR
Dative & Genitive Case

Masc Masc. & Neut. Gender

Neut. Singular
-ssa, -no
Plural
-naṁ
Fem.
Stem
Feminine Gender

Singular
-ya / -yā
Plural
-naṁ
.I
-a -assa -ānaṁ -ā -āya -ānaṁ

-i, -ī -issa, -ino -īnaṁ -i, -ī -iyā -ībhi, -īhi

-u, -ū -ussa, -uno -ūnaṁ -u, -ū -uyā -ūbhi, -ūhi

EN

Locative Case

Masc Masc. & Neut. Gender Feminine Gender

. & Singular Plural Fem. Singular Plural
Neut. Stem
V

-smiṁ {> -mhi, > -su -ya / -yā / -yaṁ -su

Stem -i}

-a -asmiṁ, -amhi, -e -esu -ā -āya, -āyaṁ -āsu

-i -ismiṁ, -imhi -īsu, -isu -i -īsu, -isu

-iyā, -iyaṁ
-ī -ismiṁ, -imhi -īsu -ī -īsu

-u -usmiṁ, -umhi -ūsu,-us -u -ūsu, -usu

u -uyā, -uyaṁ
-ū -usmiṁ, -umhi -ūsu -ū -ūsu
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 78

Kaññāya, kaññāyaṁ
Rattiyā, rattiyaṁ
Nadiyā, nadiyaṁ
Yāguyā, yāguyaṁ
Sace, yadi, ce (if) + opt. Verb
- Sace & yadi start a sentence.
- But ce is only in a second place in a sentence.

Upa √pad + ya + ti {dy > jj} > upapajjati ~ is born in

Pari √sudh + ya + ti {dhy > jjh} > parisujjhati
Pati √han + ti > patihanti/ paṭihanti

Y
Prati > paṭi
Vi √nud + e + ti > vinodeti
√sudh + e + ti > sodheti

SR
√dā + ti {ā > e} > deti
(a) √dā + (s)i > adāsi
Ni √dhā + ti {ā > e} > nidheti
Ni √dhā > dah + a + ti > nidahati
.I
Ud √majj > mujj + a + ti > ummujjati
Ni √majj > mujj + a + ti > nimujjati
EN

Apa √nī > ne > nay + a + ti > apanayati > apaneti

√dhar + e + ti > dhāreti

Pilandhati

(a)pi + √nah (nadh) + ṁ-a > pinandha > pilandha + ti > pilandhati
V

Idha > iha

30 Jan 2023
Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. Buddho Nerañjarāya najjā tīre viharati.
The Buddha dwells on the bank of the river Nerañjarā.

2. Atthi, brahmaṇa, puratthimesu janapadesu Sāvatthi nāma nagaraṁ.

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 79

There is, a brahmin, a town named Sāvatthi in the easten district.

3. Ahaṁ ce kho pana kāyena duccaritaṁ careyyaṁ, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā
nirayaṁ upapajjeyyaṁ.
eyyaṁ = eyyāmi
kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā ~ after death
If I, as for me, commit wrong deed by body I would be born in a woeful state
after the break of the body after death.

4. Ahaṁ senāya gilāno, icchāmi bhadantassa āgamanaṁ.

I am sick in the army, I wish the venerable one’s coming/ the venerable one
coming.

Y
Ahaṁ senāya gilāno (amhi).
√kar (to do) + ana > karaṇa ~ doing
√gam (to go) + ana > gamana ~ going

SR
ā √gam + ana > āgamana ~ coming
Ahaṁ āgantuṁ icchāmi.
Ahaṁ bhadantaṁ/ bhadantassa āgamanaṁ icchāmi.
Puttassa icchati ~ he wishes a son.
.I
5. Saddhāya tarati oghaṁ, paññāya parisujjhati.
By faith one crosses the flood. By wisdom one is purified.

6. Sussusā seṭṭhā bhariyānaṁ [bhariyāsu].

EN

Among wives/ of wives an obedient one is the best. [Niddhāraṇa~ Partitive

construction]

7. Mettaṁ karotha mānusiyā pajāya.

You do amity on/for offspring of female human.
Develop loving-kindness on human beings.
V

8. Yāgu khudaṁ patihanti, pipāsaṁ vinodeti, vatthiṁ sodheti.

Gruel words off hunger, quenches thirst, cleanses the bladder.

9. Sītāsu hemantikāsu rattīsu sambahulā jaṭilā gaṅgāyaṁ ummujjantipi

nimujjantipi.
In the cold winter nights, many ascetics rise out and dive in the ganges

10. Na jaccā vasalo hoti.

An outcast is not by birth.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 80

One is not an outcast by bith.

Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
1. A seer dwelt in a hut in the forest.
Isi araññe kuṭiyaṁ vihari.

2. They developed loving-kindness.

Te mettaṁ bhāvesuṁ.

3. The teacher gave presents to the clever girls in the school.

Ācariyo pāthasālāyaṁ chekānaṁ kaññānaṁ paṇṇākāre adāsi.

Y
√dā > dadāti, deti, adāsu, adaṁsu.
Buddhassa pupphaṁ deti

SR
4. They were taking bath in the river Tāmasā.
Te Tāmasāyaṁ nadiyaṁ nhāyiṁsu.

5. He buried treasure in a pit.

So kāsuyaṁ/ āvāṭe nidhiṁ nidhesi.
.I
01 Feb 2023
6. We shall grow by the growth of wisdom.
Mayaṁ paññāya vaḍḍhena vaḍḍheyyāma/ vaḍḍhissāma.
EN

7. The prince Siddhattha was the son of the queen Māyā.

Siddhattho rājakumāro Māyāya rājiniyā putto ahosi/ āsi.

8. Remove violence from (your) heart by development of compassion.

Karuṇāya bhāvanāya cittasmā hiṁsaṁ upanetha/ pajahatha.
V

9. The girl wears the garland on (her) neck.

Kaññā gīvāyaṁ mālaṁ pilandhati/ dhāreti.

10. From craving is produced grief.

Grief is produced from craving.
Taṇhāya jāyati soko/ Soko taṇhāya jāyati.
√jan > jā + ya (passive) + ti > jāyati ~ is born, is produced

The girl cooks rice.

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 81

Kaññā odanaṁ pacati. (active voice)

Rice is cooked.
Odano pacito hoti.
√pac + (ī) ya (passive) + ti > paccati/ pacīyati. Odano paccati/ pacīyati.
Lesson 1 to 9 [verb, gerund, inf.]
10 - 20 [vowel noun] 15 - pp.

Lesson 21
Consonantals
Nouns can end in -t,-n, -r, and -s.
E.g., -t dhanavant, dhanavat {possessive adj.}
Satimant, satimat

Y
Gacchant, gacchat {pr.p}
-n dhanin, dhammin
Attan, rājan

SR -r
-s
nattar, pitar, satthar
manas, tejas, tapas, uras

Possessive Adjective
Noun + Poss. adj suffix. > Possessive Adj. word
.I
Possessive suffixes are ‘-vant, -mant and -in’ ~ “having sth”
(1) -vant/-mant (strong form) = -vat/ -mat (weak form)
-a/ -ā + vant ~
EN

e.g. dhana (wealth) + vant/ vat (having) > dhanavant/ dhanavat {having wealth =
rich, wealthy},
paññā (wisdom) + vant/ vat (having) > paññavant/ paññavat {having wisdom =
wise}

(2) -i, -ī, -u / -ū + mant ~

V

e.g. sati (mindfulness) + mant/ mat (having) > satimant/ satimat {having
mindfulness = mindful},
dhī (wisdom) + mant > dhīmant,
bhāṇu + mant > bhāṇumant,

(3) -a + in ~
e.g. dhana + in > dhanin,
dhamma + in > dhammin

Adjectives take three genders.

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 82

Dhanavant(a) > dhanavanto puriso ~ a rich man.

dhanavant(a) > dhanavantaṁ kulaṁ ~ a rich family.
dhanavant(ī) > dhanavantī kaññā ~ a rich girl.

Dhanavant (strong form)/

dhanavat (weak form)

Masculine Gender
dhanavant(a) > dhanavanta decline as buddha.
Sl. Pl.
Nom. -o -ā
Voc. -a* -ā

Y
Acc. -aṁ -e
Inst. -ena -ebhi, -ehi
d/g -assa -ānaṁ

SR
Abl.
Loc.
-asmā, -amhā, -ā*
-asmiṁ, -amhi, -e
-ebhi, -ehi
-esu

Special Case Ending for Weak Form

.I
-vat, -mat
Sl. Pl.
Nom. -
Voc. -
EN

ins/ abl. -ā -
Dat./ gen. -o -aṁ
Loc. -i -

Nom. sl. Dhanavat {at > ā} > dhanavā

Voc. sl. Dhanavat {t is replaced by ṁ} > dhanavaṁ
V

Dhanavat {t is dropped} > dhanava

Dhanavat {at is changed to ā} > dhanavā
Dhanavat

Nom. dhanavā
Voc. dhanavaṁ, dhanava, dhanavā
inst./ abl. dhanavatā
dat./ gen. dhanavato dhanavataṁ
Loc. dhanavati
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 83

03 Feb 2023
Possessive Adjective -vat/ -vant

Masculine Gender Neuter Gender

Case
Singular Plural Singular Plural

nom. -vā, -vanto -vanto, -vantā -vaṃ, -vantaṃ -vantā, -vantāni

voc. -vaṃ, -va, -vā -vanto, -vantā -vaṃ, -va, -vā -vantā, -vantāni

acc. -vantaṃ -vanto, -vante -vantaṃ -vante, -vantāni

instr. -vatā, -vantena -vantehi, -vantebhi

Y
abl. -vatā, -vantasmā, -vantehi, -vantebhi
-vantamhā
The rest are like those in the

gen.

loc.
SR
dat./ -vato, -vantassa -vataṃ, -vantānaṃ Masculine Gender

-vati, -vantasmiṃ, -vantesu

-vantamhi, -vante
.I
Dhanavanto puriso {Masc.} ~ a rich man
Dhanavantaṁ kulaṃ {Neut.} ~ a rich family
Dhanavantī itthī {Fem.} ~ a rich woman
EN

Feminine Gender;
Dhanavant + ī > dhanavantī
Dhanavat + ī > dhanavatī decline as nadī
Sl. Pl.
Nom. -ī -ī, -iyo
Voc. -i -ī, -iyo
V

Acc. -iṁ -ī, -iyo

ins/abl -iyā -ībhi, -īhi
dat./gen. -iyā -īnaṁ
Loc. -iyā, -iyaṁ -īsu
Dhana + in > dhanin, dhammin, balin, decline mostly as senānī for Masc.

Dhanin {in > ī }> dhanī

Acc. dhanī + ṁ > dhaniṁ

Dhanin + (a)ṁ > dhaninaṁ
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 84

Loc. dhanin + i > dhanini

Masc. dhanī puriso

Neut. dhanī kulaṁ
Fem. dhaninī itthī

Possessive Adjective -in

Masculine Gender Neuter Gender

Case
Singular Plural Singular Plural

nom. -ī -ī, -ino -ī -ī, -īni

Y
voc. -i -ī, -ino -i -ī, -īni

acc. -inaṃ, -iṃ, -ī, -ino -inaṃ, -iṃ -ī, -īni

abl.
SR
instr. -inā

-inā
-imhā
-īhi, -ībhi

-ismā, -īhi, -ībhi The rest are like those in

the Masculine Gender
dat./gen -ino, -issa -īnaṃ
.I
.

loc. -ini, -ismiṃ, -īsu

-imhi
EN

ā √khā (khyā) + ti > ākkhāti > akkhāti

Akkhāta,
Su + ā √khā + ta > svākkhāta

Mama + āya + ti > mamāyati ~ regards as one’s own

V

Namas + ya + ti > namasyati > namassati

Abhi √vad + e + ti > abhivādeti
√ruc + e + ti > roceti
√car {> cir} + na {> ṇa, cirṇa, rṇ > ṇṇ} > ciṇṇā
√naṭ + ya + ti {ṭy > cc} > naccati
√ge {e > āy} + a + ti > gāyati
√jhe {e > āy} + a + ti > jhāyati ~ burns the opposites
√labh + ta {bht > ddh} > laddha
√mad + ya + ti {dy > jj} > majjati
Saṁ √mud {u > o}+ a + ti > sammodati
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 85

Vi √nas + ya + ti > vinassati

Vi √nas + ta {st > ṭṭh} > vinaṭṭha
Ud √gah + nā {n > ṇ, hṇ > ṇh} > uggaṇhāti
Ud √gah + (i)ta > uggahita
Ud √pad + ya + ti {dp > pp, dy > jj} > uppajjati
Ud √pad + na {dp > pp, dn > nn} > uppanna
√mar + e + ti > māreti
Ā √nī {ī > e > ay}+ a + ti > ānayati {aya > e} > āneti
√mā + āpe + ti > māpeti

Catu (four)
Catur

Y
Dhanavant (u) > dhanavantu

SR
Ta (that) ~ tassa ~ its, to it, his, to him
ma/ amha (I, we) ~mama ~ my, mine, to me
Kadāci (ind.) ~ sometimes, na kadāci ~ never
06 Feb 2023

Eta (this) ~ etena ~ by this

.I
Namo atthu > namatthu
Namo (ind.) homage, adoration,
√as + tu > astu {st > tth} > atthu ~ may there be
Ve (ind.) indeed
EN

Ta ~ tena ~ by that
Ta ~ tāni (those)
V

Exercise (A)
Translate Into English
(1) vipassissa {ca} namatthu, cakkhumantassa sirīmato.
[May there be adoration to (the Buddha,) Vipassin who is seeing and glorious.]

Sikhissapi {ca} namatthu, sabbabhūtānukampino.

[may there be adoration to the Buddha, Sikhin who is pitying on all beings.]

Vessabhussa {ca} namatthu, nahātakassa tapassino.

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 86

[may there be adoration to the Buddha, Vessabhū who has washed all
defilements, is dispassionate.]

Namatthu kakusandhassa, mārasenāpamaddino.

[may there be adoration to the Buddha, Kakusandha who defeated the army of
Māra.]

(2) mahākāruṇiko nātho, hitāya sabbapāṇinaṁ.

Pūretvā pāramī sabbā, patto sambodhimuttamaṁ.
Etena saccavajjena, hotu te jayamaṅgalaṁ.
[mahākāruṇiko nātho sabbapāṇinaṁ hitāya sabbā pāramī pūretvā uttamaṁ
sambodhiṁ patto. The greatly compassionate Lord fulfilled all virtues leading to the

Y
buddhahood for welfare of all beings and attained the highest enlightenment.]
[by this asseveration, may there be auspicious lucky and blessing to you!]

(3)

(4)
SR buddhaṁ bhagavantaṁ abhivādemi.
I pay homage to the blessed Buddha.

svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, dhammaṁ namassāmi.

Dhamma was well preached by the Blessed One, I bow down the dhamma.
.I
(5) bhagavato dhammaṁ rocemi.
I am pleased with the dhamma of the Buddha.
EN

(6) bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carāma.

Let us/ We practice the holy life under the Blessed One.

(7) tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi.

There/ then the Buddha addressed bhikkhus.
V

(8) paribbājako bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi.

The wandering ascetic exchanged friendly greeting with the Buddha.

(9) na ve rudanti satimanto sapaññā.

Sa (saha) ~ sapaññā=paññavant ~who is with wisdom ~ wise
Sadhana=dhanavant ~ rich
The wise who are mindful certainly do not cry.

(10) so phalino rukkhassa āmaṁ phalaṁ chindati, tassa rasaṁ na jānāti, tena tassa
bījampi vinassati.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 87

He picks the unripe fruit of the fruitful tree, he does not know its taste, by that its
seed perishes too.

So + api > so’pi or sopi,

Dhammaṁ + api > dhammampi

08 Feb 2023
Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
(The words in italics are to be translated using past participles and -vant forms or -in
forms duly)
(1) in my village there are many rich people.

Y
Mama gāme bahū dhanavantā/dhanino santi.

(2) wise men (the wise) never do evil deeds.

(3)
SRPaññavantā akusalāni/pāpāni kammāni na kadāci karonti.

the virtuous monk is dear to pious devotees.

Sīlavā bhikkhu saddhavantānaṁ upāsakānaṁ piyo hoti.
.I
(4) the men who ploughed the field yesterday did not come here today.
Hiyyo khettaṁ kasitavantā purisā ajja idha na āgatā.
Kasati > kasita/ kaṭṭha ~ kasitavant
EN

(5) the nuns who have learned the dhamma have been honoured by the rich lady.
Dhammaṁ uggahitavantiyo bhikkhuniyo dhaniniyā vanitāya pūjitāyo.
Uggaṇhāti > uggahita + vant > uggahitavantiyo
Sikkhati > sikkhita + vant > sikkhitavant + ī

(6) the wealthy householder’s wife who committed evil deeds was born among
V

hungry ghosts.
Pāpāni kammāni katāvinī dhanavantassa gahapatissa bhariyā petesu uppannā.
Karoti > kata > katāvin > katāvinī

(7) the man who killed the stag brought home its flesh in a waggon.
Migaṁ hatavā puriso sakaṭena gehaṁ tassa maṁsaṁ ānītavā.

(8) the man who built the new palace got much money from the minister.
Abhinavaṁ pāsādaṁ māpitavanto puriso mantinā bahūni kahāpaṇāni labhi.
Māpeti > māpita > māpitavant/ kāreti > kārita > kāritavant
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 88

(9) the women who had drunk liquor and got intoxicated began to sing and dance in
the monastery.
Suraṁ pivitavantiyo mattiyo itthiyo vihāre gāyitvā naccituṁ ārabhiṁsu.
Suraṁ pivitvā mattī itthī……..
Pivati > pīta, pivita > pivitavant + ī > pītavantī/ pivitavantī
Majjati < √mad + ya > mattī
(10) the boy who bought the book and the pen came home and showed them to his
brother.
Potthakañca lekhaniñca kītavā kumāro gehaṁ āgato tassa bhātikassa tāni
pakāsesi.
Kiṇāti > kīta/ kiṇita > kītavant/ kiṇitavant

Y
10 Feb 2023
Lesson 22

SR
● Formation of present participle
Present Participle

Verbal Base + -(a)nt, -māna, -āna > Pr.P

-a, -ā, -o, -e + -(a)nt, -māna, -āna
√gam + a > gaccha
.I
~ gaccha + (a)nt > gacchant, (going)
~ gaccha + -māna > gacchamāna, (going)
~ gaccha + āna > gacchāna (going)
EN

√kī + nā > kiṇā

~ kiṇā + (a)nt > kiṇant,
~ kiṇā {ā > a} + māna > kiṇamāna,
~ kiṇā + āna > kiṇāna,

√kar + o > karo

V

~ karo + (a)nt > karont,

~ √kar {kur} + o {>u} > kuru + māna > kurumāna,
~ karo + āna > karāna,

√dis + e > dese, √dis + aya > desaya

~ dese + (a)nt > desent,
~ desaya + māna > desayamāna,
~ desaya + āna > desayāna
-ā + māna {ā > a} ~ kiṇā + māna > kiṇamāna
-e + māna, āna {e > aya} ~ dese + māna, āna> desayamāna, desayāna
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 89

√si {i > e > ay} + a > saya/ {aya > e} > se

seti, sayati
~ se + (a)nt > sent,
~ se + māna > semāna

~ saya + (a)nt > sayant,

~ saya + māna > sayamāna,
~saya + āna > sayāna,

√as (to be)

atthi santi

Y
asi attha
asmi, amhi asma, amha

SR ~ √as + (a)nt > sant,

~ √as(a) + māna > samāna

(1) -ing, (2) while -ing, (3) who/what is -ing.

.I
Declension for ‘(a)nt’ in masc.
-(a)nt {strong form} / -(a)t {weak form}
e.g. gaccha + (a)nt > gacchant
gaccha + (a)t > gacchat
EN

Nom. sl. Gacchat {t > ṁ} > gacchaṁ

Present Participle ‘-at/ -ant’

V

Masculine Gender Neuter

Case
Singular Plural Singular Plural

nom. -aṃ*, -anto -anto, -antā -aṃ, -antā,

-antaṃ -antāni

voc. -aṃ, -a, -ā -anto, -antā -aṃ, -a, -ā -antā,

-antāni

acc. -antaṃ -anto, -ante -antaṃ -ante,

-antāni
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 90

instr. -atā, -antena -antehi, -antebhi

abl. -atā, -antasmā, -antehi, -antebhi

-antamhā The rest are like those in
the Masculine Gender
dat./gen -ato, -antassa -ataṃ, -antānaṃ
.

loc. -ati, -antasmiṃ, -antesu

-antamhi, -ante

Feminine Gender Form

-(a)nt + ī > -(a)ntī

Y
E.g., gacchant + ī > gacchantī
-(a)t + ī > -(a)tī
E.g., gacchat + ī > gacchatī

SR
N.B., They are declined like ‘nadī’.

-māna + ā > -mānā

E.g., gacchamāna + ā > gacchamānā
-āna + ā > -ānā
.I
E.g., gacchāna + ā > gacchānā
N.B., They are declined like ‘kaññā’.

Anu √s(m)ar + a + ti > anussarati

EN

Anussara + (a)nt/ (a)t > anussant/ anussarat

Nom. sl. Anussarat {t > ṁ} > anussaraṁ

Past participle {passive}

Present participle
V

√gam + ta > gata (gone)

Gaccha + ant > gacchant (going)
Gāmaṁ gato puriso ~ a man who went, has gone to a village
Gāmṁ gacchanto puriso ~ a man who goes/ is going to a village.

Passive suffix -ya

Root + (i/ī)ya + VT > passive

√bhuj (to eat) + ṁ-a > bhuñja + (i)ya > bhuñjiya (to be eaten)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 91

Bhuñjiya + māna > bhuñjiyamāna (being eaten)

13 Feb 2023
√arah + a + ti > arahati ~ is worthy, deserves
√aggh + a + ti > agghati ~ is worthy, deserves

Arahati > araha + (a)nt > arahant ~ worthy

arahant/ arahat > arahato (dat. /gen. sl.)
Pāṇa (life) + in > pāṇin ~ alive, living
√bhū (to be) + a > bhava + (i)ssati > bhavissati (will be)
Bhavissati {bh > h, avi > e}> hessati (will be)

Y
Saṁ √han > ghāt + a > saṅghāta ~ killing
Ā √pad + e + ti > āpādeti ~ brings
Saṅghātaṁ āpādeti ~ brings to destruction

SR
Dur + labha > dullabha
√mah + a + ti > mahati {to honour}
Maha + (a)nt > mahant ~ great
Saṁ √lap + a + ti {ṁl > ll} > sallapati ~ converse
√gam + a + ti > gacchati ~ goes
.I
Apagacchati ~ goes away
√kam (kram) ~ to move
Apa √kam + a + ti > apakkamati ~ moves away
Saṁ √kaḍḍh + a + ti > saṅkaḍḍhati ~
EN

√ge {e > āy} + a + ti > gāyati

√jhe {e > āy} + a + ti > jhāyati > jhāna
Ud √dhar + a + ti > uddharati
Ud √dhar + ta {r is dropped, t > ṭ} > uddhaṭa
√kar + ta > kata/ kaṭa (a mat)
Ruki + dantal = lingul
V

Vi √sam (śram) + a + ti > vissamati

Vi √sam + ta > vissanta
√dis > pass + a + ti > passati
√dis (dṛś > daś > dak) + ssati {dakssati > daksati (ks > kkh)}> dakkhati ~ will see.
Dakkha + issati > dakkhissati.
Dakkh + a + ti > dakkhati ~ sees
A √dṛś + (s)i {dṛś > draś > drak} > adraksi {dr > dd, ks > kkh}> addakkhi
[ṛ > a, i, u, ar, ra]
Skt. kṛta = Pāḷ. kata
ṛśi = isi
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 92

ṛju = uju
√kṛ = √kar
Pa √sad > sīd + a + ti > pasīdati
Pa √sad + na {dn > nn} > pasanna
√vah + a + ti > vahati
√vah + ta {a > u, ht ~ t > ḷ, hḷ > ḷh} > vuḷha
Anu √sar (smar) + a + ti > anussarati > anussati
√kam (to move, to walk) + a + ti > kamati
√kam > kamkam + a + ti {kamkam ~ k > c, m > ṅ} caṅkamati ~ moves and moves,
walks and walks = walks up and down
Ā √rabh + a + ti > ārabhati ~ begins
Ā √rabh + ta {bht > ddh} > āraddha

Y
15 Feb 2023
Exercise (A)

SR
Translate into English
1. Bhikkhu āsane nisīdanto samīpe tiṭṭhantena upāsakena saddhiṁ sallapati.

man.}
Bhikkhu upāsakena saddhiṁ sallapati. {a monk converses together with a lay

A monk, while sitting on a seat, converses together with a lay man (who is)
.I
standing nearby.

2. Bhikkhunī vīthiyaṁ piṇḍāya caramānā āgacchantaṁ rathaṁ disvā maggato

apakkami.
EN

While going for alms-round on a street, the nun saw the chariot coming and went
off from the road.

3. Arahato sammāsambuddhassa pātubhāvo dullabho lokasmiṁ.

The appearance of Worthy Fully Self-Enlightened One is rare to gain in the
world.
V

4. Tumhe idha kiṁ kurumānā viharatha?

What are you doing and living here?
While doing what, do you live here?

5. Rukkhehi patantāni phalāni samīpe nisīdantiyā gahapatāniyā sevakā

saṅkaḍḍhanti.
Servants pick up/ collect fruits falling from the trees near the seat of the mistress
of the house.
Sevakā phalāni saṅkaḍḍhanti.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 93

The servants of the mistress of the house (who is) sitting nearby collect the fruits
falling down from the trees.

6. Khettesu kassakā gītāni gāyanti.

The farmers sing songs in the fields.

7. Gītaṁ gāyantiyā dārūni uddharantiyā itthiyā saddaṁ suṇantā te mahato

rukkhassa chāyāyaṁ vissamiṁsu.
They took a rest under the shade of the big tree, listening to the voice of the
woman singing a song and picking up the woods.

8. Siddhattho kumāro rathena uyyānaṁ gacchanto maggassa passe semānaṁ

Y
gilānaṁ purisaṁ addakkhi.
Kumāro purisaṁ addakkhi.
The prince Siddhattha, while going to the park by a chariot, saw a sick man (who

SR
is) lying down at the side of the road.

9. Araññe senāsane viharantesu bhikkhūsu manussā bhiyyo pasīdanti.

People are devoted very much to monks dwelling in a forest-dwelling.
.I
10. Rathaṁ vahato assassa pāde anugacchantāni cakkāni viya pāpānaṁ kammānaṁ
vipākā tāni karonte anugacchanti.
Vipākā tāni karonte anugacchanti. {the results follow those who are doing them
(those evil deeds).}
EN

The results of evil deeds follow those who are committing them, just like wheels
following the feet of the horse drawing the chariot.

17 Feb 2023
Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
V

1. The man who is living here is a rich one.

Idha vasanto puriso dhanavā hoti.

2. Wealth does not follow the person who is dying.

Dhanaṁ marantaṁ puggalaṁ na anugacchati.
√mar + a + ti > marati ~ mara + (a)nt > marant

3. Should you call to mind the Buddha, the Dhamma, or the Saṁgha, (it) you will
dispel all your fear.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 94

Buddhaṁ vā dhammaṁ vā saṁghaṁ vā anussaranto tvaṁ sabbaṁ tava bhayaṁ

pajahissasi.
Sace tvaṁ buddhaṁ vā dhammaṁ vā saṁghaṁ vā anussareyyāsi,
Anu √sar + a + ti > anussarati ~ anussara + (a)nt > anussarant

4. In the mind of the monk Meghiya who was staying in the mango-grove there
arose many evil and unwholesome thoughts.
Ambavane viharantassa meghiyassa bhikkhuno cittasmiṁ bahū pāpakā akusalā
saṅkappā uppajjiṁsu.
Viharati ~ vihara + (a)nt > viharant

5. While walking up and down, he brought many creatures to destruction.

Y
so caṅkamanto/ caṅkamamāno bahū pāṇino saṅghātaṁ āpādesi.
√kam > kamkam > caṅkam + a + ti > caṅkamati > caṅkama + (a)nt >
caṅkamant

SR
6. She, while remembering (her) dead son, began to weep.
Sā mataṁ puttaṁ anussarantī rodituṁ ārabhi.
Anussarati ~ anussara + (a)nt > anussarant + ī > anussarantī
.I
7. Don’t talk while you eat (while eating).
Tumhe bhuñjamānā mā sallapatha.
Bhuñjati ~ bhuñja + māna > bhuñjamāna
EN

8. The child beaten by (his) brother came home crying.

Bhātikena pahaṭo dārako rodanto gehaṁ āgacchi.

9. The man fell from the horse that was running fast.
Puriso vegena dhāvantasmā assamhā pati.
Dhāvati ~ dhāva + (a)nt > dhāvant
V

10. Men doing good deeds will go to (a) happy state after death.
kalyāṇāni/ sucaritāni kammāni karontā/ caramānā manussā maraṇā paraṁ
sugatiṁ gacchissanti.

Lesson 23
-t, -in, -r, -s, -an
Walk + er > walker
√root, verbal base + -tar
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 95

Agent Suffix -tar

√kar + tar > kartar > kattar (doer)
√han + tar > hantar (hunter)
√dis + e > dese + tar > desetar
Ud √gah + nā > uggaṇhā
Ud √gah + (i > e) tar > uggahetar?

Inst. Abl. sl. -ā

Dat. Gen. sl. -o Pl. -aṁ
Loc. -i

Y
Nattar (grandson)
(1) Nattar, (2) nattu, (3) nattār
Singular Plural

Voc.
Acc.
SR
Nom. nattar {ar > ā}> nattā

Ins. Abl.
natta, nattā
nattār + aṁ
nattār + ā
nattār + o
nattār + o
nattār + o, nattār + e
nattār + ebhi, ehi
nattu > nattū + bhi, hi
.I
Dat. Gen. nattu, nattuno, nattussa nattār + ānaṁ,
natta(r) > nattā + naṁ
nattu > nattū + naṁ
loc. nattar + i nattār + esu
EN

nattu > nattū + su

nattu + su
20 Feb 2023

Nattar (grandson)
Stem; (1) -tar, (2) -tu, (3) -tār
V

-tar

Case Singular Plural

Nom. -tā (1) -tāro (3)

Voc. -ta, -tā (1) -tāro (3)

Acc. -tāraṁ (3) -tāro, -tāre (3)

Ins./Abl. -tārā (3) -tārebhi, -tārehi (3), -tūbhi, tūhi (2)

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 96

Dat./Gen. -tu, -tuno, -tussa (2) -tārānaṁ (3), -tānaṁ (1), -tūnaṁ (2)

Loc. -tari (1) -tāresu (3), -tūsu, -tusu (2)

Pitar (father), bhātar (brother)
(1) pitar, (2) pitu
-tar

Case Singular Plural

Nom. -tā (1) -taro (1)

Voc. -ta, -tā (1) -taro (1)

Y
Acc. -taraṁ (1) -taro, -tare (1)

Ins./Abl. -tarā (1) -tarebhi, -tarehi (1), -tūbhi, tūhi (2)

Loc.SR
Dat./Gen. -tu, -tuno, -tussa (2)

-tari (1)
Pitar + ānaṁ > pitarānaṁ
pita(r) > pita + naṁ > pitānaṁ
-tarānaṁ, -tānaṁ (1), -tūnaṁ, -tunnaṁ (2)

-taresu (1), -tūsu, -tusu (2)

Pitu > pitū + naṁ > pitūnaṁ

.I
Pitūnaṁ {ūn > unn} > pitunnaṁ

Mātar (mother), duhitar, dhītar (daughter)

(1) mātar, (2) mātu
EN

-tar

Case Singular Plural

Nom. -tā (1) -taro (1)

Voc. -ta, -tā (1) -taro (1)

V

Acc. -taraṁ (1) -taro, -tare (1)

Ins./Abl. -tarā (1), -tuyā (2) -tarebhi, -tarehi (1), -tūbhi, tūhi (2)

Dat./Gen. -tu, -tuyā (2) -tarānaṁ, -tānaṁ (1), -tūnaṁ (2)

Loc. -tari (1) -taresu (1), -tūsu, -tusu (2)

√kar (to do) + tar > kattar

Kammaṁ karoti (he does the work) >
kammaṁ kattar (one who does the work, doer of the work)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 97

Kammassa kattar
√han + tar > hantar
√vac + tar > vattar
√dā + tar > dātar

Kiṇā + (i)tvā > kiṇitvā

Kiṇā + (i)tar > kiṇitar

Deseti
Dese + tar > desetar
Bhāveti
Bhāve + tar > bhāvetar

Y
Absolute Construction
-while = No word in Pāḷi

SRBuddho gacchati. (the Buddha goes)

while/ when the Buddha goes/ is going

Buddha gacchant/ gata

.I
Buddhe gacchante ~ while the Buddha is going

Absolute Construction
EN

Subj. Predicate
Noun participle (pr.p/pp)
nom./gen./loc. nom./gen./loc.

Buddho gacchanto ~ the Buddha, while going

Buddhassa gacchantassa ~ while the Buddha is going
V

Buddhe gacchante ~ while the Buddha is going

√as + (a)nt > sant ~ santasmiṁ, santamhi, sante (loc.)

√as + (a)t > sat ~ sati (loc. Sl. masc.)
Sati ~ When there is
Bhikkhusmiṁ sati ~ when there is a monk
Bhikkhuniyaṁ sati ~ when there is a nun
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 98

√sas (to instruct) + tar {st > tth} > satthar ~ instructor
Pakkha (wing) + in > pakkhin ~ one who has wings = bird

Jana (people) + tā > janatā ~ people

Deva (deity) + tā > devatā ~ deity
Rasa (taste) + vat > rasavat + ī > rasavatī ~ kitchen

Pari + nir + √{vṛ > var >} vā + ya + ti {rv > vv > bb} > parinibbāyati
Pari + nir + √vṛ > vu + ta {rv > vv > bb} > parinibbuta

√mā (to measure) + āpe (causative) > māpe ~ to cause sb to measure = to build
√naṭ + ya + ti {ṭy > cc} > naccati

Y
√vad (to speak, to sing) + e (causative) {a > ā} > vāde ~ to cause sb to sing = to play
musical instrument
√gah + nā {n > ṇ, hṇ > ṇh} > gaṇhā

SR
√gah + (i)ta > gahita
√gah + (i > e)tvā > gahetvā

Ima sat
Imasmiṁ sati idaṁ hoti
.I
When there is a cause, there is a result.

22 Feb 2023
√duh + a + ti > duhati
EN

√duh + ta {ht > ddh} > duddha

Saṁ √majj + a + ti > sammajjati
Sammajja + (i)ta > sammajjita
Saṁ √majj + ta {(j)jt > ṭṭh} > sammaṭṭha
Passive Form
√root + (i/ī)ya + vt > passive verb
V

√bhid (to break) + ya + ti {dy > jj} > bhijjati ~ is broken

√bhid + na {dn > nn} > bhinna
√palāy {p(a)lāy?} + a + ti > palāyati
Ud √ḍī > ḍe + ti {ī > e > ay > uḍḍayati, aya > e?} > uḍḍeti
Ud √ḍī + na > uḍḍīna
Pa √saṁs + a + ti > pasaṁsati
Pa √saṁs > sas + ta {st > tth} > pasattha
Vi √vic + ya + ti {cy > cc} > viviccati
Vi √vic + ta {ct > tt} > vivitta (pp)
Vi √vic + ya {cy > cc} > vivicca (ger.)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 99

Apa √har + a + ti > apaharati

Apa √har > ha + ta {t > ṭ} > apahaṭa (taken away)
√han > ha + ta > hata
Api √dhā + a + ti {api > pi, dhā > dhādhā > dahā + a > daha} pidahati

Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. Bhūpasmiṁ dhammena raṭṭhaṁ pālente janatāpi dhammikā hoti.
When the king governs the country righteously, people also become righteous.

2. Gahapatissa passantasseva corā bhaṇḍāni hariṁsu.

even while the householder was seeing the thieves took properties.

Y
3. Mama pitari tahiṁ agacchante ahampi tahiṁ gantuṁ na sakkomi.
If my father is not going there, I could not go there too.

SR
4. Mātari ca duhitari ca rasavatiyaṁ odanaṁ pacantīsu putto kumārakehi saddhiṁ
aṅgaṇe kīḷati.
While mother and daughter are cooking rice in the kitchen, a son plays together
with boys in a yard.
.I
5. Tathāgate parinibbute bahū devā manussā ca mahatā sokena kampitā ahesuṁ.
When Tathāgata entered Parinibbāna, many deities and human beings became
trembled with great sorrow.
EN

6. Bhikkhūsu vīthiyaṁ piṇḍāya carantesu upāsakā ca upāsikāyo ca nānāvidhāni

khajjāni bhojjāni ca gahetvā maggassa passe aṭṭhaṁsu.
When monks were going for alm-round on the road, lay men and lay women
took various solid and soft food and stood at the side of the road.
V

7. Satthari dhammaṁ desente bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo ca upāsakā ca upāsikāyo ca

sotaṁ odahantā nisīdiṁsu.
When the Lord was expounding the Dhamma, monks, nuns, lay men and lay
women sat down giving ear to him.

8. Mātari dhenuṁ duhamānāyaṁ duhitā gehassa aṅgaṇaṁ sammajji.

While the mother was milking the cow, the daughter swept the open space of the
house.

9. Dhammaṁ desetāresu bhikkhūsu janā pasīdanti.

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 100

People are devoted to {pleased with} monks who expound the Dhamma.

10. Rukkhassa sākhāsu bhijjantīsu pakkhino tato uḍḍetvā palāyiṁsu.

When the branches of the tree were broken, birds flew up from there and fled
away.

11. Dīghena maggena gantārānaṁ bhaṇḍāni corā apahariṁsu.

The thieves took away goods of those who travelled long journey.

12. Pitari kālaṁ-kate mātā ca puttā ca duhitaro ca bhātaro ca samīpe kandamānā

aṭṭhaṁsu.
When a father passed away, a mother, sons, daughters, and brothers stood crying

Y
nearby.

13. Mātari gehamhā nikkhamantiyaṁ putto ca dhītaro ca dvārāni pidahitvā

SRpāṭhālayaṁ gacchiṁsu.
When a mother went away from the house, son and daughters shut doors and
went to school.

14. Gehaṁ māpetāresu janesu bhūmiṁ khanamānesu tatra bilato ahi uggacchi.
.I
When people, who build the house, were digging the earth, the snake went out of
the hole there.

15. Namatthu satthuno.

EN

{namo + atthu} may there be adoration to the Lord.

24 Feb 2023
Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
1. When the boys were playing musical instruments, the girls danced.
V

Dārakesu turiyāni vādentesu dārikāyo nacciṁsu.

2. While the farmers were ploughing the field, (their) wives prepared food in (their)
houses.
Kassakesu khettaṁ kasantesu bhariyāyo gehesu bhattaṁ paṭiyādesuṁ.
Pati > paṭi √yat > yad + e > paṭiyāde + (s)uṁ

3. When the teacher taught, the pupils sat down giving ear to him.
Satthari desente sissā sotaṁ odahantā nisīdiṁsu.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 101

4. The hunters of deer roamed about in the forest together with (their) dogs.
Migassa hantāro vane sunakhehi saddhiṁ vicariṁsu.

5. Men who do good deeds will be born into a happy abode after death.
Puññāni kammāni kattāro manussā maraṇā paraṁ sugatiṁ upapajjissanti.
6. The wheels of the chariot follow the feet of the horse that draws (it).
Rathassa cakkāni taṁ vahantassa assassa pāde anugacchanti.
√vah + a + ti > vahati ~ vahantassa/ vahato

7. Wise men never praised these who did evil deeds.

Viññū pāpāni kammāni kattāre na kadāci pasaṁsiṁsu.

Y
8. We, while going along the road, heard the voice of women who were singing in a
grove.
Mayaṁ maggena gacchantā uyyāne gāyantīnaṁ itthīnaṁ saddaṁ assosimhā.

SR
√su + ṇā + ti > suṇāti
(a)√su (sru) > sso + (s)imhā > assosimhā
Gāyati ~ gāyantī

9. One who develops concentration gets rid of sensual pleasures.

.I
Samādhiṁ bhāvetā kāme pajahati.
Bhāveti ~ bhāve + tar > bhāvetar > bhāvetā

10. The nun who practised vipassana attained the Arahatship before long.
EN

Vipassanaṁ bhāventī bhikkhunī na cirassaṁ arahattaṁ pāpuṇi.

[The words in italic should be translated -tar nouns and those with
brackets are not to be translated]

Lesson 24
V

Consonantal Nouns Ending in -s

manas (mind) {Masc./ Neut.}

(1) mana, (2) manas {only for Ins. Dat. Gen. Abl. and loc. Sl.}
N.B., Mana (masc.) is declined like a Buddha, for Neut. like Phala
Masculine Gender Neuter Gender
Case
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Nom mano manā manaṁ manā,

. manāni
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 102

Voc. mana manā mana manā,

manāni

Acc. mano*, manaṁ mane mano, mane,

manaṁ manāni

Inst. manasā, manena manebhi,

manehi

D/G manaso, manassa manānaṁ

The Rest are the same
Abl. manasā, manasmā, -amhā manebhi, as Masc.
manehi

Y
Loc. manasi, manasmiṁ, manamhi, manesu
mane

SR
Sādhu (good) seyyas (better)
Garu (heavy) garutara

Seyyas + ī > seyyasī like nadī

seṭṭha (best)
garutama

Pronouns {Pronominal Adjectives}

.I
Personal pronoun; amha (I), tumha (you), ta (he/she)
Demonstrative pronoun; ta (that), eta (this), ima (this), amu (this)
Relative pronoun; ya (what)
EN

Interrogative pronoun; kiṁ (what?), katara, katama,

Demonstrative Pronoun ta(d) (that)

Masculine
Singular Plural
V

Nom. to > so te
Acc. taṁ te
Inst. tena tebhi, tehi
Dat. Gen. tassa tesaṁ, {tesa + naṁ>} tesānaṁ

Dat. Gen. Pl. naṁ, kaṁ, saṁ

Buddhānaṁ
Amhākaṁ
Tesaṁ

Abl. tasmā, tamhā tebhi, tehi

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 103

Loc. tasmiṁ, tamhi tesu

27 Feb 2023
Comparison For Masculine Gender

-a Stem Declansion ta Declansion

Case
Sl. Pl. Sl. Pl.

Nom. -o -ā -o (so) -e

Acc. -aṁ -e -aṁ -e

Inst. -ena -ebhi, -ehi -ena -ebhi, -ehi

Y
D/G -assa -ānaṁ -assa -esaṁ, -esānaṁ

Abl. -asmā, -amhā, -ā -ebhi, -ehi -asmā, -amhā -ebhi, -ehi

Loc.
SR -asmiṁ, -amhi, -e
So ~ he
So puriso ~ the man
te ~ they
-esu

te purisā ~ those men

-asmiṁ, -amhi -esu
.I
Comparison For Neuter Gender

-a Stem Declansion ta Declansion

Case
Sl. Pl. Sl. Pl.
EN

Nom. -aṁ -ā, -āni -aṁ (taṁ) -e, -āni

Acc. -aṁ -e, -āni -aṁ -e, -āni

Taṁ ~ that (fruit) te ~ those (fruits)

V

Taṁ phalaṁ ~ the fruit te phalāni ~ those fruit

Comparison For Feminine Gender

-ā Stem Declansion tā Declansion

Case
Sl. Pl. Sl. Pl.

Nom. -ā -ā, -āyo -ā (sā) -ā, -āyo

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 104

Acc. -aṁ -ā, -āyo -aṁ -ā, -āyo

Inst. -āya -ābhi, -āhi -āya -ābhi, -āhi

D/G -āya -ānaṁ -āya, -assā (issā) -āsaṁ, -āsānaṁ

Abl. -āya -ābhi, -āhi -āya -ābhi, -āhi

Loc. -āya, -āyaṁ -āsu -āya, -āyaṁ, -āsu

-assaṁ (issaṁ)

Ta + ā > tā (fem.)
Tā + ya > tāya

Y
Tassa + ā > tassā, tissā {a > i}
Etassa + etassā {a > e} > etissā

SR Tā + saṁ > tāsaṁ

Tāsa + naṁ > tāsānaṁ
Tā + ya > tāya, tā + yaṁ > tāyaṁ
Tassa + (y)aṁ > tassaṁ

Sā ~ she tā, tāyo ~ they (fem.)

.I
Sā dārikā ~ the girl tāyo dārikāyo ~ the girls

eta(d) {this} is declined like ta(d).

EN

Eso ~ this one ete ~ these

Eso puriso ~ this man ete purisā ~ these men
Etaṁ phalaṁ ~ this fruit ete phalāni ~ these fruit

Esā ~ this
V

Ta (that) + to > Tato ~ from that

Ud √ṭhā + ya > uṭṭhāya ~ having risen up

Saṁ + ud √ṭhā + ti {ṁ > m, dṭh > ṭṭh} > samuṭṭhāti

√ṭhā + ta {ā > i} ṭhita ~ samuṭṭhita

√tap + ta {pt > tt} > tatta

Upa √pad + ya + ti {dy > jj} > upapajjati ~ is born into
Upa √pad + na {dn > nn} > upapanna
√pūj + e/ aya + ti > pūjeti/ pūjayati
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 105

pūje/ pūjaya + (i)ta > pūjita/ pūjayita

√car > cir + na {n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ} > ciṇṇa

Pari √kir + a + ti > parikirati
Pari √kir + na {n > ṇ} > parikiṇṇa

√k(i)lis > kilis + ya + ti {sy > ss} > kilissati

√k(i)lis > kilis + ta {st > ṭṭh} > kiliṭṭha

√jan > jā + ya + ti > jāyati

√jan > jā + ta > jāta

Y
Antara √dhā + ya + ti > antaradhāyati
Antara √dhā + ta {dhā > hi} > antarahita

SR
Saṁ √majj + a + ti > sammajjati
Saṁ √majj + ta {jjt > jt > ṭṭh} > sammaṭṭha

√m(i)lā > milā + ya + ti > milāyati

√m(i)lā + ta > milāta
.I
√pīḷ + e + ti > pīḷeti
pīḷe + (i)ta > pīḷita
EN

√vaḍḍh + a + ti > vaḍḍhati

√vaḍḍh + ta {a > u, ḍḍht > ḍht > ḍḍh} vuḍḍha

√tus + ya + ti {sy > ss} > tussati

√tus + ta {st > ṭṭh} > tuṭṭha
V

Tapas + (s)in > tapassin (m.) + ī > tapassinī (f.)

01 Mar 2023
Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. Ayasā samuṭṭhitaṁ malaṁ tatuṭṭhāya tameva khādati.
Rust that has risen up from iron rises up from there and eats up that iron itself.
Saṁ + ud √ṭhā + ta > samuṭṭhita
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 106

Tato + uṭṭhāya
Ud √ṭhā + ya > uṭṭhāya

2. Buddho tejasā tapati.

The Buddha shines with glory.

3. Mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ buddhaṁ sirasā namāma.

Let us bow (our) head to the blessed Buddha.

4. Sāvittī chandaso mukhaṁ.

The verse Sāvittī is the entrance to the metrics.

Y
5. Tasmiṁ sarasi udakaṁ parittaṁ {atthi, hoti}.
In that lake water is a little.
There is a little water in that lake.

SR
6. Tā bhikkhuniyo mahatā thāmasā vipassanaṁ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṁ pāpuṇiṁsu.
Those nuns developed insight with great effort and attained the Arahatship.

7. Te manussā kāyena vacasā manasā ca duccaritaṁ caritvā maraṇā paraṁ apāyaṁ

.I
upapajjiṁsu.
Those people performed bad conduct by body, mouth, or mind and were reborn
in unhappy state after death.
EN

8. Mayaṁ piṇḍāya āgataṁ theraṁ disvā tuṭṭhena manasā sirasā vandimhā, bhattena
ca pūjayimhā.
We, having seen the elderly monk coming for alms, bowed (our) head becoming
glad and worshipped with meal.

9. Saraso avidūre araññāsmiṁ tapassino tapaṁ caranti.

V

Ascetics practise the asceticism near the lake in the forest.

10. Rathesu dhāvantesu uṭṭhitena rajasā gehānaṁ bhittiyo parikiṇṇā kiliṭṭhā jātā.
When the chariots were running, the walls of houses became covered with dust
risen up and unclean.

11. Ahi urasā sappati.

A snake creeps by chest.

12. Kathaṁ tumhe padīpena vā ukkāya vā vinā rattiyaṁ tamasi idha vicaratha?
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 107

How do you wander here in the darkness at night without any lamp or torch?

13. Corā rattiyaṁ gehassāvidūre rahasā sallapantā nisīdiṁsu.

Thieves sat conversing secretly near the house at night.

Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
1. The monks and nuns, seeing the Lord that had come over there, got up from their
seats and paid homage bowing down (their) head to his feet.
Bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo ca tatra āgataṁ tathāgataṁ disvā tesaṁ āsanehi uṭṭhāya
tassa pādesu (tesaṁ) sirasā namassiṁsu
03 March 2023

Y
2. When the sun rises the darkness disappears.
Ādicce uggacchante tamo vigacchati.

SR
3. Now lotuses in the lake are in full bloom.
Idāni padumāni sarasi vikasitāni honti.

4. With much effort do we learn Pāḷi Language.

Mahatā thāmasā mayaṁ Pāḷi-bhāsaṁ uggaṇhāma.
.I
5. When the nun sweeps the yard with a broom much dust rises up from the ground.
Bhikkhuniyaṁ sammuñjaniyā aṅgaṇaṁ sammajjantiyaṁ bahu rajo bhūmiyā
uṭṭhahati.
EN

6. Because of the nutritive essence of food does the body grow.

Āhārassa ojasā kāyo vaḍḍhati.

7. The brother gave a blow on the chest of the enemy with (his) hands.
Bhātā arino urasi tassa hatthehi pahāraṁ adāsi.
V

8. The lotuses that have been brought from the lake are fading now.
Sarasā ānītāni padumāni idāni milāyanti.

9. If you do not learn arts or science or dhamma in (your) prime age and do not
earn either in (your) middle age, you will certainly be afflicted by poverty during
(your) last days (age).
Sace tvaṁ paṭhame vayasi vijjaṁ vā sippaṁ vā dhammaṁ vā neva uggaṇheyyāsi
majjhime vayasi dhanaṁ na ajjeyyāsi, pacchime vayasi tvaṁ nissaṁsayaṁ dāliddiyena
pīḷito bhavissasi.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 108

10. Men who are generous and well disciplined grow in fame.
Vadaññū susikkhitā manussā yasasā vaḍḍhanti.
Ancient Modern
Pr.P Antu ant
Agent tu tar

06 Mar 2023
Lesson 25
Consonantal Noun -n

Attan (self), brahman (brahmā, god), rājan (king), sakhin (friend)

Stem (1) Stem (2) Stem (3)

Y
atta attan attān
brahma brahman brahmān
rāja rājan rājān

Case SR
Nom. attā
attan
Singular

brahman

brahmā rājā
rājan attan
Plural

brahman rājan
.I
Voc. atta, attā brahme rāja
attāno brahmāno rājāno
Acc. attaṁ, brahmaṁ, rājaṁ, rājānaṁ
attānaṁ brahmānaṁ
EN

Ins. attanā brahmunā rājinā, rājunā, attanebhi Brahmebhi, rājebhi, -hi

raññā , -hi -hi rājūbhi, -hi

D/G attano brahmuno, rājino, rājuno, attānaṁ brahmānaṁ rājānaṁ,

brahmanassa rañño rājūnaṁ

Abl. attanā, brahmunā, rājinā, rājunā, attanebhi brahmebhi, rājebhi, -hi

V

attasmā, brahmasmā, raññā, rājasmā, , -hi -hi rājūbhi, -hi

attamhā brahmamhā rājamhā

loc. attani, brahmuni, rājini, raññe, attanesu brahmesu rājesu,

attasmiṁ, brahmasmiṁ, rājasmiṁ, rājūsu
attamhi brahmamhi rājamhi

N.B., Inst. sl. rājinā {rāj(i)nā} > rājnā {n > ñ, jñ > ññ} > raññā
d/g sl. rājino > rañño
Loc. sl. rājini > raññe
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 109

(1) sakhin, (2) sakha(n), (3) sakhāra

Case Singular Plural

Nom. sakhā

Voc. sakhe, sakha, sakhā sakhāyo, sakhino

Acc. sakhānaṁ, sakhaṁ, sakhāraṁ

Inst. sakhinā sakhārebhi, -hi

Abl. sakhinā, sakhārasmā, sakhāramhā sakhebhi, -hi

D/G sakhino, sakhissa sakhānaṁ, sakhīnaṁ

Y
Loc. sakhārasmiṁ, sakhāramhi, sakhāre sakhāresu, sakhesu

SR
Paṭi √vid + e > paṭivede + ti
Pa √mud + a > pamoda + ti > pamodati
Pa √mud + (i)ta > pamudita
Pa + attha + e + ti > pattheti [denom.]
Āhāra + e + ti > āhāreti [denom.]
Pa √saṁs + a + ti > pasaṁsati
.I
Pasaṁsa + (i)ta > pasaṁsita
Pa √sa(ṁ)s + ta {st > tth} > pasattha
Pa √lap + e > palāpe + ti
√kudh + ya + ti {dhy > jjh} > kujjhati
EN

√kudh + ta {dht > ddh} > kuddha

√dubh + ya + ti {bhy > bbh} > dubbhati
√dubh + ta {bht > ddh} > duddha

Dur + medha (wise) > dummedha (unwise)

Dur + bala (strong) > dubbala (weak)
V

Sīho viya ~ like a lion

Sīho iva ~ like a lion

08 Mar 2023
Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. Bālā dhummedhā pāpāni kammāni karontā amittena attanā iva caranti.
The foolish, the unwise doing evil deeds move about by themselves as their
enemy.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 110

2. Bhagavā brahmunā yācito Isipatanaṁ gantvā dhammaṁ desesi.

The Buddha being asked by the Brahma went to Isipatana and expounded the
Dhamma.

3. Na jaccā vasalo hoti, na jaccā hoti brahmaṇo, kammunā eva vasalopi brahmaṇopi
hoti.
One is not an outcast by birth.
One is not a brahmin by birth.
Jāti (birth) ~ jātiyā {jāt(i)yā, ty > cc, ā > a} > jaccā
Kamman (deed) ~ kamman + ā > kammunā
Only by deed one is an outcast or a brahmin.

Y
4. Attano sakhāraṁ jetā mitto na hoti.
Attan + o > attano (dat./gen.sl.)
Sakhin > sakhār + aṁ > sakhāraṁ (acc.sl.)

SR
√ji + tar > jetar > jetā (nom.sl.)
One who conquers his own companion is not a friend.

5. Dūto āgamma rañño saṅgāmassa pavattiṁ paṭivedesi.

The messenger came and informed the news about the battle to the king.
.I
6. Coresu balavantesu jātesu rājāno dubbalā honti.
When thieves have become powerful, kings are weak.
EN

7. Sakhā cirassamāgataṁ sakhāramiva sā gharamāgataṁ patiṁ disvā pamuditā

ahosi.
She saw the husband coming home and was greatly delighted like a friend to
another friend coming very long time.
Sakhā cirassamāgataṁ sakhāraṁ (disvā pamudito ahosi) iva
V

sā gharamāgataṁ patiṁ disvā pamuditā ahosi.

8. Attā hi attano nātho.

One is indeed the refuge for oneself.

9. Tadā bārāṇasiyaṁ rajjaṁ apatthento rājā nāma nāhosi.

At that time there was no king who was not wishing the rulership in Benares.

10. Sakkosi nu kho tāta tvaṁ paccāmittena rājinā saddhiṁ yuddhaṁ kātuṁ?
Api, nu, kiṁ, putting main verb at first -?
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 111

Dear one, Can you/ Are you able to fight a war (against) with the enemy king?
So tena yujjhati. He fights with him.

11. Etaṁ hi pubbanimittaṁ brahmuno pātubhāvāya.

This is the foregoing sign for the appearance of the Brahma.

12. Ahaṁ pitarā ca mātuyā ca bhātarehi ca sakhārehi ca saddhiṁ cetiyāni

vandamāno Jambudīpe tatra tatra vicariṁ.
I went here and there in India worshipping shrines together with the father, the
mother, brothers, and friends.

10 Mar 2023

Y
Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
1. Don’t associate with bad companions.

SR
Mā tvaṁ pāpakehi mittehi bhajāhi/ bhaja.
Mā tumhe pāpekehi mittehi bhajatha.

2. The king’s son went to the pleasurable grove together with his friends.
Rājino putto tassa sakhārehi saddhiṁ uyyānaṁ gacchi.
.I
3. Due to their good deeds, beings are reborn into happy states after death.
Tesaṁ kusalānaṁ kammānaṁ hetu sattā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ upapajjanti
(upapannā honti.)
EN

Sugatiyaṁ uppajjati ~ is reborn into

Sugatiṁ upapajjati ~ is reborn into
Agāre vasati ~ he lives in home.
Agāraṁ ajjhāvasati {adhi + ā √vas}~ he lives in home.

4. Many people in India worship Brahma.

V

Jambudīpe (vasantā) bahū manussā brahmaṁ pūjenti.

5. Men who did good deeds were praised even by Brahma.

Kusalāni kammāni kattāro(agent)/karontā(pr.p)/ katavantā(app) manussā
brahmunāpi pasatthā ahesuṁ.
Ye kusalāni kammāni kariṁsu, te manussā brahmunāpi pasatthā ahesuṁ.
√kar + tar > kattar

6. The minister was expelled from the country by the king who had got angry with
him.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 112

Mantī tassa kuddhena rājinā raṭṭhā palāpito ahosi.

√kudh + ya + ti > kujjhati ~ √kudh + ta > kuddha
The coming man ~ āgacchanto puriso/ āgato puriso.
An angry man ~ kujjhanto puriso/ kuddho puriso.

7. He attended his father and mother by himself.

So attanā tassa pitaraṁ ca mātaraṁ ca (mātāpitaro) upaṭṭhāsi.

8. The good deeds done by beings follow them as the shadow of a man.
Sattehi katāni kusalāni kammāni manussassa chāyā iva te anugacchanti.

9. One would blame oneself for one’s own evil deeds.

Y
So attano pāpānaṁ kammānaṁ hetu attānaṁ upavadeyya.

10. The subjects were pleased with the king who was kind and just.

SRPajā kāruṇike dhammike raññe pasannā ahosi.

11. If he plots against the king all his property will be confiscated.
Sace so rañño dubbheyya sabbaṁ tassa dhanaṁ rājasantakaṁ bhavissati.
.I
12. Loving-kindness, compassion, sympathetic joy, and equanimity are the qualities
that are found in Brahmas.
Mettā karuṇā muditā upekkhā ca brahmesu vijjamānā guṇā honti.
EN

13 Mar 2023
Lesson 26
Interrogative Pronoun kiṁ ~ what/who?
{ka for Masc. kiṁ/ka for Neut. kā for Fem.}
Relative Pronoun ya ~ what/ which
V

Indefinitive Pronoun ka + ci ~ {koci} someone

Masculine Neuter Feminine

Case
Sl. Pl. Sl. Pl. Sl. Pl.

Nom -o -e -aṁ -e, -ā -ā, -āyo

. -āni

Acc. -aṁ -e -aṁ -e, -aṁ -ā, -āyo

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 113

-āni

Inst. -ena -ebhi, -ehi -āya -ābhi, -āhi

D/G -assa -esaṁ, -āya, -assā, -āsaṁ,

-esānaṁ (-issā) -āsānaṁ

Abl. -asmā, -ebhi, -ehi -āya -ābhi, -āhi

-amhā

Loc. -asmiṁ, -esu -āya, -āyaṁ, -āsu

-amhi -assaṁ,
(-issaṁ)

Y
Declansion (Neut.)

SR Case

Nom.

Acc.
Sl.

-aṁ (taṁ)

-aṁ
Pl.

-e, -āni

-e, -āni
.I
Declansion (Fem.)
Case
Sl. Pl.
EN

Nom. -ā (sā) -ā, -āyo

Acc. -aṁ -ā, -āyo

Inst. -āya -ābhi, -āhi

D/G -āya, -assā (issā) -āsaṁ, -āsānaṁ

V

Abl. -āya -ābhi, -āhi

Loc. -āya, -āyaṁ, -āsu

-assaṁ (issaṁ)

Pronoun (Sabbanāma)

List Type Pronoun Meaning

01. First Personal amha I, We

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 114

02. Second Personal tumha You

03. Third Personal ta He, She, It, They

04. eta this

05. Demonstrative ima/ idaṁ this

06. asu/ amu that

07. Relative ya which

08. Interrogative kiṁ Who?, what?

09. sabba All, whole, every

Y
10. añña another

11. aññatara One of two, any one, a certain

SR
12.

13.

14.
Pronominal
Adjective
aññatama

itara

para, apara
Any one

another

A different one
.I
15. pubba The fore part, eastern

16. uttara The upper part, northern

17. adhara The lower part

EN

18. ekacca One, any one

19. eka A, certain

yes/ no question
V

kiṁ, api, nu = no
Tvaṁ gacchasi kiṁ/ api/ nu ~ do you go?

Āgato puriso mama bhātā. {a man who is coming is my brother.}

Yo puriso āgato, so mama bhātā. {a man whoever is coming is my brother.}
15 Mar 2023
pucchā/ pañha
Do you have ~ tava atthi
Koci pañho pucchituṁ tava atthi kiṁ

Tattha ~ there
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 115

Tattha tattha ~ here and there

Niggahīta Sandhi

I. -ṁ + V-

1. ṁ > m, taṁ + eva > tameva/ tadeva

2. ṁ > d, etaṁ + avoca > etadavoca

3. ṁ is dropped, tāsaṁ + ahaṁ >

tāsāhaṁ

Y
4. V is dropped, ṁ > C {taṁ + api >
tampi}

SR 1.

2.

3.
II. -ṁ + Group C-

-ṁ {> ṅ} + k-, kh-, g-, gh-, ṅ-*

-ṁ {> ñ} + c-, ch-, j-, jh-, ñ-

-ṁ {> ṇ} + ṭ-, ṭh-, ḍ-, ḍh-, ṇ-

.I
4. -ṁ {> n} + t-, th-, d-, dh-, n-

5. -ṁ {> m} + p-, ph-, b-, bh-, m-

EN

III. -ṁ + Groupless C-

-ṁ {> ñ} + y- {ñy > ññ} taṁ yeva >

1.
taññeva

-(a)ṁ {dropped} + r- {a > ā} saṁ

2.
rāgo > sārāgo
V

3. -ṁ {>l} + l- saṁ lapati > sallapati

4. -ṁ {>ñ} + h- taṁ + hi > tañhi

√vañc + e + ti > vañceti

√jñā + nā + eyya > jāneyya
√jñā + nā + iyā > jāniyā
Jāniyā > jān(i)yā > jānyā {ā > a, ny > ññ} > jaññā ~ should know
Vi √jñā + nā + ti > vijānāti
Ud √īr + aya + ti > udīrayati
Abhi + nir √nam + e + ti {nr > nn, a > ā} > abhininnāmeti
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 116

Saṁ √chi(ṁ)d + a + ti {ṁ > ñ, ṁ > n} > sañchindati

√dā {dādā >} dadā + ti > dadāti
dadā + eyya > dadeyya
√dā > dadā + iyā > dad(i)yā > dadyā {dy > jj} > dajjā
√ganth + a + ti > ganthati
Pari √hā + ya + ti > parihāyati
Pari (y)√is + a + ti {i > e} > pariyesati
√bhī + a + ti {ī > e > ay > āy} > bhāyati
Vi √sad > sīd + a + ti > visīdati
Ni √mant + e + ti > nimanteti
Nis √kam + a + ti {sk > kkh} > nikkhamati
√vi(ṁ)d + a + ti > vindati

Y
Pa √atth + e + ti > pattheti
Ati √ruc + a + ti {u > o}> atirocati

SR
Exercise (A)
Translate into English
17 Mar 2023

1. Yo brāhmaṇaṁ vā samaṇaṁ vā aññaṁ vāpi vanibbakaṁ musāvādena vañceti,

taṁ jaññā vasalo iti.
.I
Whoever deceives by falsehood either a brahmin, a recluse, or even a pauper,
one should know him “an outcast”

2. Yamhā dhammaṁ vijāneyya, sakkaccaṁ taṁ namassaye.

EN

From whom one may learn the Dhamma, one should worship him respectfully.
Namas + ya + aya> namassaya + e(yya)

3. (yo) Akakkasaṁ viññāpaniṁ, (taṁ) giraṁ saccamudīraye.

Yāya nābhisaje kañci, tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
Whoever may utter the speech that is true, instructive, and not harsh, by which
V

(speech) one may not curse anyone, I call him a brahmin.

4. Yasmiṁ samaye samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti, neva tasmiṁ samaye

samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakānaṁ khipitasaddo vā hoti ukkāsitasaddo vā.
Whenever the recluse Gotama expounds the Dhamma, at that time there is
neither noise of sneezing nor of coughing among disciples of the recluse Gotama.

5. Yaññadeva so kakkaṭako alaṁ abhininnāmeyya, taṁ tadeva te kumārakā vā (tā)

kumārikā vā kaṭṭhena vā kathalena vā sañchindeyyuṁ.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 117

Whatever a claw the crab may stretch out, those boys or girls would break it off
with a stick or a potsherd.

6. Kiñca bhikkhave vedanānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ? Yo bhikkhave vedanānaṁ

chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṁ, idaṁ vedanānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ.
Oh monks, what is escape from feelings? Oh monks, whatever is removal of
desire of lust for feelings, destruction of desire of lust for feelings, this is the escape
from feelings.
20 Mar 2023
7. Te bhikkhave sattā suparihīnā, ye ariyāya paññāya parihīnā.
Oh monks, those beings have greatly fallen away, who have fallen away from the
noble wisdom.

Y
8. Yesaṁ natthi piyaṁ, natthi tesaṁ dukkhaṁ.
To whom there is nothing beloved, to those there is no suffering.

SR
9. Saccena kittiṁ pappoti, dadaṁ mittāni ganthati.
By (saying) truth he gains fame, (by) offering (a gift) he makes friends.
Dadāti (he gives) ~ dadā + (a)nt > dadant/ dadat > dadaṁ, dadanto
.I
10. Katamena maggena so āgato?
Through which way did he come?

11. Sā kataraṁ upaddavaṁ na kareyya?

EN

which accident should she not do?

12. Petānaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ dajjā, pubbe katamanussaraṁ.

One should offer a gift for (the sake of) departed beings, remembering what they
did in the past.
√kar + ta (pp.) > kata ~ done {what they have done}
V

-ta, -tavant, -tāvin

13. Aparasmiṁ samaye tasmiṁ padese mahānidāgho ahosi.

At another time there was a great drought in that place.

14. Te jīvikaṁ kappetuṁ upāyaṁ pariyesamānā aññataraṁ gāmaṁ pāpuṇiṁsu.

They, seeking a means of earning their livelihood, reached a certain village.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 118

15. Katamā ca sā bhikkhave majjhimā paṭipadā? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo,

seyyathidaṁ sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto
sammā-ājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhī’ti.
And what, oh monks, is that middle way? This is the very noble eightfold path,
namely, right view, right thought, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort,
right mindfulness, and right concentration.

Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
1. In the world there is none equal to me.
Loke me paṭipuggalo natthi.

Y
2. Ever is the pure man’s fasting day.
Sadā suddhassa uposatho.

SR
3. All his riches will gradually diminish.
Sabbaṁ tassa dhanaṁ anukkamena parihāyissati.

22 Mar 2023
.I
4. Herein a certain one understands as it really is.
Idha ekacco yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti.

5. They attacked one another with their hands.

EN

Te aññmaññaṁ pāṇīhi pahariṁsu.

6. All are afraid of death.

Sabbe bhāyanti maccuno.
V

7. Some insects are born in filth.

Keci pāṇakā asucimhi uppajjanti/ asuciṁ upapajjanti/ asucimhi nibbattanti.

8. Many are difficulties there, where the fool falters.

Bahū tattha sambādhā (honti), yattha bālo visīdati.

9. To all, life is dear.

Sabbesaṁ jīvitaṁ piyaṁ (hoti).

10. At that time, a certain brahmin, having invited the monks, gave them a meal.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 119

Tena kho pana samayena/ ekaṁ samayaṁ/ tasmiṁ samaye aññataro brahmaṇo
bhikkhū nimantetvā tesaṁ bhikkhaṁ adāsi.

11. Some ate and some went out taking the alms-food (with themselves).
Keci bhuñjiṁsu, keci bhikkhaṁ gahetvā nikkhamiṁsu.

12. Say “how one may acquire wisdom.”

Vadehi “kathaṁ paññaṁ adhigaccheyyā”ti

13. He outshone the other Devas.

So aññe deve atiroci.

Y
14. A person is a giver to some, but to others he does not give.
Eko puggalo kesañci dātā hoti, aññesaṁ pana na dadāti.
{A person gives to some, but to others he does not give.}

SREko puggalo kesañci dadāti/ deti, aññesaṁ pana na dadāti/ deti.

15. If a monk should wish, “may I acquire Jhānas”, he should keep precepts and
develop concentration.
Sace bhikkhu ākaṅkheyya “jhānāni samāpajjeyyan”ti, so sīlāni ca rakkheyya,
.I
samādhiṁ ca bhāveyya.

16. Whatever danger would there be, all that would arise from the foolish and not
from the wise.
EN

Yaṁ kiñci bhayaṁ uppajjeyya, sabbaṁ taṁ bālatova uppajjeyya na paṇḍitato.

Ye keci kusalā dhammā, sabbe te kusalamūlā.

24 Mar 2023

Lesson 27
V

Pronouns
- first personal
- second personal
- demonstrative pronoun; ima (this), amu (that, so and so, such)
- Conditional Mood

First Personal Pronoun ~ amha (I, we)

Stem -ma Stem -amha
Case
Singular Plural
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 120

Nom. ahaṁ mayaṁ, amhe, no

Acc. maṁ, mamaṁ amhe, no

Inst. mayā, me amhebhi, amhehi, no

Abl. mayā amhebhi, amhehi

Dat./Gen mama, mayhaṁ, me amhākaṁ, asmākaṁ, amhaṁ,

. no

Loc. mayi amhesu

Acc. ma + (a)ṁ > maṁ/ maṃ + aṁ > mamaṁ
Inst. ma + ā > ma(y)ā > mayā

Y
Loc. ma + i > ma(y)i > mayi
Dat./Gen. Pl. ~ naṁ, saṁ, kaṁ
Amha + kaṁ > amhākaṁ [asmi > amhi] > asmākaṁ

SR
Kataṁ me/ mayā kataṁ (done by me)
Second Personal Pronoun -tumha (you)

Case
Stem -tva

Singular
Stem -tumha

Plural
.I
Nom. tvaṁ tumhe, vo

Acc. tvaṁ, taṁ, tavaṁ, tuvaṁ tumhe, vo

EN

Inst. tvayā, tayā, te tumhebhi, tumhehi, vo

Abl. tvayā, tayā tumhebhi, tumhehi

Dat./Gen tava, tuyhaṁ, te tumhākaṁ, tumhaṁ, vo

.

Loc. tvayi, tayi tumhesu

V

Nom. sl. tva + (a)ṁ > tvaṁ

Acc. sl. tva + (a)ṁ > tvaṁ {tv > tt > t} > taṁ
t(a)va + (a)ṁ > tavaṁ/ t(u)vaṁ
inst. / abl. Sl tva + (y)ā > tvayā / tva > ta + (y)ā > tayā
Loc. sl. tva + (y)i > tvayi/ tva > ta + (y)i > tayi

Demonstrative Pronoun -ima/ -idaṁ (this)

-ima > (im)a
Masc. -ima/ -a Neut. -ima/ -a Fem. -imā/ -ā
Case
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 121

Singular Plural Singular Plural Singular Plural

Nom ayaṁ ime idaṁ, ime, ayaṁ imā, imāyo

. imaṁ imāni

Acc. imaṁ ime idaṁ, ime, imaṁ imā, imāyo

imaṁ imāni

Inst. iminā, imebhi, imāya imābhi,

anena imehi, imāhi
ebhi, ehi

Abl. iminā, imebhi, imāya imābhi,

imasmā, imehi, imāhi

Y
imamhā, ebhi,
asmā, ehi
amhā

SR
Dat./ imassa,
Gen. assa
imesaṁ,
imesānaṁ,
esaṁ,
esānaṁ
imāya,
imissā, assā
imāsaṁ,
imāsānaṁ,
āsaṁ,
āsānaṁ

Loc. imasmiṁ, imesu, esu imāya, imāsu, āsu

.I
imamhi, imāyaṁ,
asmiṁ, imissaṁ,
amhi assaṁ
Inst./ abl. Sl. ima > imi + nā > iminā [yena, tena, sabbena]
EN

a + ena > a(n)ena > anena

inst./ abl. Pl. a > e + bhi/ hi > ebhi, ehi

F. d/g sl. Ima + ā > imā + ya > imāya

Imassa + ā > imassā > imissā
ā + ya > āya*
V

assa + ā > assā

Demonstrative Pronoun -amu (that, so and so, such)

Masc. Neut. Fem.

Case
Singular Plural Singular Plural Singular Plural

Nom asu, amu amū aduṁ amū, asu amū,

. amūni amuyo
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 122

Acc. amuṁ amū aduṁ amū, amuṁ amū,

amūni amuyo

Inst. amunā amūbhi, amuyā amūbhi,

amūhi amūhi

Abl. amunā, amūbhi, amuyā amūbhi,

amusmā, amūhi amūhi
amumhā

Dat./ amuno, amūsaṁ, amuyā, amūsaṁ,

Gen. amussa amūsānaṁ amussā amūsānaṁ

Loc. amusmiṁ amūsu amuyā, amūsu

Y
, amumhi amuyaṁ,
amussaṁ

SR 27 Mar 2023
Asu + ka > asuka (adj.)/ amu + ka > amuka, decline like ‘buddha’ in Masc. and like
‘phala’ in Neut.
For Fem. asuka/ amuka + ī > asukī/ amukī, decline like ‘nadī’.
.I
Conditional Mood VT
Person Singular Plural

3rd. (i)ssā (i)ssaṁsu

EN

2nd. (i)sse (i)ssatha

1st. (i)ssaṁ (i)ssamhā

Four verbal bases based on their ending vowel

-a, -ṃ-a, -ya, -aya
V

(1) dhāva
bhuñja
sāya
desaya

-nā, -ṇā, -uṇā

(2) jinā
suṇā
pāpuṇā
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 123

-o
(3) karo

-e
(4) dese

(1) -a, -ā, or -o + (i) Condintional mood vt

(2) -e + Conditional mood vt {withou ‘i’ insertion}

(1) dhāva + (i)ssā > dhāvissā, (a)dhāvissā, etc.,

jinā + (i)ssā > jinissā, (a)jinissā, etc.,

Y
karo + (i)ssā > karissā, (a)karissā, etc.,

(2) dese + ssā > desessā, (a)desessā, etc.,

SRConditional clause + consequent clause

sace/ ce/ yadi + condit. Verb + condit. verb/ opt./ fut. Verb.
.I
(1) If + verb present + will verb inf. (future)
(2) If + verb past + would verb inf. (opt.)
(3) If + have past participle + would have past participle.
EN

Sace so agamissā ahampi tatra agamissaṁ

If he goes, I too will go there.
If he went, I too would go there.
If he has gone, I too would have gone there.

Antara (adj.)
V

Ñātīnaṁ antare
Kāla (m.n.) time, right time
Kālassa eva (adv.) early, earlier
Saṁsaya (n.) doubt
Nissaṁsaya + ṁ > nissaṁsayaṁ (adv.) without doubt, certainly

Ā √kus (krus) + a + ti > (ākosati) akkosati

Ā √kus + ta {st > ṭṭh} > akkuṭṭha
Akkosa + (i)ta > akkosita
√pāl + e + ti > pāleti
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 124

√rakkh + a + ti > rakkhati

√labh + ta {bht > ddh} > laddha
√jal + aya + ti > jālayati/ jāleti
Jāle + (i)ta > jālita
√ajj + e/aya + ti > ajjeti/ajjayati
Ajje + (i)ta > ajjita
√pīḷ + e + ti > pīḷeti
Pīḷe + (i)ta > pīḷita

Agamiagacchi

Y
Gamissati gacchissati
Gamissā gacchissā

SR
Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. Sace asuko puriso idhāgacchissā, mayaṁ idha nāgacchissamhā.
29 Mar 2023

If that man would come here, we would not come here.

.I
If that man comes here, we will not come here.
If that man came here, we would not come here.
{idha + āgacchissā, na + āgacchissamhā}
EN

2. Yadi te hiyyo khettaṁ kasissaṁsu, mayamajja taṁ dhaññena vapeyyāma.

If they ploughed the field yesterday, we today may sow that with the rice-grain.

3. Sace te bhattaṁ apacissaṁsu, nissaṁsayaṁ amhākaṁ sevakā idhāgamma

bhuñjissanti.
If they cook the meal, certainly our servants will come here and eat.
V

4. Sace tumhe pāpāni kammāni akarissatha, maraṇā paraṁ manussattaṁ neva

labhissatha.
Had you done evil deeds, after death you had never obtained human life.

5. Yadi corā tatra gantvā amussa gahapatino gehaṁ pavisissaṁsu, rājapurisā sabbe
te agaṇhissaṁsu.
If thieves go there and enter that householder’s house, policemen will take all of
them/ them all.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 125

6. Asukiyā duhitari nahāyituṁ nadiṁ gacchantiyaṁ yadi tvaṁ pharusāya vācāya

taṁ na akkosisse, na hi tava pitā tvaṁ evaṁ paharissā.
While such daughter is going to the river to take bath, if you did not scold her
with harsh speech, your father certainly would not beat you in this way.

7. Sace ayaṁ rājā attano pitaraṁ dhammikaṁ rājānaṁ nāvadhissā, ajja idheva
sotāpattiphalaṁ pāpuṇissā.
If this king did not kill his father, a righteous king, today right here he would
attain the state of stream-winner.

8. Sace tvaṁ amūni bhaṇḍāni amuyā itthiyā nādadisse, kathaṁ sā tāva dubbalā
duggatā itthī tāni attano gehaṁ pati aharissā?

Y
If you did not give such goods to a such woman, how could she, so weak and
poor, bring them towards her own house?

SR
9. Sace asukā purisā amūni dārūni atra ānayissaṁsu, idāni yeva mayaṁ atra aggiṁ
jālayissamhā.
If such men brought those sticks here, now itself we would kindle the fire here.

10. Sace tumhe majjhime vayasi dhanaṁ ajjayissatha, na hevaṁ idāni pacchime
.I
vayasi dāliddiyena pīḷitā abhavissatha.
If you earned wealth during your middle age, now in this way you would
certainly not be oppressed by poverty in your last age.
{na + hi + evaṁ}
EN

31 Mar 2023
Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
1. Had you been here yesterday, I also would have come.
Sace tvaṁ hiyyo idha abhavisse, ahampi āgacchissaṁ/ āgaccheyyāmi/
V

āgacchissāmi.
Yadi tvaṁ….
Tvaṁ ce….

2. Had he been so poor, how could he maintain so large a family?

Sace so tāva duggato abhavissā, kathaṁ so tāva mahantaṁ kutumbaṁ
arakkhissā?
3. Had they learned neither art nor science, how could we call them ‘learned’?
Sace te vijjaṁ vā sippaṁ vā na ajjayissaṁsu, kathaṁ mayaṁ te paṇḍitā’ti
abravissamhā/ abrūvissamhā?
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 126

….vā …..vā/ …..ceva….ca/ ….api…..api ~ either …. or

….vā…..vā na ~ neither ….. Nor
Neva…..na ~ neither….nor
….neva vijjaṁ na sippaṁ ajjayissaṁsu,

4. Had you wanted to sell your house, we would have bought it.
Sace tvaṁ tava gehaṁ vikkiṇituṁ icchisse, mayaṁ taṁ kiṇissāma.
5. I saw yesterday such and such persons conversing secretly with this man near
that big tree/ in the vicinity of that big tree.
Ahaṁ hiyyo mahantassa asukassa rukkhassa samīpe anena purisena rahasā
sallapante asuke puggale passiṁ.

Y
6. Give these clothes to such and such boys and girls.
imāni vatthāni asukānaṁ ca kumārānaṁ asukānaṁ ca kumārikānaṁ dehi.
Cīvaraṁ ca piṇḍapātaṁ ca/ cīvaraṁ piṇḍapātaṁ ca

SR Imaṁ ca cīvaraṁ imaṁ ca piṇḍapātaṁ/ imaṁ cīvaraṁ piṇḍapātaṁ ca

7. Where is the man coming from, while it rains so heavily?

Mahāmeghe vassante kuto so puriso āgato?
10 April 2023

While It rains ~ mahāmegho vassati > mahāmeghe vassante

.I
While it rains so heavily ~ Deve tāva bhusaṁ vassante

8. Had I not gone there earlier, there would have been a great quarrel among our
relatives.
EN

Sace nāhaṁ tattha kālasseva agamissaṁ, amhākaṁ ñātīnaṁ antare mahākalaho

abhavissā.

9. Had you advised me thus earlier, I would have not done so.
Sace tvaṁ kālasseva evaṁ maṁ ovadisse, nāhaṁ evaṁ akarissaṁ.
V

10. Had you supplied rice and curry stuffs, he would have already prepared food for
all of us.
Sace tvaṁ taṇḍulaṁ ca sūpeyyāni ca adadisse, idāniyeva so sabbesaṁ amhākaṁ
bhattaṁ paṭiyādayissā.

Lesson 28

- Past tense
- Syntax of some words
- Degree of adjective
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 127

Ajjatanī < ajjatana + ī + vibhatti

Samīpe ajjattanī (for near past)

Hiyyattanī < hiyyo + ttana + ī

Hiyyo pabhuti paccakkhe hiyyattanī (for past starting from yesterday {prsesence of sb})

Parokkhā {paro + akkha} ~ beyond sb’s eye

Apaccakkhe parokkhā atīte.

Ajjattanī - mostly in prose

Hiyyattanī and Parokkhā ~ mostly in stanza

Y
Hiyyattanī

Sl PL
3rd
2nd
1st
SR ā
o
aṁ, a
ū
ttha
mhā

√vad (to say) + a > vada

.I
avadā avadū
avado avadattha
avadaṁ, avada avadamhā
EN

12 April 2023

noun/ adj. + acc./inst. = adv.

Adhikaraṇa (nt) {reason} + ṁ > adhikaraṇaṁ (adv.) ~ because of, by reason
Sukha (adj.) {happy, comfortable} + ṁ > sukhaṁ (adv.) ~ happily, easily, comfortably
In connection with the verb ‘paṭibhāti’, acc. Case is used.
V

Paṭi √bhā + ti > paṭibhāti ~ appears, comes to one’s mind

Upamā maṁ paṭibhāti ~ a simile comes to my mind.
Paṭibhantu taṁ cunda bojjhaṅgā~ let the enlightenment factors come to your mind,
Cunda!

To denote time (expression) acc., inst., and loc. case is used.

Ekaṁ samayaṁ ~ at one time (suttapiṭaka)
Tena samayena ~ then, at that time (vinayapiṭaka)
Ekasmiṁ samaye ~ at one time (abhidhammapiṭaka)
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 128

Kāla (m.), samaya (m.), velā (f.) ~ time

Dhammassavanakālo
Tāya velāyaṁ imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi. The Buddha said this stanza at that time.

To denote duration of time/ distance of space acc. is used.

Māsaṁ sajjhāyati ~ he chants for a month.
Yojanaṁ vanarāji ~ the track of forest is (long) for a league.

Yena (noun) Tena ~ there where N is

E.g., yena bhagavā (hoti/ atthi) tena upasaṅkamati ~ he approaches there where the
Blessed One is.

Y
Yena (noun) taṁ ~ there where N is
E.g., bhagavā yena koṭigāmo (hoti/ atthi) taṁ avasari ~ the B.O went there where the
village Koṭi was.

SR
Namo + dat. word.
E.g., namo tassa (dat.) ~ homage to Him.
Namo te buddha vīra’tthu ~ may there be homage to you,
.I
Alaṁ/ kiṁ ~ what is the use of …
Alaṁ + person (dat.) + thing/state (inst.)
E.g., alaṁ te idha vāsena ~ what is the use of living here for you?
Kiṁ te jaṭāhi dummedha ~ a foolish one, what is the use of matted hair to you?
EN

To Have (Eng) = person (gen.) thing (nom.) √bhū/ √as (to be)
E.g., I have a robe. = civaraṁ me atthi. There is a robe to me.
I have children. = puttā me atthi. There are children to me (of me).

14 April 2023
V

Three Degrees of Adjective

Positive Adj. + tara, iya, issika > comparative adj.
E.g., Sukara (easy) + tara > sukaratara (easier)
Pāpa (wicked) + tara > pāpatara (more wicked)
Pāpa + iya > pāpiya
Pāpa + issika > pāpissika

Positive Adj. + tama, iṭṭha > superlative adj.

E.g., sukara + tama > sukaratama (easiest)
Pāpa + tama > pāpatama (most wicked)
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 129

Pāpa + iṭṭha > pāpiṭṭha

N.B., adj. -nt/-t (a) + tara/ tama

E.g., mahant (a) + tara > mahantatara
Mahant (a) + tama > mahantatama

Some Irregular Adj.

Vuḍḍha (old) Jeyya (elder) Jeṭṭha (eldest)
{ja + iya} {ja + iṭṭha}
Pasattha (praiseworthy) Seyya (more-) Seṭṭha (most-)
{sa + iya} {sa + iṭṭha}
Yuvan (young) Kaṇiya (younger) Kaṇiṭṭha (youngest)

Y
{kaṇ + iya} {kaṇ + iṭṭha}

SR Sentence Structure with Com/Sup. Adj.

Noun. (Inst./Abl.) + Comparative Adj.
Ta (he) ~ tena/ tasmā/ tato
E.g., tena rukkhena/ tasmā rukkhamhā mahantataro (bigger than that tree)
ayaṁ rukkho tena mahantataro ~ this tree is bigger than that.
.I
Noun. (Gen./Loc. Pl.) + Superlative Adj.
E.g., tesaṁ/ tesu seṭṭho (the most praiseworthy one of them/ among them)
EN

-i/e > y + Vowel

Me + ayaṁ > myāyaṁ

Iti + etaṁ > ityetaṁ {ty > cc} > iccetaṁ

Adhi + attaṁ > adhyattaṁ {dhy > jjh} > ajjhattaṁ (individual, internal)
Abhi + uggacchati > abhyuggacchati {bhy > bbh} > abbhuggacchati
V

-u/ o > v + Vowel

Anu + eti > anveti
So + ahaṁ > svāhaṁ
So + ahaṁ > so’haṁ

Manas {as > o}+ viññāṇa > manoviññāṇā

Tejas + dhātu > tejodhātu
Ayas + guḷa > ayoguḷa
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 130

Ud (up) √gam (to go) > uggam (to go up)

Ud (high) + tara > uttara (higher)

Ud + tama > uttama (highest)

Uttama (highest) + aṅga (part of the body) > uttamaṅga (head)

Noun/Adj. + tā > state/ -ship

Kusala (skilful) + tā > kusalatā (skilfulness)
Sahāya (friend) + tā > sahāyatā (friendship)

Dur √kar + ta > dukkata/ dukkaṭa (done wrongly)

Y
17 April 2023
√tap + a + ti > tapati ~ shines

SR
√tap + ta {pt > tt} > tatta ~ hot

Vi √jñā + nā + ti > vijānāti ~ knows

Vijāna ~ knowing
Su + vijāna > suvijāna ~ easy to understand
.I
Dur + vijāna {rv > bb} > dubbijāna ~ hard to understand

Saṁ + ā √ra(m)bh + a + ti > samārambhati ~ ārabhati ~ undertakes, attempt

EN

Samārambha (n) ~ undertaking, effort

Appa (less) + samārambha > appasamārambha (adj) ~ of less effort
Appasamārambha + tara > appasamārambhatara

Ānisaṁsa (n) ~ advantage

Mahat > mahā + ānisaṁsa > mahānisaṁsa (adj.) great advantageous
V

Mahānisaṁsa + tara > mahānisaṁsatara ~ more advantageous

Numerals + vidha (fold)
Eka + vidha > ekavidha
Dvi > du + vidha > duvidha ~ twofold
Ti + vidha > tividha ~ threefold

Saṁ √yam + a + ti > saṁyamati {ṁy > ññ} > saññamati

Saṁ √yam + ta > saṁyata/ {ṁy > ññ} > saññata

Appa + aṭṭa > appaṭṭa (adj.)

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 131

Appaṭṭa + tara > appaṭṭatara

Sīla (n) virtue, morality

Dur + sīla (adj.) dussīla

Pa √mi + nā + ti > pamināti

Pa √mi + ta > pamita
Pa √mi + tvā > pametvā
Pa √mi + tuṁ > pametuṁ

Ud √tas + a + ti > uttasati

Uttasa + (i)ta > uttasita

Y
Ud √tas + ta > uttasta

Saṁ √ṭhā + ti > saṇṭhāti

SR
Saṁ √ṭhā > ṭhāṭhā > ṭhahā + a + ti > saṇṭhahati
Saṇṭhaha + (i)tvā > saṇṭhahitvā

√ruh (to grow) + a + ti > rūhati

√ruh + ta {u > ū, ht > ḷh} > rūḷha
.I
√sad > sīd + a
Ni √sad > sīd + a + ti > nisīdati ~ sits
Pa √sad > sīd + a + ti > pasīdati ~ is devoted to
EN

Ā √sad + ya + ti {dy > jj} > āsajjati ~ assils

Ā √sad + ā > āsadā ~ he sat

Ā √sad + ya {dy > jj} > āsajja (ger.)

V

√bhid + ṁ-a > bhinda + ti > bhindati

(a) √bhid + ā > bhidā > abhidā ~ abbhidā

Vi √sam + a + ti > visamati > vissamati

√gah {grah}+ nā + ti {n > ṇ, hṇ > ṇh} > gaṇhāti

Ā √pucch + a + ti > āpucchati

Ā √pucch + ta {ccht > cht > ṭṭh} > āpuṭṭha
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 132

Appa ~ less
Mahant ~ much

Phala ~ fruit
Mahat + phala > mahapphala ~ fruitful

19 April 2023
Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. Sakkā samudde udakaṁ,
pametuṁ āḷhakena vā,

Y
natveva tava sabbaññu,
ñāṇaṁ sakkā pametave. Ap 219/ 220.

SR
Āḷhakena vā samudde udakaṁ pametuṁ sakkā.
It is possible to measure water in the ocean with the Āḷhaka-measure.
Natveva sabbaññu tava ñāṇaṁ pametave sakkā.
O Omnicient One, It is certainly not possible to measure your knowledge.
.I
2. Gambhīre uṭṭhitā ūmi na velaṁ ativattati. Ap 321.
The wave risen up in the depth does not pass over the shore.

3. Sabbe migā uttatasanti migarājassa gajjato. Ap 336.

EN

Sabbe migā migarājassa gajjato uttatasanti.

All animals are terrified when/while the lion is roaring/ at the roaring lion.
√gajj + a + ti > gajjati
Gajja + (a)nt/ at > gajjant/ gajjat + o > gajjato (gen.sl.)

4. Udake aggi na saṇṭhāti,

V

bījaṁ sele na rūhati,

agade kimi na saṇṭhāti,
kopo buddhe na jāyati. Ap. 583/ 569.
Fire does not remain on water.
A seed does not grow on a stone.
A germ does not remain in medicine.
Anger does not arise in the Buddha.

21 April 2023
5. Garuḷo khadiramāsadā, yatthuttamaṅgamabbhidā. J 210.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 133

Garuḷo khadiraṁ āsadā, yattha uttamaṅgaṁ abbhidā.

A woodpecker pecked an acacia tree, there (where) its head got broken.

acāri vatāyaṃ vitudaṃ vanāni, kaṭṭhaṅgarukkhesu asārakesu.

athāsadā khadiraṃ jātasāraṃ, yatthabbhidā garuḷo uttamaṅganti. J 120.

6. Yassa kāyena vācāya, manasā natthi dukkataṁ.

urasiva patiṭṭhāya, taṁ bhajehi ito gato. J.
Who has no mistake by body, word, or mind,
gone from here, Having put (him) into one’s chest, follow him.

Y
7. Nāgo muhuttaṁ vissamitvā yena pabbato tena agamā. J.
An elephant took rest for a while and went there where the mountain was.

SR
8. Suvijānaṁ sigālānaṁ, sakuntānaṁ ca vassitaṁ.
manussavassitaṁ rāja, dubbijānataraṁ tato. J.
Sigālānaṁ sakuntānaṁ ca vassitaṁ suvijānaṁ.
Manussavassitaṁ rāja tato dubbijānataraṁ.
.I
Noise of jackals and birds is easy to understand.
O king, noise of human beings is more difficult to understand than that.

9. Dukkho vāso araññasmiṁ, raṭṭhaṁ icchāmi gantave. J.

EN

Living in a forest is painful, I want to go to the town.

10. Seyyo ayoguḷo bhutto, tatto aggisikhūpamo.

Yañce bhuñjeyya dussīlo, raṭṭhapiṇḍaṁ asaññato. Dh 308.
Aggisikhūpamo tatto ayoguḷo bhotto (tato) seyyo, yañce….
V

(being) eaten an iron ball heated like flame is better than the food obtained from
people, that unvituous unrestrained one would eat.

11. Caraṁ ce nādhigaccheyya, seyyaṁ sadisamattano.

ekacariyaṁ daḷhaṁ kayirā, natthi bāle sahayatā. Dh 61.
While walking, if he could not find one higher than or equal to himself, he
should make firm living alone, there is no friendship with fools.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 134

12. Atthi kho brāhmaṇa añño yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya imehi ca
saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭataro appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro
mahānisaṁsataro ca. D I 146.
There is, brahman, another sacrifice less troublesome and of less undertakings,
more fruitful and more advantageous than this threefold sacrifice and these
taking refuges.
24 April 2023
Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
1. This house is larger than that house.
Idaṁ gehaṁ tato gehato mahantataraṁ.

Y
2. The Ganges is the longest one of the rivers in India.
Gaṅgā jambudīpe nadīnaṁ (nadīsu) dīghatamā.

SR
3. The householder’s son, on the death of his father, did all the work both in the
farm and household by himself alone.
Gahapatino putto tassa pituno accayena ubhaye khette ca gare ca sabbakiccāni
ekakova (sayameva/ attanāva) akari.
{yo vo ānanda mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito, so vo mamaccayena satthā}
.I
4. “To what family are you going?” the son asked his mother.
Kataraṁ kulaṁ tvaṁ gacchasīti putto tassa mātaraṁ pucchi.
EN

5. After making his alms-round in Kosambī, without telling anybody, the Lord took
his bowl and robe and went quite alone to the village Bālaka-loṇakāra.
Bhagavā kosambiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā kassaci anāpucchitvā pattacīvaraṁ ādāya
ekakova yena bālaka-loṇakāragāmo tadavasari.
Makes his alms-round = goes for alms-round = piṇḍāya carati
Gantvā ~ having gone, go and, after going
V

a(n) + tvā ~ without

Agantvā ~ without going
Yena ….tena upasaṅkamati
Yena ….taṁ avasarati

6. The elephant left his herd and entered this forest for the sole purpose of living
alone.
Hatthi (nāgo) tassa yūthaṁ pahāya ekakova vasanatthāya (ekakova vasituṁ)
imaṁ vanaṁ pāvisi.
{vasana ~ living, attha ~ purpose ~ āya ~ for}
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 135

Pa √vis + a + ti > pavisati ~ enters {pa (a)√vis + a + i > pāvisi}

7. When the monks had finished their meals, Mahākāla’s wives thought to
themselves: “Cullakāla’s wives recovered (caught) their husband, let us also
recover (catch) ours.”
Bhikkhūsu bhattaṁ bhuttāvīsu mahākālassa bhariyāyo (sayameva) cintesuṁ
cullakālassa bhariyāyo tāsaṁ sāmikaṁ gaṇhiṃsu, mayampi amhākaṁ sāmikaṁ
gaṇhāmāti.
√bhuj (to eat)
√bhuj + ta > bhutta (eaten)
Bhutta + āvin > bhuttāvin (have eaten) > bhuttāvīsu

Y
8. On a certain occasion the chief disciples took leave of the Lord and went from
Sāvatthi to Rājagaha.
Ekaṁ samayaṁ aggasāvakā bhagavantaṁ āpucchitvā sāvatthiyā rājagahaṁ

SR
agamiṁsu.
Sāvaka ~ disciple
Mahāsāvaka ~ great disciple
Aggasāvaka ~ chief disciple
.I
9. The thera thought: “these wandering ascetics are hostile to the dispensation of
the Buddha.”
Thero cintesi ime paribbājakā buddhasāsanassa paccāmittāti.
EN

10. The younger brother repeated his suggestion several times. At last the elder
brother said, “Very well, let us divide the field into two parts. Don’t touch my
portion, but do whatever you like with your portion.”
Kaṇiṭṭho bhātiko punappunaṁ yāci. Pariyosāne (atha) jeṭṭho bhātiko āha, “tena
hi khettaṁ dvidhā bhājema, mama bhāgaṁ mā āmasa, tava bhāgena yaṁ tvaṁ icchasi
taṁ karohī”ti.
V

26 April 2023
Lesson 29
- Prefix
Twenty prefixes are added to the root

Prefix + √root > (1) verb, (2) gerund, (3) infinitive, (4) adjective; (i)
present participle, (ii) past participle, (iii) future passive participle, (5) noun.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 136

(1) modifier of the root’s meaning (dhātvatthavisesaka- dhātu {root} + attha

{meaning} + visesaka {modifier})
e.g., √gam ~ to go
Ud √gam ~ to go up, rise up, climb up

(2) changer of the root’s meaning into opposition (dhātvatthabādhaka ~ dhātu +

attha + bādhaka {oppressing})
E.g., √gam ~ to go
Ā √gam ~ to come

(3) follower of the root’s meaning (dhātvatthānuvattaka ~ dhātu + attha +

Y
anuvattaka {follower})
E.g., √labh ~ to obtain
Paṭi √labh ~ to obtain

SR
Twenty Prefixes:

su, vi (10)
abhi, adhi, anu, apa, api, ati, ava, ā, u(d), upa (10)
du(s/r), ni, nī (nis/ nir), pa (pra), parā, pari, pati (praṭi), saṁ,

u(d)
.I
du(s/r)
ni(s/r)
saṁ
Ud √gam {dg > gg} > uggam ~ goes up
EN

Ava > o √gam > ogacchati ~ goes down

Dur √gam {rg > gg} > duggam ~ duggati
Nir √gam {rg > gg} > niggam ~ niggacchati
Nis √kam {sk > kkh} > nikkham
Nis √car {sc > cch} > nicchar
Ni √sad > sīd > nisīdati ~ he sits down.
V

Abhi √kam (kram) > abhikkam/ kamati, pakkamati, abhikkamati

Anu √gah (grah) > anuggah/ gaha/ gaṇhāti, anuggaṇhāti, paggaṇhāti
Pari √bham (bhram) > paribbham/ bhamati, paribbhamati, vibbhamati
Abhi + pa (pra) √sad + na > abhippasanna, pasīdati, pasanna, abhippasīdati,
abhippasanna

Vr > vv > bb; nir + vāna > nibbāna

Vy > by; vyākaraṇa > byākaraṇā
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 137

- Compounds (6 kinds)
(1) descriptive determinative compounds (kammadhāraya samāsa)
(2) dependent determinative compounds (tappurisa samāsa)
(3) copulative or aggregative compounds (dvanda samāsa)
(4) possessive compounds (bahubbīhi samāsa)

(5) numeral (descriptive determinative) compounds (digu samāsa)

(6) governing or adverbial compounds (abyayībhāva samāsa)

28 April 2023
Nāma ~ noun, adjectives

Y
Sabbanāma ~ pronoun
Samāsanāma ~ compound noun ~ Noun + Noun
Taddhitanāma ~ secondary derivative noun ~ Noun + Suffix

(1)
SR Kitanāma ~ primary derivative noun ~ √root + suffix

Compound (samāsa) < N + N

Descriptive Determinative Compound (kammadhāraya)
1st member → 2nd member
.I
The first member describes and determinates the second one
(i) 1st member + 2nd member [para. 137]
Adj. Noun
Before compounding after compouding
EN

E.g., setaṁ uppalaṁ > setuppalaṁ {seta-uppalaṁ}

White lotus white lotus
Mahanto puriso > mahāpuriso {mahat > mahā}
A great man

(ii) 1st member + 2nd member [138]

V

Noun Noun
Before compounding After compounding
E.g., ānando thero > ānandatthero
The elderly monk Ānanda
Sumedho tāpaso > sumedhatāpaso
The ascetic Sumedha

(iii) 1st member + 2nd member (change word-order) [139]

Noun (simile) {viya/ iva} Noun
Before Compounding After Compounding
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 138

E.g., osadhaṁ viya dhammo > dhammosadhaṁ

The Dhamma like a medicine/ the Dhamma like a medicine
Sīho viya muni > munisīho
A sage like a lion

(iv) 1st Member + 2nd Member [140]

Negative Particle Na (> a/ an) Noun/ Adj.
Before Compounding After Compounding
E.g., na karaṇaṁ > akaraṇaṁ {na > a + k}
Not doing
Na āgamo > anāgamo {na > an + ā}
Not coming

Y
Na kataṁ > akataṁ
Not done
Na katvā > akatvā

(v)
SR Having not done
Pāpaṁ kammaṁ akataṁ ~ evil deed is not done.
1st Member + 2nd Member [143]
Noun (iti, hutvā, saṅkhāta ~ being/ of) Noun
Before Compounding After Compounding
.I
E.g., aniccā iti saññā > aniccasaññā
Perception being impermanence ~
perception of impermanence
EN

Ārammaṇaṁ hutvā paccayo > ārammaṇapaccayo

The condition/ relation being an object of mind

1 May 2023
(2) Dependent Determinative Compounds (tappurisa) [142]
The first member [with an oblique case] depends on the second one [noun, adj,
V

participle]. [oblique cases; acc. Inst. dat. Abl. gen. Loc.]

e.g., gāmagato [gāmaṁ gato] gone to a village
buddhadesito [buddhena desito] expouded by the Buddha
cīvaradussaṁ [cīvarassa dussaṁ] cloth for a robe
corabhayaṁ [corasmā bhayaṁ] fear from the thief
rājaputto [rañño putto] a son of the king, a prince
vikālabhojanaṁ [vikāle bhojanaṁ] eating at wrong time

gāmāgato [gāmasmā āgato] come from the village

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 139

(3) Copulative or Aggregative Compounds (dvanda samāsa) [144]

Two or more substantives are conjoined by the ‘ca’ (and).
E.g., devā ca manussā ca devamanussā human and non human
SāriputtamoggallānāVen. S and M
cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanabhesajjāni robe, amls, dwelling and
medicine

Cakkhu ca sotaṃ ca cakkhusotaṁ eye and ear

(4) Possessive Compounds (bahubbīhi samāsa) [145]

1st Member + 2nd Member → other person/ thing
E.g., āgatasamaṇo the coming recluse (kammadhāraya)

Y
Āgatasamaṇoa place where the recluses come/ a monastery (bahubbīhi)
Katapāpaṁ evil deed that is done (kammadhāraya)
Katapāpo One by whom evil deed is done/ one who has done evil deed

SR
(bahubbīhi)

Buddhena desito dhammo

Buddhadesito dhammo
Buddhadestadhammo
.I
Ahaṁ hiyyo katapāpaṁ passiṁ.
Bhavantu antarāyā
EN

Khudda anukhudda
Dhamma anudhamma

3 May 2023

(1) setuppalaṁ (Nt.) ~ the white lotus [kammadhāraya]

V

Setuppalā (F.) → pokkharaṇī ~ a pond having white lotus [bahubbīhi]

(2) cīvaradussaṁ (Nt.) ~ cloth for monk’s robe [tappurisa]
Cīvaradusso (Masc.) → bhikkhu ~ a monk having cloth for robe [bahubbīhi]
(3) pattacīvaraṁ (Nt.) ~ bowl and robe [dvanda]
Pattacīvaro (Masc.) → bhikkhu ~ a monk having bowl and robe

Sukhitā + attā > sukhitattā (masc.) ~ a happy mind [kammadhāraya]

Sabbasattā bhavantu sukhitattā ~ may all beings be happy minded
Sukhitattā (masc. Pl. nom.) → sabbasattā ~ all beings having happy mind. [bahubbīhi]
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 140

Bilaṁ iti āsayo > bilāsayo ~ a hole that is a dwelling place. [kammadhāraya]
Bilāsayo → migo ~ an animal having a hole as its dwelling place/ whose a dwelling
place is a hole. [bahubbīhi]

Na + kiñcanaṁ > akiñcanaṁ ~ not anythin ~ nothing [kammadhāraya]

Akiñcanaṁ → jhānaṁ ~ the jhāna having nothingness (as its object) [bahūbbīhi]

Possessive compound + ka
Bahū nadīyo bahunadiyo ~ many rivers [kammadhāraya]
bahunadī + ka > bahunadiko → padeso ~ a region having many rivers. [bahubbīhi]

Saha vitakkena savitakkaṁ → pathamaṁ jhānaṁ ~ (1st jhāna) being with vitakka

Y
Saha devehi sadevako ~ being together with deities.

SR
Inf. tuṃ + kāmo [-ṁ is dropped] > -tukāmo ~ wishing to
Gantuṁ kāmo gantukāmo ~ wishing to go
Desetuṁ kāmo desetukāmo ~ wishing to expound
Dātuṁ kāmo dātukāmo ~ wishing to offer
.I
05 May 2023

√bhū (to be) + ya (what should) {ū > o > av} bhavya > bhabba (what should be) ~ able
√pūr (to fill, to be full) + na > pūrna {n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ} > puṇṇa
EN

na > an + aṅgaṇa
suci + gavesin
vāla + agga > vālagga + matta
ati √i + ta {i + i > ī} > atīta
pati + ud + √pad + na {i > y, ty > cc, dp > pp, dn > nn} paccuppanna
na > an + ā + √gam + ta > anāgata
V

√pac (to cook) + a + ti > pacati ~ he cooks

√pac (to digest) + ya > pacca + ti > paccati ~ it is cooked, it digests.
√pac + e > pāce + ti > pāceti
pati + ā + √khā (khyā) + ti {i > y, ty > cc, ā > a, khy > kkh} > paccakkhāti
√jar > jīr + a + ti > jīrati/ jarati
√kṛ > √kar
√dṛś > √dis
√pṛ > √pūr
√jṛ > √jar/ jīr
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 141

ṛ > a, i, u, ar, ir/īr, ur/ūr, ra

√dis (to see)
√pas (to see) (skt) + ya + ti > pasyati

a √dṛś (dras > ddas)+ aṁsu > addasaṁsu

abhi + nir √vidh + ya + ti {rv > vv > bb, dhy > jjh} > abhinibbijjhati

pa √bhū > bho > ho + ti > pahoti

ava √har + a + ti > oharati/ ohāreti
pa √v(r)aj (vṛj) + a + ti {vr > vv > bb} > pabbajati
ni √vas + e + ti > nivāseti

Y
ni + vāsa + e + ti > nivāseti
√is > icch + a + ti > icchati
√is + ta {st > ṭṭh} > iṭṭha

SR
√gam > gacch
√yam > yacch
√is > icch

√bhū + ta > bhūta

.I
√brū + ta > brūta
ā √vatt + ta > āvatta
ā √tap + ta {pt > tt} > ātatta
pari √tap + ta > paritatta
EN

ud √pad + ya + ti > uppajjati ~ is born

Loke uppajjati
upa √pad + ya + ti > upapajjati ~ is born in
Saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati
V

08 May 2023
Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. Sattā pathavīdhātuyā sārajjanti. S II 172.
Loc. + sārajjanti
Beings are attached to the earth element.

2. Kāsu puṇṇā aṅgārānaṁ. M II 74.

Gen. + puṇṇa
The pit is full of charcoal.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 142

3. Yāgu khudaṁ hanti, pipāsaṁ vinodheti, vātaṁ anulometi, vatthiṁ sodheti,

āmāvasesaṁ pāceti. A III 250.
Āma + avasesaṁ
Gruel checks hunger, keeps off thirst, regulates inner air, cleanses the bladder,
and digests remnants of undigested food.

4. Bhabbāva te kukkuṭapotakā pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā

aṇḍakosaṁ padāletvā sotthinā abhinibbijjhituṁ. M I 357.
Bhabba + Dat./ Inf.
Sotthi (N.) + Inst. > sotthinā (adv.)
Gantvā kiṇituṁ icchāmi ~ I wish to go and buy

Y
Those chicks are surely able to break open the shell of the egg with their nail-tips
of feet or their beaks and break forth safely.

SR
5. Pahoti nu kho so puriso yāvatakā imissā nālandāya pāṇā (santi) te ekena
muhuttena ekamaṁsakhalaṁ ekamaṁsapuñjaṁ kātuṁ? M I 377.
Pahoti (originates from) + Gen.
Pahoti (is able to) + Inf.
Verb + nu kho starts the sentence to make a quesftion.
.I
Yāvatakā imissā nālandāya pāṇā (santi,) te
Is that man able to make whatever beings from Nālandā city into a single mass of
flesh, a single heap of flesh within short time.
10 May 2023
EN

6. Icchāmahaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā

anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ. M II 56.
pa √v(r)aj + a + ti ~ to go forth
Pabbajati ~ becomes a religious person.
Agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati ~ goes forth from homelife to homeless
life.
V

I wish to shave hair and beard, dress the yellow robes, and go forth from
homelife into homeless state.

7. Abhabbo kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hināyāvattituṁ. M II

61.
hīnāya + āvattituṁ
Raṭṭhpāla, a son of a good family, is not able to reject the training and return “the
low”.

8. So attānaṁ sukhakāmaṁ dukkhapaṭikūlaṁ ātāpeti paritāpeti. M I 341.

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 143

Adj. + Acc.sl. > adv.

Sukhakāma > sukhakāmaṁ
Dukkhapaṭikūla > dukkhapaṭikūlaṁ
He, longing for comfort, recoiling from discomfort, morifies and torments
himself.

9. Attāpi maṁ upavadeyya pāṇātipātapaccayā. M I 361.

Noun + paccaya (cause) + Abl. -ā ~ because of N
Even (my) conscience would blame me because of killing living being.

10. Atha kho ānanda kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pubbaṇhasamayaṁ

nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena kikissa kāsirañño nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami.

Y
M II 50.
Yena + N (nom.) + tena ~ there where N is
Then Ānanda, the Blessed One Kassapa, the Worthy One, the Self Fully

SR
Enlightened One, dressed oneself in the morning, took alms-bowl and robe, and
approached there where the palace of Kikī, a king of Kāsi, was.

11. Sumedhaṁ bhagavantaṁ, lokajeṭṭhaṁ narāsabhaṁ.

vūpakaṭṭhaṁ viharantaṁ addasaṁ lokanāyakaṁ. Ap 423.
.I
a √dṛś > dras > ddas + aṁ > addasaṁ ~ I saw
I saw the Blessed One Sumedha, highest in the world, lord of men,
dwelling in seclusion, leader of the world.
EN

12. Mā vo khaṇaṁ virādhetha, khaṇātītā hi socare. Ap 583.

Vi √rādh + e + tha
Khaṇaṁ + atītā
Ati √i + ta > atīta ~ gone beyond
Socare = socanti
Don’t miss the moment, beings who have gone beyond the moment grieve.
V

12 May 2023
13. Acarī vatāyaṁ vitudaṁ, vanāni kaṭṭhaṅgarukkhesu asārakesu,
Athāsadā khadiraṁ jātasāraṁ, yatthabbhidā garuḷo uttamaṅgaṁ.
J 210.
a √car + i > acari > acarī ~moved about
atha + āsadā
ā √sad + ā > āsadā ~ pecked, knocked against
yattha + abbhidā
a √bhid + ā > abhidā > abbhidā ~ broke
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 144

Ayaṁ (garuḷo) vanāni vitudaṁ kaṭṭhaṅgarukkhesu asārakesu acarī.

Atha jātasāraṁ khadiraṁ āsadā, yattha garuḷo uttamaṅgaṁ abbhidā.
This woodpecker, pecking trees, wandered among useless and rotten trees.
Then this bird pecked the pithful acacia tree, there (where) this bird got its head
broken.

14. Evaṁ gacchante kāle bodhisatto ekadivasaṁ pātova rathavaramāruyha

uyyānakīḷaṁ gacchanto rukkhaggatiṇagga- sākhaggamakaṭakasuttajālādīsu lagge
ussāvabindū disvā “samma sārathi, kinnāmetan”ti pucchitvā, “etaṁ deva,
himasamaye patanaka- ussāvabindu nāmā”ti sutvā divasabhāgaṁ uyyāne kīḷitvā
sāyaṇhakāle paccāgacchanto te adisvā “samma sārathi, kahaṁ te ussāvabindū?

Y
Na te passāmī”ti pucchi. “Deva, te suriye uggacchante sabbeva chijjitvā
pathaviyaṁ patantī”ti sārathi āha. J IV 120.

SR-
-
Evaṁ gacchante kāle ~ thus when the time went on,
bodhisatto ekadivasaṁ pātova rathavaramāruyha {rathavaraṁ āruyha} ~
one day bodhisattva early morning got on the royal chariot,
- uyyānakīḷaṁ gacchanto rukkhaggatiṇaggasākhagga makaṭakasuttajālādīsu
lagge ussāvabindū disvā ~ while going to sport in the park, saw dewdrops
.I
hanging on the top of trees, on the top of grass, on the top of branches, on
threads of spiders and so on,
- “samma sārathi, kinnāmetan”ti pucchitvā, ~ asked “friend charioteer, what
are they called?” [kiṁ nāma etaṁ]
EN

- “etaṁ deva, himasamaye patanakaussāvabindu nāmā”ti sutvā ~ heard

“King, this is dewdrop falling in the winter season”
- divasabhāgaṁ uyyāne kīḷitvā ~ sported in the park for the day part
- sāyaṇhakāle paccāgacchanto te adisvā ~ while coming back in the
evening, did not see them and
- “samma sārathi, kahaṁ te ussāvabindū? Na te passāmī”ti pucchi. ~ asked
V

“Friend charioteer, where are those dewdrops?”

“Deva, te suriye uggacchante sabbeva chijjitvā pathaviyaṁ patantī”ti sārathi āha.
J IV 120. ~ the charioteer answered “King, when the sun rises up, all of them
melt away and fall down on the ground”.

15 May 2023
15. Rājā puttassa vacanaṁ sutvā, “gaccha bhadde, tava sivikāya nisīditvā pāsādaṁ
yeva abhiruhā”ti āha. Sā tassa vacanaṁ sutvā ṭhātuṁ asakkontī nārīgaṇaparivutā
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 145

gantvā pāsādaṁ āruyha “kā nu kho puttassa pavattī”ti vinicchayaṭhānaṁ olokentī

aṭṭhāsi. J IV 122.
- Rājā puttassa vacanaṁ sutvā, “gaccha bhadde, tava sivikāya nisīditvā
pāsādaṁ yeva abhiruhā”ti āha.
The king heard the son’s speech and said “Go, lady, sit in your litter and
go up to the palace”.
- Sā tassa vacanaṁ sutvā ṭhātuṁ asakkontī nārīgaṇaparivutā gantvā
pāsādaṁ āruyha “kā nu kho puttassa pavattī”ti vinicchayaṭhānaṁ olokentī
aṭṭhāsi.
She heard his speech, being unable to stand, surrounded by her retinue of
women went, climbed up her palace and stood looking at the hall of
judgement (wondering) “what is news about her son?”.

Y
Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi

SR
1. A person who is free from evil stains and seeks after purity sees a fault even tiny
as hair-tips as large as cloud in the sky. J III 309.
Anaṅgaṇo sucigavesī ekapuggalo vālaggamattampi vajjaṁ ākāse abbhamattaṁva
passati.
“anaṅgaṇassa posassa, niccaṃ sucigavesino.
.I
vālaggamattaṃ pāpassa, abbhamattaṃva khāyati.
Thera 652 {khadiravaniyarevatattheragāthā}
To a person who is free from evil stains and always seeking after purity, (an
amount of) evil deed measured by a hair-tip appears like amount measured by a cloud.
EN

{evil deed as tiny as hair-tip appears like as large as cloud in the sky.}
V

17 May 2023
2. For the sake of next life our male and female servants and retainers apply their
life to goodness. J IV 43.
dāsā ca dāsyo anujīvino ca, paricārakā kammakarā ca sabbe.
dhammaṃ caranti paralokahetu, [tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na miyyare.]
J 447 {mahādhammapālajātaka}
Paralokassa atthāya/ hetu [paralokatthāya/ paralokahetu] amhākaṁ dāsā ca
dāsiyo ca paricārakā ca dhammaṁ caranti.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 146

3. Certainly the gaily decked royal chariots (king’s chariots) wear out. Dh 151.
jīranti ve rājarathā sucittā, [atho sarīrampi jaraṃ upeti.
satañca dhammo na jaraṃ upeti, santo have sabbhi pavedayanti.]
Sucittā vata/ hi/ ve rājarathā jīranti.

4. Cowherds, goatherds, and farmers saw the Lord coming from afar, seeing him
they said this to the Lord. Vin IV 108.
addasaṃsu kho gopālakā pasupālakā kassakā pathāvino bhagavantaṃ dūratova
āgacchantaṃ. disvāna bhagavantaṃ etadavocuṃ.
Gopālā ca ajapālā ca kassakā ca dūratova āgataṁ (āgacchantaṁ) bhagavantaṁ
addasaṁsu, (taṁ) disvā (te) bhagavantaṁ etaṁ avocuṁ (etadavocuṁ).
a√brū > o > av + uṁ > abravuṁ

Y
5. The man who has children grieves on account of (his) children. S I 6.
“socati puttehi puttimā, [gomā gohi tatheva socati.

SR
upadhīhi narassa socanā, na hi so socati yo nirūpadhī”ti.]
Puttimā puriso puttehi socati.
Yassa puttā santi, so puriso socati.

6. Then the monks, comrades of venerable Nanda call him by the name ‘hireling’
.I
and also by the name ‘menial’. Ud 23.
atha kho āyasmato nandassa sahāyakā bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ nandaṃ
bhatakavādena ca upakkitakavādena ca samudācaranti.
Atha kho āyasmato nandassa sahāyakā bhikkhū taṁ bhatakoti nāmena ca
EN

upakkitakoti nāmena ca samudācaranti.

7. Monks, a certain person is born into the world for the profit, for the well-being,
for the happiness of gods and men. A I 22.
“ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati [bahujanahitāya
bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya] atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṃ.
V

Ekapuggalo bhikkhavo/ bhikkhave loke uppajjati atthāya hitāya sukhāya

devamanussānaṁ.

8. If, in you, dear sirs, who are gone into the battle, fear or panic or horrification
would arise, look up then at the crest of my banner. S II 219.
‘sace, mārisā, devānaṃ saṅgāmagatānaṃ uppajjeyya bhayaṃ vā chambhitattaṃ
vā lomahaṃso vā, mameva tasmiṃ samaye dhajaggaṃ ullokeyyātha.
Sace mārisā saṅgāmagatānaṁ tumhākaṁ bhayaṁ vā chambhitattaṁ vā
lomahaṁso vā uppajjeyya, tasmiṁ samaye (tumhe) mama dhajaggaṁ ullokeyyātha.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 147

9. The observance which is defiled, the Brahma-faring which is stained are not
producing good results. Dh 312.
[yaṃ kiñci sithilaṃ kammaṃ,] saṃkiliṭṭhañca yaṃ vataṃ.
saṅkassaraṃ brahmacariyaṃ, na taṃ hoti mahapphalaṃ.
Saṁkiliṭṭhaṁ vā vataṁ saṅkassaraṁ vā brahmacariyaṁ mahapphalāni na janeti.

10. Whosoever has no attachment to the past, future, and present, possessing
nothing, him do I call a Brahmin. Dh 421.
yassa pure ca pacchā ca, majjhe ca natthi kiñcanaṃ.
akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ, tamahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ.
Yassa atīte ca anāgate ca paccuppanne ca rāgo natthi, yo kiñci apariggaṇhāti, taṁ
ahaṁ brahmaṇaṁ brūmi.

Y
Kaṁ/ kiṁ ~ whom/ what?
Kaṁ/ kiṁ + ci > kañci/ kiñci ~ something/ anything
kaṁ/ kiṁ + cana > kañcana/ kiñcana ~ something/ anything

SR
Lesson 30
Numerals
- Cardinal numbers
19 May 2023

- Ordinal numbers
.I
- Declansion of Numerals
- Numeral Adverbs
- Numeral Compounds
EN

Cardinals Ordinals

1-9 10-1,000,000 Intermediate Cardinal +

Numbers 11 to 19 - tiya, tha, ma,
21-29 etc., 200 -900 tama

1 = eka 10 = dasa 11 = ekādasa 1st. = pathama*

V

{eka + dasa}
[1 + 10 = 11]

2 = dvi 20 = vīsati, vīsā, 12 = dvādasa, bārasa 2nd. = dutiya

(vīsaṁ, vīsa) {dvi + dasa}[2 + 10 ] {dvi + tiya}

3 = ti 30 = tiṃsati, tiṁsā 13 = terasa {ti + dasa} 3rd. = tatiya

{ti + tiya}

4 = catu(r) 40 = cattālīsati, 14 = catuddasa, 4th. = catuttha

cattālīsā cuddasa {catur + tha}
{catur + dasa/
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 148

c(at)uddasa}

5 = pañca 50 = paṇṇāsa, paññāsa 15 = pannarasa 5th. = pañcama

{pañca + dasa} {pañca + ma}

6 = cha 60 = saṭṭhi 16 = soḷasa 6th. = chaṭṭha

(saṣ) {saṣ > so + dasa} {chaṣ + tha}

7 = satta 70 = sattati 17 = sattarasa 7th. = sattama

{satta + dasa}

8 = aṭṭha 80 = asīti 18 = aṭṭhārasa 8th. = aṭṭhama

{aṭṭha + dasa}

Y
9 = nava 90 = navuti 19 = ekūnavīsati 9th. = navama
{eka + ūna (-) + vīsati}

100 = sata 21 = ekavīsa 10th. = dasama

SR 1000 = sahassa
{eka + vīsa}

121 = ekavīsasata
{eka + vīsa + sata}
{1 + 20 + 100}
11th. =
ekādasa(ma)

100,000 = 200 = dvisata 50th. =

.I
sata-sahassa, lakkha {2 x 100 = 200} paññāsatama

1,000,000 = 5000 = pañcasahassa

dasa-sata-sahassa, {5 x 1000 = 5000}
EN

dasa-lakkha
{10 x 100 x 1000 =}

Pañcādhikena sahassaṁ = pañcādhikasahassa = 1005

pañca
V

Aṭṭhavīsaṁ ca
Dvādasañca sahassake
Pañcasatasahassāni sambuddhe

Cha(ṣ) + vīsati {ṣv > bb}

Cha + abhiññā > chaḷabhiññā
Cha (saṣ > saḷ)+ āyatanāni > chaḷāyatanāni/ saḷāyanaṁ

cha(s) + t(r)iṁsa > [chaṭṭhiṁsa] chatriṁsa > chattiṁsa

ti (tri)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 149

cha
d of dasa > r, ḷ
22 May 2023
Declansion of Numerals
Eka ~ sl. (one) pl. (some)

N.B., Eka is declined like a ‘aññā’

Masc. eka
Sl. Pl.
Nom. eko eke
Acc. ekaṁ eke

Y
Inst. ekena ekebhi, ekehi
Abl. ekasmā, ekamhā ekebhi, ekehi
Dat. gen. ekassa ekesaṁ, ekesānaṁ
Loc.
SR ekasmiṁ, ekamhi, eke

Sl.
Neut. eka
ekesu

pl.
Nom. ekaṁ eke, ekāni
.I
Acc. ekaṁ eke, ekāni

Fem. ekā
Sl. pl.
EN

Nom. ekā ekā, ekāyo

Acc. ekaṁ ekā, ekāyo
Inst. abl. ekāya ekābhi, ekāhi
Dat. gen. ekāya, ekissā ekāsaṁ, ekāsānaṁ
Loc. ekāya, ekāyaṁ ekāsu
ekissaṁ
V

eka (masc.) → eka + ā > ekā (fem.)

Dat. gen. ekassa > ekissa + ā > ekissā (fem.)
Loc. ekissa + aṁ > ekissaṁ

Dvi (2) - aṭṭhārasa (18) only plural forms,

Ti (3) and catur (4) different forms in 3 genders,
but the rest are the same forms in 3 genders.

Dvi
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 150

Pl.
Nom. Acc. dve {like ‘ye, te, sabbe’}
Inst. Abl. dvībhi, dvīhi
Dat. Gen. dvinnaṁ
Loc. dvīsu

Pañca (5) up to aṭṭhārasa (18)

Pl.
Nom. Acc. pañca
Inst. Abl. pañcabhi, pañcahi {unlike ‘yebhi, tebhi’}

Y
Dat. Gen. pañcannaṁ
Loc. pañcasu

SRTi (3)
Masc.
Pl.
Neut.
pl.
Fem.
Pl.
Nom. Acc. tayo (purisā, -e) tīṇi (phalāni) tisso (itthiyo)
.I
Inst. Abl. tībhi, tīhi tībhi, tīhi tībhi, tīhi
Dat. Gen. tiṇṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ, tissannaṁ
tiṇṇannaṁ tiṇṇannaṁ
Loc. tīsu tīsu tīsu
EN

t(r)i + naṁ > ṇaṁ > tīṇaṁ {īṇ > iṇṇ} > tiṇṇaṁ
Tiṇṇaṁ > tiṇṇa + naṁ > tiṇṇannaṁ
tiss(ā) + naṁ > tissannaṁ?

catu(r) (4)
V

Masc. Neut. Fem.

Pl. pl. Pl.
Nom. Acc. cattāro (purisā, -e) cattāri (saccāni) catasso (itthiyo)
Inst. Abl. catūbhi, catūhi catūbhi, catūhi catūbhi, catūhi
catubbhi
Dat. Gen. catunnaṁ catunnaṁ catassannaṁ
Loc. catūsu catūsu catūsu

Catur + bhi {rbh > bbh} > catubbhi

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 151

Catur + naṁ {rn > nn} > catunnaṁ

Catasso > catass(ā) + naṁ > catassannaṁ
24 May 2023
Remark
- Eka (1) ~ 3 genders, 2 numbers, Dvi (2) to Aṭṭhārasa (18)~ 3 genders, Plural only
{adjectives}
- (20) Vīsati, vīsā, vīsaṁ, vīsa
- -ti, -ā ~ fem. singular
- -aṁ (nom., acc.)
- -a ~ uninflected
- sata & sahassa ~ Neut. gender, 2 numbers

Y
Numeral Adverbs
- Numeral + suffix > numeral adverb
- -dhā (in/ by way or part)

SR -
ekadhā ~ in one way/ by one way
dvidhā ~ in two ways/ parts, by two ways/ parts

-so (- by -)
ekaso ~ one by one
.I
pañcaso ~ five by five
sattaso ~ seven by seven

- kkhattuṁ (times)
EN

ekakkhattuṁ ~ one time

dvikkhattuṁ ~ two times

Numeral Compounds
Numeral → Noun > Numeral Compound
(Digu Samāsa/ descriptive determinative compound)
V

Tayo purisā gacchanti ~ three people go.

Tipurisā gacchanti ~ three people go.

Verbal root as last member in Tappurisa

(Dependent Determinative Compound.)
(a) √root in consonant takes -a
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 152

Kammaṁ karoti ~ he does the work. → one who does the work, worker
Karoti ~ √kar + (ṇ)a > kara/ kāra (never used alone)
Kammakara ~ a worker
Dīpaṁ karoti ~ he sets light.
dīpa(ṁ > ṅ)kara > dīpaṅkara ~ a lightener
Kumbhaṁ karoti ~ he produces a pot.
kumbhakāra ~ a potter

(b) The roots in -i, -ī, -u, -ū remain unchanged.

Māraṁ jināti {√ji} ~ he conquers Māra.
Māraji ~ a conqueror of Māra
Senaṁ nayati {√nī} ~ he leads an army.

Y
Senānī ~ a general of army
Sayaṁ bhavati {√bhū}~ he becomes by himself.
Sayambhū ~ self enlightened one.

SR
(c) Roots in -ā becomes short.
Majjaṁ pivati (√pā) ~ he drinks liquor.
Majjapa ~ a drinker
.I
N.B., sabbaṁ jānāti (√jñā) ~ he knows every thing.
Sabbaññū ~ the omniscient one
EN

(d) root in -n/ -m (n/m is dropped)

Kammena jāyati (√jan) ~ is born by kamma
Kammaja ~ kamma-born (matter)
Urena gacchati ~ it goes by chest.
Uraga ~ a snake
V

N.B., pāraṁ gacchati ~ he goes to the other shore.

Pāragū ~ an expert.

21 ~ ekavīsati ~ fem. sl.

22 ~ bāvīsati ~ bāvīsati indriyāni

Bhikkhuniyo sataṁ ~ a hundred nuns

Bhikkhuniyo dve satāni ~ two hundred nuns
26 May 2023
(e) √kām (to wish) + a > kāma ~ who wishes
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 153

√car (to practise) + (ṇ)in > cārin ~ who practises

√kar (to do) + (ṇ)in > kārin ~ who performs
√dis {dṛś > dass} (to see) + (ṇ)in > dassin ~ who sees
√vas (to live) + (ṇ)in > vāsin ~ who lives
Sukhaṁ kāmeti ~ he wishes happiness
Sukhakāma ~ who wishes happiness
Brahmaṁ carati ~ he practises holy life
Brahmacārin ~ who practises holy life
Dhammacārin ~ who practises dhamma
Puññaṁ karoti ~ he performs merit
Puññakārin ~ who performs merit
Pāpakārin ~ evil-doer

Y
Bhayaṁ passati ~ he sees danger
Bhayadassin ~ who sees danger {who realizes danger}
Gāme vasati ~ he lives in the village.

156.
SR Gāmavāsin ~ who lives in the village (villager)
Nagaravāsin ~

Governing or Adverbial Compound (Abyayībhāva Samāsa)

1st Member + 2nd Member
.I
prefix/ indeclinable Noun/adj.
- Used as an adverb
- Always Neuter gender, Acc. sl.
EN

Adhi (within) + atta (self)> ajjhatta > ajjhattaṁ ~ internally

Upa (near) + nagara (city) > upanagara > upanagaraṁ ~ near the city
Yathā (in accordance with) + kamma (kamma) > yathākamma > yathākammaṁ ~
Yathā (as) + bhūta (being) > yathābhūta > yathābhūtaṁ ~ as it is, as they are.
Pati + aha (day) > paccaha > paccahaṁ ~ daily
Yāva (as long as/ as far as) + jīva (life) > yāvajīva > yāvajīvaṁ ~ as long as one
V

lives.
Yāva (as much as) + attha (need) > yāva(d)attha > yāvadatthaṁ ~ as much as one
needs.
Anu (according to) + rūpa (form) > anurūpa > anurūpaṁ ~ according to form/
suitably

157. Syntax = the usage of the word with the case-ending

Yāva (ind.)( used as a (1) preposition/ (2) conjunction)
(1) Used “yāva” as a preposition
Yāva ~ as long as, up to, as far as, until,
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 154

In connection with “yāva(d)” + N ~ acc./ abl.

E.g., Yāva temāsaṁ (acc. sl.) ~ as long as three months
Yāva brahmalokā (abl. sl.) ~ as far as/ up to the Brahma world
Yāva kesaggaṁ (acc. sl.) ~ up to the tip of hair

158. (2) Used “yāva” as a conjuntion

Yāva + sentence, tāva + sentence
E.g., yāva ayaṁ puriso pāniyaṁ pivissati, ~Until this man will drink water,
tāva ayyo āgametu! ~ may the gentleman wait

159. “na”, as a filler, is suffixed to gerund ~ -tvā > tvāna

Y
E.g., katvā > katvāna (having done
gantvā > gantvāna (having gone)

SR“se”, as a filler, is suffixed to pp (verb)/ Verb (opt.).

E.g., avihaṁ upapannā(se) ~ they are born into Avihā. (adj. + se)
tasmā evaṁ vadema(se) ~ so let’s say thus. (verb + se)
29 May 2023
.I
160. Sama, sadisa, tulya (similar to, looks like, as) + Noun (inst.)
E.g., buddhena samo ~ similar to the Buddha

162. Phonetic combination

EN

(a) -V + -V {dissimilar} ~ preceding vowel is often dropped, following vowel

becomes long.
E.g., yassa + ete > yassete
Ekassa ca + eko > ekassa ceko
Catūhi + apāyehi > catūhapāyehi
Saṅgāmaji + uttamo > saṅgāmajuttamo
V

Nisīdi + ambavane > nisīdambavane

(b) -a/ā + -a/ā > ā, -i/ī + -i/ī > ī, -u/ū + -u/ū > ū, -e + e- > e, -o + o- > o
E.g., duve + eva > duveva {e + e > e}
Cha ca + abhiṭhānāni > cha cābhiṭhānāni {a + a > ā}
Na + abhavissa > nābhavissa {a + a > ā}

(c) -V + -iti “--” ‘i’ of ‘iti’ is dropped as ‘ti’, preceding short vowel > long.
E.g., pajahatha + iti > pajahathā’ti
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 155

(d) -V + -V (similar) former one is dropped.

E.g., hi + idaṁ > hidaṁ

(e) -V + V- ‘y’ is sometimes inserted between them.

E.g., na + idaṁ > nayidaṁ
Pari + esati > pariyesati
Sa + eva > sayeva
(f)
(g) -V + C- > CC
E.g., a + ñāto > aññāto {√jñā > jj > j/ > ññ > ñ}
Ñāṇā
Paññā

Y
Na + Pamajjati > nappamajjati
Pa (pra > ppa > pa) √mad + ya + ti
Khandha {skandha [sk > kkh > kh]}

SR Nāma + khandha > nāmakkhandha

Khaṇa {kśaṇa [kś > kkh > kh]}
Citta + khaṇa > cittakkhaṇa

Buddhena sadiso sāvako ~ a disciple similar to the Buddha

.I
Sīho viya buddho ~ the Buddha like a lion.

Ahaṁ buddhena sadisaṁ sāvakaṁ passāmi.

Ahaṃ sīhaṁ viya buddhaṁ namāmi.
EN

31 May 2023
Vocabulary
Atthaṅgama < atthaṁ gacchati ~ disappears
Rūpakkhandha < rūpānaṁ khandho
Mahādīpa < mahanto dīpo
Mahāpurisa < mahanto puriso
V

Rūpakalāpa < rūpānaṁ kalāpo

Dānapati < dānassa pati
Gahapati < gehassa pati
Saṅgāmaji < saṅgāme jināti
Cittakkhaṇa < cittassa khaṇaṁ
Ambavana < ambānaṁ vanaṁ
Parisā (f)
Nom. sl. Parisā
Acc. sl. Parisaṁ
Ins. abl. Dat. gen. Sl. parisāya
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 156

Loc. sl. parisāya, parisāyaṁ, parisati < pariṣad (skt) > parisat + i

Sakka > sakkiya > sākiya (adj. m.) + ānī > sākiyānī (adj. f.)
Dhanavant (adj. m.) rich > dhanavant + ī > dhanavantī (adj. f.)
evaṃbhāvī
eva(ṁ)rūpa < evaṁ rūpa
Patirūpa < pati rūpa
Anatta < na > an + atta
Anariya < na > an + ariya
Sve, suve (adv)~ tomorrow
Ajja (adv) ~ today
Hiyyo (adv) ~ yesterday

Y
Ajja + tana > ajjatana (adj.) ajjatanāya (dat.sl.) for today
Sve + tana > svātana (adj.) svātanāya ~ for tomorrow
Hiyya(s) + tana > hiyyattana (adj.) ~ hiyyattanāya ~ for yesterday

SR
Ubha ~ both + to > ubhato ~ from both sides
Ubhatomukha < ubhato mukhaṁ
√bhū ~ to be
√bhū > bho > bhav + ya > bhavya > bhabba ~ who should be ~ able
Na > a + bhabba > abhabba ~ not able
.I
Paṭi + ā +√i > e + ti {i > y, ṭy > cc} > pacceti
Paṭi + ā √i + (t)ya > cca > paṭicca
EN

Evarūpa
Patirūpa
Yathārūpa
tathārūpa
anurūpa
V

02 June 2023
√jñā + ta {jñ > ññ > ñ} > ñāta
√jan + ta {an > ā} > jāta
√kar {ar > ā} kā + tuṁ > kātuṁ
Taṇhānaṁ khayam’ajjhagā.
√gam {am > ā} [adhi (a)√gam {i > y, dhy > jjh, am > ā} > ajjhagā]
√dis + ta {st > ṭṭh} > diṭṭha
√bhū + ta > bhūta
√vid + (i)ta > vidita
√kar + ta {r is dropped} > kata
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 157

Sacchikaroti ~ realizes
Sacchi √kar + ta > sacchikata
Saṁ (s)√kar + ta {r is dropped} > saṅ(s)kata {sk > kkh > kh} > saṅkhata
Phassa (N.) + (i)ta > phassita
Vi √bhaj + ta {jt > tt} > vibhatta
Vi + p(r)a √muc + ta {pr > pp, ct > tt} > vippamutta
√labh + ta {bht > ddh} > laddha

Pa √jñā + nā + ti {jñ > jj > j} pajānāti

Pari √muc + ya + ti {cy > cc} > parimuccati
Veda (n. ~ feeling) + iya + ti > vediyati ~ feels, experiences
√vid > ved + (i)ya + ti > vediyati

Y
Nir √mā > mi + nā + ti {rm > mm} > nimmināti
~ nimminā + (i)tvā > nimminitvā
√vad + a + e(yyā)ma > vadema ~ we should say

SR
Pa √jñā + ya + etha (opt. 3rd. Sl. attanopada) ~ would be known, would appear.
Pa √jñā + ya + ti {jñ > ññ} > paññāyati ~ is known, appears
Pa √hā + a + ti {hā > hāhā > jahā} > pajahati
~pa √hā > hī + na > pahīna (pp)
Pari (y)√is > es + a + ti > pariyesati ~ seeks, searches
.I
√is (to wish) > icch + a + ti > icchati ~ wishes, wants
√is (to seek) > es + a + ti > esati ~ seeks, searches
√ḍah (to burn) + a + ti > ḍahati ~ it burns.
√ḍah (to burn) + ya + ti {hy > yh} > ḍayhati ~ it is burnt.
EN

√ji + nā + ti > jināti ~ he conquers.

√ji + a + ti {i > e > ay} > jayati ~ he conquers.
Jayati {aya > e} > jeti ~ he conquers.
√vid + ya + ti {dy > jj} > vijjati ~ exists, there is
√vid + ṁ-a > vinda + ti > vindati ~ he knows, he finds
√vid + e + ti {i > e} > vedeti ~ he feels, he experiences.
V

Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. Yassete honti gattesu, mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇā.
Duveva tassa gatiyo, tatiyā hi na vijjati. Sn 1001.
Yassa gattesu ete mahāpurisalakkhaṇā honti ~ in whose limbs of body there are
those signs of great being.
Duve (dve) eva tassa gatiyo vijjanti. For him there are only two destinies.
Tatiyā (gati) hi na vijjati. Certainly there is no third one.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 158

05 June 2023

2. Sabhaggato vā parisaggato vā ekassa ceko na musā bhaṇeyya. Sn 397.

Sabhaṁ gato > sabhaggato {sabhā + gato} ~ gone to the audience hall
Parisaṁ gato > parisaggato {parisad + gato}~ gone to the assembly
Gone to audience hall or assembly, one should not tell a lie to other.

3. Ye hi keci bhikkhave samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā imāsaṁ dvinnaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ

samudayañca atthaṅgamañca nappajānanti, te na parimuccanti jātiyā jarāya
maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi. M I 65.
Whoever, oh monks, recluses or brahamins do not perfectly know both origin
and cessation (rise and fall) of these two views, they are not fully freed from birth,

Y
aging, death, sorrow, weeping, suffering, grief, despair.
Na te muccanti maccunā, mārabandhanā

SR
4. Catūhapāyehi ca vippamutto, cha cābhiṭṭhānāni abhabbo kātuṁ. Sn 231.
He is fully free from four states of misery and impossible to commit six major
evil deeds.

5. Ahaṁ hi kho bho gotama dāyako dānapati, dhammena bhoge pariyesāmi.

.I
Dhammena bhoge pariyesitvā dhammaladdhehi bhogehi ekassapi dadāmi,
dvinnampi dadāmi, tiṇṇampi dadāmi, catunnampi dadāmi, pañcannampi dadāmi,
channampi dadāmi, sattannampi dadāmi, aṭṭhannampi dadāmi, navannampi
dadāmi, dasannampi dadāmi, vīsatiyāpi dadāmi, tiṁsāyapi dadāmi, cattārīsāyapi
EN

dadāmi, paññāsāyapi dadāmi, satassapi dadāmi, bhiyyopi dadāmi. Sn 487.

Oh Gotama, I am generous and bountiful. I seek wealth rightly. Having sought
wealth rightly, from wealth which has been obtained rightly I give even to a single
person, to two, to three, to four, to five, to six, to seven, to eight, to nine, to ten, to
twenty, to thirty, to forty, to fifty, to a hundred, even to more.
V

6. Yo sahassaṁ sahassena, saṅgāme mānuse jine.

Ekaṁ ca jeyya attānaṁ, sa ve saṅgāmajuttamo. Dh 103.
- Yo saṅgāme sahassena (guṇitaṁ) sahassaṁ mānuse jine (jineyya) ~ one
would conquer a thousand men thousand times in a battle.
Yo ekaṁ attānaṁ Jeyya ~ but one would conquer a single one, himself.
Sa (so) ve saṅgāmajuttamo {saṅgāmaji + uttamo} ~ the latter one is the best of
battle-conquerors. {better to conquer oneself would than to conquer others be.}

7. Māse māse sahassena, yo yajetha sataṁ samaṁ.

Ekañca bhāvitattānaṁ, muhuttamapi pūjaye.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 159

Sā yeva pūjanā seyyā, yaṁ ce vassasataṁ hutaṁ. Dh 106.

- Yo māse māse sahassena sataṁ samaṁ yajetha, ~ one would equally
sacrifice spending a thousand for a hundred years month after month.
- Bhāvitattānaṁ Ekaṁ ca muhuttaṁ api Pūjaye, ~ but one would pay
homage for a while to a person who has developed himself.
- Sā yeva pūjanā, yaṁ ce vassasataṁ hutaṁ (tato) seyyā. ~ only that
homage is better than that what has been sacrificed for a hundred years.

07 June 2023

Y
8. Sahassakkhattuṁ attānaṁ, nimminitvāna panthako.
Nisīdambavane ramme, yāva kālappavedanā. Dh II 248.
Nisīdi + ambavane

SR
Panthako attānaṁ sahassakkhattuṁ nimminitvāna ramme ambavane nisīdi yāva
kālappavedanā.
Panthaka created himself thousandfold and sat in a pleasurable mango-grove
until the announcement of the time.
.I
9. Yassa muhuttena sahassadhā loko saṁvidito, sa brahma-kappo. Th I 909.
- Subj. (nom.) + obj. (acc.) Active verb
E.g., Buddho dhammaṁ deseti.
- Subj. (inst/gen.) + obj. (nom.) Passive verb
EN

E.g., Buddhena/ Buddhassa dhammo desiyati/ desito.

He, by whom the world is known {who has known the world} in thousand ways
in a moment, is like a brahmā god (resembles a brahma).

10. Tasmā evaṁ vademase, jinaṁ vandatha gotamaṁ.

Jinaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ. D Āṭānātiya sutta.
V

- Tasmā evaṁ vademase. ~ therefore, we should say thus.

- Jinaṁ gotamaṁ vandatha. ~pay homage to the Conqueror, Gotama.
- Jinaṁ gotamaṁ vandāma. ~ Let’s pay homage to the Conqueror, Gotama.

11. Bhante, ubhato-mukhaṁ assaṁ addasaṁ, tassa dvīsu passesu yavasaṁ denti. So
dvīhi mukhehi khādati. Ayaṁ me pañcamo supino. J I 338.
The Lord, I saw the horse with mouths on both sides. They gave grass to it
(horse) on both sides. It (horse) ate by both mouths. This is my fifth dream.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 160

12. Ajjhosānaṁ paṭicca pariggaho. Ajjhosānañca hi ānanda nābhavissa, api nu kho

pariggaho paññāyetha? D II 60.
There arises grasping on account of attachment. Ānanda, would there not be
attachment, could grasping appear?

13. No cetaṁ bhikkhave sakkā abhavissa akusalaṁ pajahituṁ, nāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi
‘akusalaṁ bhikkhave pajahathā’ti. A I 58.
Oh monks, if this unwholesome deed would not be possible to dispel, I would
not say ‘dispel, oh monks, unwholesome deed’.

14. Mayā cetaṁ anaññātaṁ abhavissa adiṭṭhaṁ aviditaṁ asacchikataṁ aphassitaṁ

paññāya, ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vediyato akusalā dhammā

Y
abhivaḍḍhissanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, evamahaṁ ajānanto ‘evarūpaṁ
dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ pajahathā’ti vadeyyaṁ, api nu me bhikkhave etaṁ paṭirūpaṁ
abhavissa? M I 475.

-
-
-
SRMayā ce etaṁ anaññātaṁ abhavissa,
‘Idhekaccassa…..parihāyantī’ti ajānanto,
Ahaṁ evaṁ ……. Vadeyyaṁ.
- Api nu …… abhavissa?
.I
If this would not be known, seen, understood, realized, comprehended by
means of wisdom by me,
not knowing ‘in the world, to some who have experienced pleasant
feeling unwholesome states will increase, wholesome states decrease’,
EN

if I would say thus ‘dispel such and such unpleasant feeling’,

Oh monks, would that be proper to me?

09 June 2023
15. Atthi bhikkhave ajātaṁ abhūtaṁ akataṁ asaṅkhataṁ. No cetaṁ bhikkhave
abhavissa ajātaṁ abhūtaṁ akataṁ asaṅkhataṁ, na yidha jātassa bhūtassa katassa
V

saṅkhatassa nissaraṇaṁ paññāyetha. Ud 80.

- Atthi…..
- ….. Abhavissa ……,
- Na …… paññāyetha.
- There is, oh monks, a not-born, not-become, not-made, unconditioned.
- If there were not that not-born not-become not-made unconditioned,
- There would not be an escape from born, become, made and conditioned.

16. Rūpaṁ bhikkhave anattā, rūpañca hidaṁ bhikkhave attā abhavissa, na yidaṁ
rūpaṁ ābādhāya saṁvatteyya. Vin I 12.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 161

Body, oh monks, is nonself, if, oh monks, this body were the self, this body
would not lead to disease.

Exercise (B)
Translate into Pāḷi
1. There are five aggregates of existence, of which four are called aggregates of
mental states and the rest the aggregate of materiality.
Pañcakkhandhā (honti), yesaṁ cattāro nāmakkhandhāti vuccanti, avaseso
rūpakkhandhoti ca.

2. Ten beggars were standing at the gate of the guild-master’s house.

Dasa yācakā seṭṭhino gehassa dvāre aṭṭhaṁsu.

Y
3. The earth consists of two parts of which one part is divided into five continents
and the rest is water, which, too, is divided into five oceans.

SR
Mahāpaṭhavī dvīhi bhāgehi samannāgato, yesaṁ eko bhāgo mahādīpavasena
pañcadhā (hoti), itaro ca bhāgo udakaṁ, yampi sāgaravasena sāpañcadhā.

4. The theravāda-dhamma is included in the three piṭakas (baskets), namely,

Sutta-piṭaka, Vinaya-piṭaka, and Abhidhamma-piṭaka.
.I
Theravādadhammo suttapiṭakaṁ vinayapiṭakaṁ abhidhamma- piṭakanti
tipiṭakesu antogadho.

5. The life-span of a unit of matter is as same as that of seventeen thought-moment.

EN

Ekassa rūpakalāpassa āyu sattarasa-cittakkhaṇānaṁ āyuppamāṇena samaṁ hoti.

6. Generally the life-span of a man of today is 100 years. But it is heard that there
are some yogis in Himalaya district who are about 300 years.
Yebhuyyena (sāmaññato) ajjatanānaṁ manussānaṁ āyu vassānaṁ sataṁ hoti.
Api ca himavantappadese ye keci tisatāyukā yogino santi.
V

12 June 2023
7. In that monastery there were 30 persons, 10 monks and 20 novices in those days,
though there are only 15 persons there today, of whom 5 are monks, and 10 are
novices.
Tasmiṁ vihārasmiṁ tadā dasa bhikkhū ca vīsati sāmaṇerā cāti tiṃsa puggalā
ahesuṁ, kiñcāpi idāni tatra pannarasa yeva puggalā honti, yesu pañca bhikkhū ca dasa
sāmaṇerā cāti.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 162

8. Together with Pajāpati Gotamī, about 500 Sakyan ladies went to see the Lord
who was then staying in the city of Vesālī.
Pajāpatiyā gotamiyā saddhiṁ pañcasatamattā sākiyāniyo tadā vesāliyaṁ
viharantaṁ bhagavantaṁ daṭṭhuṁ gacchiṁsu.

9. There are 10 classes in that school, in which there are 100 girls and 200 boys
who study subjects of different variety.
Tissaṁ pāṭhasālāyaṁ dasa seniyo honti, yassaṁ sataṁ kumārikāyo ca dve satāni
kumārā ca honti, ye vividhe visaye sikkhanti.

10. When the house is being burnt with fire, what joy, what laugh, and what music of
them who dwell therein!

Y
Gehe agginā ḍayhamāne tatra viharantānaṁ ko ānando ko hāso kiṁ gītaṁ!
√ḍah + ya {hy > yh} + māna

SR
11. Had this king not killed his father the virtuous person, today itself he would
attain to the fruition of the Stream-winner.
No ce ayaṁ rājā attano pitaraṁ dhammika-rājānaṁ avadhissā, ajjeva so
sotāpattiphalaṁ pāpuṇissā.
.I
12. Had he not been lazy during his young days, he would had been the richest man
in this village.
Sace so daharakāle kusīto nābhavissā, so imasmiṁ gāme dhanavantatamo
abhavissā.
EN

Lesson 31

1) Root + conjugational sign + vt > verb (active)

2) Root / verbal base + causative suffix + vt > causative verb (active)
V

4 kinds of causative suffix

-e, -aya, -āpe, -āpaya [causes to do]
(1) Root + Causative Suffix > causative verbal base + VT
(2) Present Verbal Base + Causative Suffix > causative verbal base + VT
(3) N.B., In causative verb, radical vowel is optionally lengthened, such as -a > ā,
i/ī > e, u/ū > o.

-āpe and -āpaya are added to

(a) Root ending in -ā such as √dā, √hā, √jñā, and so on
E.g., √dā + āpe + ti > dāpeti
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 163

√dā + āpaya + ti > dāpayati

(b) Verbal base ending in -ā such as kiṇā, suṇā, jānā, and so on

E.g., kiṇā + āpe + ti > kiṇāpeti
kiṇā + āpaya + ti > kiṇāpayati

(c) 7th group-verbal base -e/ -aya ~ core/ coraya

E.g., core + āpe + ti > corāpeti
core + āpaya + ti > corāpayati
coraya + āpe + ti > corayāpeti
coraya + āpaya + ti > corayāpayati
d) The other roots and verbal bases take all the four suffixes to form causative verb.

Y
E.g., bhava + e + ti > bhāveti
E.g., √kar + e, aya, āpe, āpaya + ti > kāreti, kārayati, kārāpeti, kārāpayati

SR
√kar + o + ti > karoti ~ he does
14 June 2023

√kar + e/ aya/ āpe/ āpaya > kāre, kāraya, kārāpe, kārāpaya + ti

.I
~ he causes sb to do
√bhu(ṁ)j + a + ti > bhuñjati ~ he eats.
√bhuj + e/ aya/ āpe/ āpaya + ti > bhojeti, bhojayati, bhojāpeti, bhojāpayati
~ he makes/ lets/ causes/ orders sb (to) eat
EN

Bhuñjati ~ bhuñja + e/ aya/ āpe/ āpaya + ti > bhuñjeti, bhuñjayati, bhuñjāpeti,

bhuñjāpayati

√ji (to conquer) + nā + ti > jināti

Caus- jināpeti, jināpayati
V

jāpeti <√hā (to loss) > jā + āpe (to destroy)

√jan (to become) > jā + āpe > jāpe (to produce)
√jñā (to know) > jā + āpe > jāpe (to let sb know)

√nī + a + ti > nayati, neti ~ he leads

ā √nī + āpe > ānāpe + ti > ānāpeti

Adhi √i (to study) + a + ti > ajjhayati ~ he studies

Adhi √i + āpe + ti > ajjhāpeti ~ he causes sb to study/ recite/ chant
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 164

√pī + nā > ṇā + ti > pīṇāti ~ he is satisfied

pīṇā + e > pīṇeti ~ he satisfies sb.

(1) intransitve + causative > transitive (with one obj.)

√si (to lie down/ to sleep) + a + ti > sayati ~ he sleeps.
E.g., putto sayati ~ a child sleeps.

Saya + āpe + ti > sayāpeti

E.g., mātā puttaṁ sayāpeti ~ a mother makes a child (to) sleep.

(2) transitive + causative > ditransitive (with two obj.s)

Y
√pac (to cook) + a + ti > pacati ~ he cooks
E.g., sevako odanaṁ pacati ~ a servant cooks rice.

SR√pac + e + ti > pāceti ~ he causes sb to cook.

E.g., sāmiko sevakaṁ odanaṁ pāceti ~ Master orders a servant to cook rice.

√vand + a + ti > vandati ~ he bows down

Dārako bhagavantaṁ vandati
.I
√vand + āpe + ti > vandāpeti
Suppavāsā taṁ dārakaṁ (dārakena/ dārakassa) bhagavantaṁ vandāpeti.
- Bhagavantaṁ is the obj. Of √vand (root obj.)
EN

- Dārakaṁ is the obj. Of causative suffix (agent obj. ~ acc. Inst. or gen.)

16 June 2023
(1) active verb {root + conjugational sign + vt.}
(2) causative verb {root/ base + causative suffix + vt.}
(3) denominative verb {noun/ adj./ particle + denom. suffix + vt.}
V

Denominative Verb
Denominative suffixes; a, e/ aya, āya, iya (īya), ya
Phassa (contact) + a + ti > phassati ~ he touches.
Sārajja (shyness) + a + ti > sārajjati ~ he is shy.
Āhāra (food) + e/ aya + ti > āhāreti/ āhārayati ~ he eats.
Mutta (urine) + e/ aya + ti > mutteti/ muttayati ~ he urinates.
Sukha (happy) + e/ aya + ti > sukheti/ sukhayati ~ he makes sb happy.

Kiṁ kiṁ/ kina kina > kiṅkina

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 165

Kiṅkina (tinkling sound) + āya + ti > kiṅkināyati ~ it tinkles.

Cit cit > cicciṭa (noise of cit)
Cicciṭa + āya + ti > cicciṭāyati ~ it makes the noise ‘cit cit’.
Kukkucca (remorse) + āya + ti > kukkuccāyati ~ he feels remorse, he doubts.
Ciṅgula (windmill) + āya + ti > ciṅgulāyati ~ it revolves
Cira (long time) + āya + ti > cirāyati ~ it delays.
Piya (dear) + āya + ti > piyāyati ~ he holds dear.

Pabbata (a mountain) + āya + ti ~ pabbatāyati ~ it is strong as a mountain.

Mama (mine) + āya + ti > mamāyati ~ he regards it as his own.

Putta (a child) + iya + ti > puttiyati ~ he wants a child.

Y
Putta + īya + ti > puttīyati ~ he wants a son./ he treats as a son.
Chatta (a parasol) + īya + ti > chattīyati ~ he treats as a parasol.

SR
*Senā (an army) paṭisena (opposition)
*Paṭisenikaroti ~ he makes opposition.

Daḷha (firm) + ya + ti > daḷhayati ~ he makes firm. It becomes strong.

.I
Namas (homage) + ya + ti > namassati ~ he pays homage to.
Kaṇḍu (scratching) + ya + ti > kaṇḍūyati / kaṇḍūvati ~ he scratches.
Hiri + ya + ti > hirīyati
EN

(4) Desiderative Verb (desire to do sth)

Root + desiderative suffix; kha, cha, sa (sa) + ti
(i) first syllable of root becomes double,
In reduplicated syllable,
(ii) aspirate letter > non aspirate, i.e., kh > k and so on
(iii) gutteral <–> palatal consonant, i.e., k<–> c and so on
V

(iv) a > i/ī

(v) m > v

√tij > titij + kha + ti {jkh > kkh} > titikkhati [j > k, ks > kkh*]
√tij > titij + sa + ti {j > k, ks > kkh} > titikkhati
√bhuj (to eat) > bubhuj + kha + ti > bubhukkhati ~ he desires to eat.
√bhuj > bubhuj + sa + ti {j > k, ks > kkh} > bubhukkhati
√ghas (to eat) > ghaghas > gaghas > jaghas > jighas + cha + ti > jighacchati ~ he
wants to eat.
√ghas > jighas + sa + ti {s > c, cs > cch} > jighacchati.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 166

√kit (to cure) kikit > cikit + cha + ti {tch > cch} > cikicchati/ tikicchati
√su (sru) (to listen/ hear) > (susru) sussu + sa + ti > sussusati ~ he wishes to
listen ~ he obeys.
√man (to think) maman > vaman > vīman + sa + ti > vīmansati > vīmaṁsati ~ he
investigates.

Gantuṁ icchāmi

19 June 2023

(5) Intensive Verb

Y
√root (reduplicated) + a/ ya + VT.
√kam (to move) > kamkam {k > c, m > ṅ} > caṅkam + a + ti > caṅkamati ~
walks up and down

SR√lap (to talk) > laplap {ap > ā} + ya > lālapya {py > pp} > lālappa + ti >
lālappati ~ talks incessantly
√cal (to move) > calcal {l > ñ} cañcal + a + ti > cañcalati ~ becomes shaky.

(6) Compound Verb ~ with √kar, √bhū, √dhā

.I
Manasi (in one’s mind) + √kar + o + ti > manasikaroti ~ pays attention to
Sacchi (with one’s eye) + √kar + o + ti > sacchikaroti ~ realizes
[sa + akkhi > acchi > sacchi]
Kabaḷa (lump) + √kar + o + ti > kabaḷīkaroti ~ he lumps
EN

Bahula (many) √kar + o + ti > bahulīkaroti ~ does repeatedly

Uttāna (manifest) √kar + o + ti > uttānīkaroti ~ makes it manifest
pātu(r) (evident) √kar + o + ti > pātukaroti ~ makes it evident
Āvi (evident) √kar + o + ti > āvikaroti ~ makes it evident

Sīta (cool) √bhū + a + ti > sītībhavati ~ becomes cool.

V

Tuṇhī (silent) √bhū + a + ti > tuṇhībhavati ~ becomes silent

Uttāna (manifest) √bhū + a + ti > uttānībhavati ~ becomes manifest
Eka (one) √bhū + a + ti > ekībhavati ~ becomes alone
pātu(r) (evident) √bhū + a + ti > pātubhavati ~ becomes evident
Āvi (evident) √bhū + a + ti > āvibhavati ~ becomes evident

Antara (inner) √dhā + ya + ti ~ antaradhāyati ~ hides, disappears.

Ta (that) + nom. Sl. > so > sa

E.g., sa sīlavā ~ he is virtuous.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 167

Eta (this) + nom. Sl. > eso > esa

E.g., esa dhammo sanantano ~ this state is eternal.

Āha (past. 3rd. sl.) ~ he said

Āhu, āhaṁsu (past. 3rd. pl.) ~ they said

Pāḷ ~ √brū > āh + ā > a > āha

√brū > āh + ū > u > āhu
√brū > āh + aṁsu > āhaṁsu

Skt ~ (a)√ah + ā > a > āha/ āhu/ āhaṁsu

Y
Past participle + √bhū = perfect sense
Gato hoti ~ he has gone.
Gato ahosi ~ he had gone.

SRNisinno hoti ~ he has sat

Tapa + uda > tapoda
Sat + purisa > sappurisa
Mātar + pitar > mātāpitaro (pl.)
Kammaṁ karoti > kammakara
.I
Mahat satta > mahāsatta
Mahat jana > mahājana
Hima + vant > himavant (adj.) ~ snowy
EN

23 June 2023

√su (sru) > susru {sr > ss} + sa + ā > sussusā ~ obedience, obedient
√ghas > jigas + cha + ā {sch > cch} > jigacchā ~ hunger
√pā (to drink) > pipā + sa + ā > pipāsā ~ thirst
V

Purāṇa (old, former) + dutiyaka > dutiyikā (companion, a wife) > purāṇadutiyikā
Dāyaka > dāyikā
Upāsaka > upāsikā

Deva (m.) a king, + ī > devī (f.) a queen

Isi (a seer) + pabbajja (renunciation) > isi (eva/ hutvā/ iti) pabbajjā > isipabbajjā

Santhā (saṁ √ṭhā) + āgāra (home, hall) > santhāgāra

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 168

Pari (around) √vatt (to be) {~ to turn round = exchange} + aka > parivattaka

Dhūma (smoke) + āya + ti > dhūmāyati ~ it smokes

Dhūmāya + (i)ta > dhūmāyita (pp) ~ smoky
Dhūmāyita + tta (state of sth) > dhūmāyitatta (abstr. n.) ~ being smoky

Timira + āya + ti > timirāyati ~ becomes dark

Timirāya + (i)ta > timirāyita ~ becoming dark
Timirāyita + tta > timirāyitatta ~ darkness

√bhū + ya > bhavya {vy > vv> bb} > bhabba ~ able
√hu + ya > havya

Y
Aṅgūli (finger) + patodaka (nudging) {aṅguliyā patodakaṁ}

SR
Ekaṁ cīvaraṁ yassa > ekacīvara (adj.) ~ who has a single robe ~ single-robed

Ekāha + mata {ekāhaṁ matassa assa (siyā) ~ for dead body there would be one day.}

Ud √dh(u)mā + ta > uddhumāta(ka) ~ swollen up

.I
√ram + anīya > ramaṇīya ~ pleasant, beautiful
√yuj + ta > yutta
Evaṁ dhammo yassa > evaṁdhamma (adj.)
EN

Evaṁ bhāvo > evaṁbhāvo ~ such nature

Evaṃbhāva + in > evaṁbhāvin

Ati √i + ta > atīta ~ passed over

Na > an + atīta > anatīta ~ not passed over
Etaṁ + anatīto > etamanatīto ~ not passed over this nature
V

Evaṁ + anatīto > evamanatīto ~ not passed over such nature

Channaṁ vaggiyo > chavaggiyo
Sattarasannaṁ vaggiyo > sattarasavaggiyo

Na > an + usuyyaka > anusuyyaka

Dur √tar + > duttara ~ difficult to get out

Su (very) + duttara > suduttara
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 169

26 June 2023
Pa √vis + a + ti > pavisati
Pa √vis + ta {st > tth} > pavittha
Pa √vis + aya + ti {i > e} > pavesayati
Saṁ + dhūpa + āya + ti > sandhūpāyati
Saṁ + pa + dhūpa + āya + ti > sampadhūpāyati
Pari √si(ṁ > ñ)c + a > parisiñca + ti > parisiñcati ~
Pari √sic + ta {ct > tt} > parisitta
Pati + ud √tar + a + ti {i > y, ty > cc, dt > tt} > paccuttarati
Pubba (former) + āpe + ti > pubbāpeti/ pubbāpayati
Ni √pad + ya + ti {dy > jj} nipajjati ~ lies down

Y
Ni √pad + e + ti {a > ā} > nipādeti
Parā √mas + a + ti > parāmasati
Parā √mas + ta {st > ṭṭh} > parāmaṭṭha

SR
√gah + nā + ti {n > ṇ, hṇ > ṇh} > gaṇhāti
√gah + (i > e)tvā > gahetvā
√bhid + e + ti {i > e} > bhedeti ~ breaks down
Ni √ru(ṁ > n)dh + a > nirundha + ti > nirundhati ~ to be destroyed
Ni √rudh + a {u > o} > nirodha ~ cessation
.I
Nirodha + e + ti > nirodheti ~ ceases
Pa √saṁs + a + ti > pasaṁsati ~ praises
Pa √saṁs + ta {(ṁ)st > tth} > pasattha ~ praised
√chaḍḍ + e + ti > chaḍḍeti ~ throws aside
EN

Upa + saṁ √har + a + ti > upasaṁharati

Paṭi √chād + e + ti {ch > cch} > paṭicchādeti ~ covers
[word + ch- > cch]
Kāma + chando > kāmacchando
Seta + chattaṁ > setacchattaṁ
Rukkha + chāyā > rukkhacchāyā
V

Ā √mant + e + ti > āmanteti

√sudh + ya + ti {dhy > jjh} > sujjhati ~ is purified/ is clean
√sudh + e + ti {u > o} > sodheti ~ causes to be clean

√i > e + ti > eti ~ he goes.

Ā √i > e + ti > eti ~ he comes.
Pari √car + a + ti > paricarati ~
Pari √car + e + ti {a > ā} > paricāreti

Abhi √ruh + a + ti {u > ū} > abhirūhati

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 170

Ā √gam > gacch + i > āgacchi

Ā √gam > gañch + i > āgañchi

Paṭi √pad + ya + ti {dy > jj} > paṭipajjati ~ manages, practises

Paṭi √pad + a + ā > paṭipadā

√mā (to measure) + āpe + ti > māpeti ~ causes to measure, builds

√bhū + a + ti {ū > o > av} bhavati {b is silent, ava > o} > hoti
(a)ho + (s)i > ahosi ~ was

Saṁ + anu √sās + a + ti > samanusāsati

Nāmari {na + amari} amari < (a)√mar + i

Y
√su {sru} > s(r)u(sr)u + sa + ti {sr > ss, u > ū} > sussūsati
Sussūsa + nt > sussūsant

SR
√ram + a + ti > ramati
√ram + ta {m is dropped} > rata

√pat + a + ti > patati ~ falls down

.I
Pata + (i)ta > patita ~ fallen
√pat + e + ti {a > ā} > pāteti ~ causes to fall down

Pāte + (i)ta > pātita ~ caused to fall down

EN

√bhū + ta > bhūta

Bhāveti
Bhāve + (i)ta > bhāvita

√yuj + ya + ti {jy > jj} > yujjati ~ to yoke

V

√yuj + e/ āpe + ti {u > o} yojeti/ yojāpeti ~ causes to yoke

Ud √yā + ti {dy > yy} > uyyāti

28 June 2023
Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. So migavisāṇena piṭṭhiṁ kaṇḍūvamāno santhāgāraṁ pavisati. M I 344.
He scratching (his) back with a deer’s horn enters the council hall.

2. Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā bhikkhunīnaṁ pārivattakaṁ na denti. Vin IV 60.

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 171

Monks being doubtful do not give the exchanged robe to nuns.

3. Tena kho pana samayena dhūmāyitattaṁ timirāyitattaṁ gacchateva. S I 122.

At that time, it becomes smoky and dark. {smokiness and darkness is going on.}

4. So havyaseso udake pakkhitto cicciṭāyati cicciṭāyati sandhūpāyati

sampadhūpāyati. S I 169.
That residual oblation, while thrown away in the water, makes noise as ‘citcit’
and ‘citcit’, makes smoky, and makes smoky heavily.

5. Putto me buddhaseṭṭhassa dhammaṁ suddhaṁ piyāyati. S I 210.

My son holds dear to the pure Dhamma of the greatest Buddha.

Y
6. sussūsā(ya) labhate paññaṁ. S I 214.
One obtains wisdom by desire to listen.

SR
7. Āyasmā samiddhi tapodake gattāni parisiñcitvā paccuttaritvā ekacīvaro (samāno)
aṭṭhāsi gattāni pubbāpayamāno. S I 8.
Venerable Samiddhi bathed in a hot spring, came back out of water, and stood
being single-robed and making the limbs dry.
.I
[parisiñcati ~ sprinkles, gattāni parisiñcati ~ bathes]

8. Abhedi kāyo nirodhi saññā, vedanā sitībhaviṁsu sabbā. Ud 93.

The body broke, perception ceased, all feelings became cool.
EN

9. Vādaṁ hi eke paṭiseniyanti, na te pasaṁsāma parittapaññe. Sn 398.

Certainly some fight the controversial argument, we don’t praise those shallow
headed.

Puriso odanaṁ pacati [ti is parassapada]

V

Puriso odanaṁ pacate. [te is attanopada]

Pubba {former, previous} + āpe + ti > pubbāpeti ~ makes sth as former, makes
sth dry.
Pubbāpe + māna {e > aya} > pubbāpayamāna

Senā {army}~ paṭi + senā + e + ti > paṭiseneti {e > iya} > paṭiseniyati

30 June 2023
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 172

10. Sappuriso kho mahārāja ulāre bhoge labhitvā attānaṁ sukheti pīṇeti, mātāpitaro
sukheti pīṇeti, puttadāre sukheti pīṇeti, dāsakammakaraporise sukheti pīṇeti,
mittāmacce sukheti pīṇeti. S I 90.
A good man, great king, having obtained great wealth makes himself happy and
pleases, makes (his) parent happy and pleases, makes (his) wife and children happy and
pleases, makes servants and workers happy and pleases, makes friends and colleagues
happy and pleases.

11. Puna ca paraṁ bhikkhave bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya

chaḍḍitaṁ ekāhamataṁ vā dvīhamataṁ vā tīhamataṁ vā uddhumātakaṁ
vinīlakaṁ vipubbajātakaṁ, so imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati ‘ayampi kho kāyo
evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī etamanatīto’ti. M I 58.

Y
And further, monks, as if a monk would see the body which was thrown out in a
cemetery, dead for one day, for two days, or for three days, swollen, discoloured, and
festering, he just reflects on his body “this body also has this nature, is becoming thus in

SR
nature, has not passed over this nature”.

12. Tena kho pana samayena āḷavikā bhikkhū navakammaṁ karontā rukkhaṁ
chindantipi chindāpentipi. Vin IV 34.
At that time, āḷavian monks repairing cut down the tree (by themselves) and also
.I
make others cut down the tree.

13. Te bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ sāgataṁ ārāmaṁ netvā yena bhagavā tena sīsaṁ katvā
nipādesuṁ. Vin IV 110.
EN

Those monks led the venerable sāgata to the monastery, directed his head
towards there where the Blessed One was, and made him lie down. {made him lie down
with his head towards the Lord}

14. Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū sattarasavaggiye bhikkhū

aṅgulipatodakena hāsesuṁ. Vin IV 110.
V

At that time, chabbaggiya monks made sattarasavaggiya monks laugh by

nudging with their fingers.

15. Atha kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa pitā mahantaṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇassa puñjaṁ

kārāpetvā kilañjehi paṭicchādāpetvā āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa purāṇadutiyikaṁ
āmantesi. M II 63.
Then the venerable Raṭṭhapāla’s father, made them a great heap of gold and
bullion, made them cover with mats, and called upon the venerable Raṭṭhapāla’s former
wife.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 173

16. Kiṁ bhante thero kārāpeti “pabbhāraṁ mahārāja sodhāpemi”. Vin I 207.
What, honored sir, does the thera ask to do? “Great king, I make the cave clean”.

17. Ehi tvaṁ, raṭṭhapāla, bhuñja ca piva ca paricārehi ca. M II 56.

Come, Raṭṭhapālā, eat, drink, and amuse yourself.

03 July 2023
18. Atha kho ānanda kikī kāsirājā bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṁ
yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bārāṇasiṁ uyyāsi mahatā rājānubhāvena. M II 49.
Then, Ānanda, Kikī, the king of Kāsi country, having many excellent vehicles
harnessed, having got into an excellent vehicle, set off for Bārāṇasī (Benares) with his

Y
great royal glory.

19. Bhagavā tattha āgañchi, sīsaṁ mayhaṁ parāmasi,

SR Bāhāya maṁ gahetvāna, saṅghārāmaṁ pavesayi. Apa 723.

The Blessed One came there, (he) touched my head, holding my arm
allowed me to enter the monastery.

20. Mahāsatto deviyā dhammaṁ desetvā, amacce sannipātetvā “bho amaccā tumhe
.I
rajjaṁ paṭipajjatha, ahaṁ pabbajissāmīti vatvā, mahājanassa rodantassa
paridevantassa uṭṭhāya himavantaṁ gantvā, ramaṇiye padese assamaṁ māpetvā
isipabbajjaṁ pabbajitvā āyupariyosāne brahmalokaparāyaṇo ahosi. J IV 11.
EN

Mahāsatto ~ a great being

deviyā dhammaṁ desetvā, ~ expouded the Dhamma to the queen,
amacce sannipātetvā ~ gathered ministers,
“bho amaccā tumhe rajjaṁ paṭipajjatha, ahaṁ pabbajissāmī”ti vatvā, ~ said “Oh
ministers, you may manage the kingdom, I will renounce”,
mahājanassa rodantassa paridevantassa uṭṭhāya ~ while many people were crying
V

and wailing got up,

himavantaṁ gantvā, ~ went to himalaya,
ramaṇiye padese assamaṁ māpetvā, ~ built a hermitage in a delightful place,
isipabbajjaṁ pabbajitvā, ~ ordained (himself) as an ascetic ordination, and
āyupariyosāne brahmalokaparāyaṇo ahosi. ~ was destined in the brahma world in
the end of his life-span.

21. Te maṁ dhammaguṇe yuttaṁ, sussūsaṁ anusuyyakaṁ

samaṇā samanusāsanti, isidhammaguṇe ratā. J IV 134.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 174

Isidhammaguṇe ratā te samaṇā ~ those recluces who are delighted in the virtues
of seers
Dhammaguṇe yuttaṁ sussūsaṁ anusuyyakaṁ maṁ ~ me who is not envious, but
obedient and endowed with virtues (virtuous),
Samanusāsanti ~ instruct.

05 July 2023

Uyyāsi < ud √yā + (s)i {dy > yy}

(a)√ṭhā {sthā > ṭṭhā} + (s)i > aṭṭhāsi
(a)√dā + (s)i > adāsi
(a)√hā + (s)i > ahāsi

Y
(a)√kar > kā + (s)i > akāsi

22. Anekatāle narake, gambhīre ca suduttare.

SR Pātito giriduggasmiṁ, kena tvaṁ tattha nāmari. J IV 195.

Tvaṁ Anekatāle gambhīre suduttare narake giriduggasmiṁ pātito,
Na + eka > aneka + tāla > anekatāla ~ with many palm trees
Dur √tar + a > duttara, su + duttara > suduttara ~ quite difficult to cross over
Dur √gam > dugga ~ difficult to go = difficult to access
.I
Giri + dugga > giridugga ~ a mountain which is difficult to access
You were dropped into a pit which is many-palm-tree deep and quite difficult to cross
over in a mountain which is difficult to access.
Kena tvaṁ tattha nāmari?
EN

Nāmari <Na + amari < (a)√mar + i

Why did you not pass away there?
Kena < kiṁ > ka + ena

Kena Tvaṁ Anekatāle gambhīre suduttare narake giriduggasmiṁ pātito tattha nāmari?
being dropped into a pit which is many-palm-tree deep and quite difficult to cross over
V

in a mountain which is difficult to access, Why did you not pass away there?
Lesson 32
Verbal Terminations
Parassa Pada ~ Pada for others
Attano Pada ~ Pada for oneself
- Puriso odanaṁ pacati ~ a man cooks rice. (for othere)
- Puriso odanaṁ pacate ~ a man cooks rice. (for himself)
But Now In Pāḷi there is no any distinction at all between them.

Present Tense [Vattamānā Vibhatti]

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 175

Parassa Pada Attano Pada

Person
Singular Plural Singular Plural

3rd ti anti te ante

2nd si tha se vhe

1st mi ma e mhe

Example ~ √vad (to say) + a > vada {active voice}

Y
Parassa Pada Attano Pada
Person Singular Plural Singula Plural

SR 3rd

2nd
vadati

vadasi
vadanti

vadatha
r

vadate

vadase
vadante

vadavhe

1st vadāmi vadāma vade vadāmhe

.I
EN

Future Tense [Bhavissanti Vibhatti]

{(i)ssa + present tense}
V

Parassa Pada Attano Pada

Person
Singular Plural Singular Plural

3rd ssati ssanti ssate ssante

2nd ssasi ssatha ssase ssavhe

1st ssāmi ssāma ssaṁ ssāmhe

Example ~ √vad + a > vada

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 176

Parassa Pada Attano Pada

Person
Singular Plural Singular Plural

3rd vadissti vadissanti vadissate vadissante

2nd vadissasi vadissatha vadissase vadissavhe

1st vadissāmi vadissāma vadissaṁ vadissāmhe

Imperative Mood [Pañcamī Vibhatti]

Y
Parassa Pada Attano Pada
Person
Singular Plural Singular Plural

SR 3rd

2nd

1st
tu

hi

mi
antu

tha

ma
taṁ

ssu

e
antaṁ

vho

āmase
.I
Example ~ √vad + a > vada
EN

Parassa Pada Attano Pada

Person
Singular Plural Singular Plural

3rd vadatu vadantu vadataṁ vadantaṁ

2nd vada, vadāhi vadatha vadassu vadavho

V

1st vadāmi vadāma vade vadāmase

Optative Mood [Sattamī Vibhatti]

Parassa Pada Attano Pada

Person Singular Plural Singula Plural
r

3rd eyya eyyuṁ etha eraṁ

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 177

2nd eyyāsi eyyātha etho eyyāvho

1st eyyāmi eyyāma eyyaṁ eyyāmhe

Example ~ √vad + a > vada

Parassa Pada Attano Pada

Person
Singular Plural Singular Plural

3rd vadeyya vadeyyuṁ vadetha vaderaṁ

2nd vadeyyāsi vadeyyātha vadetho vadeyyāvho

Y
1st vadeyyāmi vadeyyāma vadeyyaṁ vadeyyāmhe

SR
.I
Aorist {Past Definite} [Ajjattanī Vibhatti]

Parassa Pada Attano Pada

Person
EN

Singular Plural Singular Plural

3rd i, ittha uṁ, iṁsu, aṁsu ā ū

2nd o, i (i)ttha (i)se (i)vhaṁ

1st iṁ (i)mhā aṁ (i)mhe

V

Example ~ √vad + a > vada

Parassa Pada Attano Pada

Person
Singular Plural Singular Plural

3rd (a)vadi, (a)vaduṁ, (a)vadā (a)vadū

(a)vadittha (a)vadiṁsu,
(a)vadaṁsu

2nd (a)vado, (a)vadittha (a)vadise (a)vadivhaṁ

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 178

(a)vadi

1st (a)vadiṁ (a)vadimhā (a)vadaṁ (a)vadimhe

07 July 2023
Past Indefinite [Hiyyattanī Vibhatti]

Parassa Pada Attano Pada

Person
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Y
3rd ā ū ttha tthuṁ

2nd o ttha se vhaṁ

SR 1st aṁ, a

Example √vad + a > vada

Person
mhā

Parassa Pada
iṁ mhase

Attano Pada
.I
Singular Plural Singular Plural

3rd (a)vadā (a)vadū (a)vadattha (a)vadatthuṁ

2nd (a)vado (a)vadattha (a)vadase (a)vadavhaṁ

EN

1st (a)vadaṁ, (a)vadamhā (a)vadiṁ (a)vadamhase

(a)vada

Conditional Mood [Kālātipatti Vibhatti]

[(i)ssa + past tense]
V

Parassa Pada Attano Pada

Person
Singular Plural Singular Plural

3rd ssā, ssa ssaṁsu ssatha ssiṁsu

2nd sse ssatha ssase ssavhe

1st ssaṁ ssamhā ssaṁ ssāmhase

Example √vad + a > vada

Parassa Pada Attano Pada
Person
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 179

Singular Plural Singular Plural

3rd (a)vadissā, (a)vadissaṁsu (a)vadissatha (a)vadissiṁsu

(a)vadissa

2nd (a)vadisse (a)vadissatha (a)vadissase (a)vadissavhe

1st (a)vadissaṁ (a)vadissamhā (a)vadissaṁ (a)vadissāmhase

Bodhiyā aṅgaṁ > bojjhaṅgaṁ {bodhi + aṅga} [i > y, dhy > jjh]
Pāda (foot) + ya > pādya {ā > a, dy > jj} > pajja ~ related to feet
Timisa (adj.) {dark} + ika + ā > timisikā (ratti)~ dark night
Na > an + āsava > anāsava ~ free from mental cankers

Y
Siri (glory) + mant > sirimant ~ glorious
√sam + ya + ti > sammati ~ calms down
√sam + ta > santa (pp.) ~ calmed

SR
Na > a + santa > asanta ~ not calmed
Andha + karaṇa > andhakaraṇa

Na > a + piya {priya ~ pr > pp} > appiya

.I
Na > an + Vowel
E.g., na > an + āsava > anāsava

Na > a + Consonant
EN

E.g., na > a + santa > asanta

Saha bandhanena > sabandhanaṁ {< saha >sa + bandhana}

√ram + ya > ramma

Sokena pareto > sokapareto {soka + pareta}

V

Nir √var (vṛ) > vā + ya + ti {rv > vv > bb} > nibbāyati
√kar = √kṛ
√tar = √tṛ
isi = ṛśi
uju = ṛju
Nir √vṛ + ta {vṛ > vu, rv > vv > bb} > nibbuta

Ava √dhā + a + ti {ava > o, dhā > dhādhā > dahā > dah} > odahati
√bhas + ya + ti {sy > ss} > bhassati
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 180

√kar + o + ti > karoti {o (strong)}

√kar > kur + u + te > kurute {u (weak)}

Guru (a teacher) {Pāḷ} = garu (a teacher) {Skt.}

Pa √mad + ā > pamadā

√kup + ya + ti {py > pp} > kuppati

(a) √bhū > uv + ā > ahuvā

Senānī {ī > in}+ o > senānino

Y
Sabbaññū {ū > un} + o > sabbaññuno

√chid + ssati {i > e, dss > ds > cch} > checchati

SR
√cu {cyu > ccu > cu} + a + ti {u > o > av} > cavati
Pari √jar > jī (jṛ) + ya + ti > parijīyati
Saṁ √ghaṭṭ + e/ aya + ti > saṅghaṭṭeti/ saṅghaṭṭayati

10 July 2023
.I
Exercise (A)
Translate into English
1. Bhāvetvāna bojjhaṅge, nibbāyissaṁ anāsavo. Th 162.
Bojjhaṅge bhāvetvāna anāsavo (samāno) (ahaṁ) nibbāyissaṁ.
EN

Having developed the factors of Enlightenment, being free of mental cankers, I

shall enter perfect peace.

2. Tena hi brahmaṇa odahassu sotaṁ.

Well then, brahmin, give ear (to).
V

3. Tassa sokaparetassa, vīṇā kacchā abhassatha. Sn 446.

Sokaparetassa tassa kacchā vīṇā abhassatha.
From the armpit of one who is afflicted with sorrow, the lute dropped down.

4. Otāraṁ nādhigacchissaṁ, sambuddhassa satimato. Sn 446.

I shall not find any fault of the Supreme Enlightened One who is alert.

5. Raṭṭhā raṭṭhaṁ vicarissaṁ, sāvake vinayaṁ puthū. Sn 444.

Sāvake puthū vinayaṁ (vinayanto) raṭṭhā raṭṭhaṁ vicarissaṁ.
Instructing many disciples, I shall wander from country to country.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 181

6. Rāgaṁ vinayetha mānusesu, dibbesu kāmesu cāpi bhikkhu. Sn 361.

A bhikkhu should remove attachment to human and celestial sensualities.

7. Mitte bhajassu kalyāṇe, pantaṁ ca sayanāsanaṁ. Sn 337.

Associate with good friends and resort to remote residence.

8. Yajassu bahu te vittaṁ, yajassu bahu te dhanaṁ. Sn 31.

Offer much your wealth, offer much your property.

9. So lokaṁ bhajate sivaṁ. Sn 114.

He resorts to the blissful world.

Y
10. Asantā’ssa piyā honti, sante na kurute piyaṁ. Sn 93.
Bad ones are dear to him. He does not hold good ones dear.

SR
Abl. + Acc. {from….to…}
Gāmā gāmaṁ
Nagarā nagaraṁ
12 July 2023

Raṭṭhā raṭṭhaṁ
.I
Inst. + Acc. {...by …}
Kālena kālaṁ ~ time to time
Hatthena hatthaṁ ~ hand by hand
EN

Pādena pādaṁ ~ foot by foot

Āhāraṁ āhāreti ~ eats

Vedanaṁ vedeti ~ experiences
Cittaṁ cinteti ~ thinks
V

11. Esa’smākaṁ kule dhammo, āsanaṁ udakaṁ pajjaṁ.

Sabbametaṁ nippadāmase. J III 120.
Nir + pa √dā + ma (se) ~ we provide
Eso asmākaṁ kule dhammo ~
It is the custom to our family that we provide all of these; seat, water, foot-oil {to
a guest}

12. Na te pīṭhaṁ adāsimhā, na pānaṁ nāpi bhojanaṁ.

Brahmacārī khamassu me, etaṁ passāmi accayaṁ. J III 120.
We did not give a chair to you, nor drinking water, nor a meal.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 182

May you, one who lives holy life, forgive me, I see this is (my) fault.

13. Tasmā evaṁ vademase, jinaṁ vandatha gotamaṁ.

Jinaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ. D III 197.
Therefore, we would say thus, you worship the conqueror, Gotama,
Let us worship the Conqueror, Gotama.

14. Ime na kiñci jānanti maññe.

I guess (that) these people do not know anything.

15. Nevābhisajjāmi na vāpi kuppe, na vāpi me appiyamāsi kiñci. J 120.

Kuppe = kuppāmi

Y
Vāpi {vā + api}
Appiyaṁ + āsi {a √as + i} ~ was, occured
I am not angry, nor am I wrathful, and anything disagreeable did not occur to me.

SR
16. Nikkhamassu vanā tuvaṁ. Apa 818.
Nis √kam + a + ssu (imp. 2nd. Sl. attanopada) ~ go away
t(u)vaṁ ~ you
May you go away from the forest.
.I
17. Akaramhase te kiccaṁ, yaṁ balaṁ ahuvā’mhase.
Migarāja namo tyatthu, api kiñci labhāmase. J III 26.
Ahuvā’mhase {ahuvā + amha(ṁ) (se)}
EN

amha(se) = Amha(ṁ) = amhākaṁ

Yassa (gen.) atthi/ hoti ~ who has
Amhaṁ (gen.) ahuvā = we had
Tyatthu {te + atthu}
We did (our) service to you, {whatever strength we had =} as much as we could.
May there be homage to you, king of beast. We may also obtain something.
V

14 July 2023
18. Te andhakaraṇā kāmā, bahudukkhā mahāvisā.
Tesaṁ mūlaṁ gavesissaṁ, checchaṁ rāgaṁ sabandhanaṁ. J III 500.
Gavesissaṁ < gava + √is > es + (i)ssaṁ = ssāmi
Checchaṁ < √chid + ssaṁ {i > e, dss > ds > cch}
Sabandhana = saha bandhanehi
Those sensual pleasures are blinding, with much suffering, and much venomous.
I will seek their root, and cut off lust with its ties.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 183

19. Adhipatati vayo khaṇo tatheva,

Ṭhānaṁ natthi dhuvaṁ cavanti sattā.
Parijīyati addhuvaṁ sarīraṁ,
Udaye mā pamadā carassu dhammaṁ. J IV 111.
Age passes by, similarly moment passes by, there is no firm spot, (all)
beings always pass away, the body decays and is impermanent. Udayā, don’t be
negligent, practise the Dhamma.

20. Gandhārarājassa puramhi ramme, avasimhase takkasīlāya deva.

Tatthandhakāramhi timisikāyaṁ, aṁsena aṁsaṁ samagaṭṭayimha. J IV 98.
Samagaṭṭayimha < saṁ + (a)√ghaṭṭ + e/aya + imha
(mayaṁ) deva, gandhārarājassa puramhi ramme takkasīlāya avasimha(se).

Y
~ King, we lived in Takkasīlā, the delightful city of the king of Gandhāra. There
in the pitch darkness of the night, we struck (by accident) each other shoulder to
shoulder.

SR
Exercise (B)
Conjugate the following verbs in all the afore-given tenses and moods.
harati, kiṇāti, karoti, pamajjati {pa √mad}
.I
Lesson 33
(1) Passive Voice {Passive Verb}
(2) Passive Present Participle
(3) Future Passive Participle {Gerundive}
EN

Seven Kinds of Verb

1. Active Verb Root + Conjug. Sign + VT dhāvati, bhuñjati, ghāyati,

kiṇāti, suṇāti, karoti, deseti

2. Causal Active (a) Root + Caus. Suffix + VT kāreti, kārayati, kārāpeti,

V

Verb (b) Present Verbal Base + Caus. kārapayati, nisīdāpeti, suṇāpeti,

Suffix + VT

3. Desiderative Root + Desid. Suffix + VT bubhukkhati, jighacchati,

Verb pipāsati

4. Intensive Verb Root + Sign- a/ ya + VT caṅkamati, cañcalati, lālappati

5. Denominative Noun, Adj, Indec. + Denom. Suffix phassati, sukheti, cicciṭāyati,

Verb + VT cirāyati, namassati

6. Passive Verb (a) Root + ya + VT Paccati, paccate

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 184

(b) Present Verbal Base + (i/ī)ya + Pacīyati, pacīyate

VT

7. Causal Causal Verbal Base + (i/ī)ya + VT pācīyati/ pācīyate

Passive Verb

17 July 2023
Passive Verb
(1) Present verbal base + (i/ī)ya + VT
(2) Root + ya + VT (assimilation)

Bhuñjati ~ he eats

Y
Bhuñja + (ī)ya + ti/te > bhuñjīyati/ bhuñjīyate ~ is eaten
Pacati ~ he cooks
Paca + (ī)ya + ti/te > pacīyati/ pacīyate

SR
√bhuj + ya + ti/te {jy > jj} > bhujjati/ bhujjate ~ is eaten
√pac + ya + ti/te {cy > cc} > paccati/ paccate ~ is cooked
Pacati ~ he cooks
Pāceti ~ causes/ commands him to cook
.I
Causal Active Verbal Base + (ī)ya + ti/te > Causal Passive

Pāce + (ī)ya + ti/te > pācīyati ~ he is caused/commanded to cook

EN

Consonant + y

(1) Group Consanant + y

Assimilation
Ky > kk, khy > kkh, gy > gg, ghy > ggh
V

Cy > cc, chy > cch, jy > jj, jhy > jjh ñy > ññ
Py > pp, phy > pph by > bb bhy > bbh my > mm

Palatalization
Ṭy > cc, ṭhy > cch, ḍy > jj, ḍhy > jjh, ṇy > ññ
Ty > cc, thy > cch, dy > jj, dhy > jjh, ny > ññ

√budh + ya + ti/te {dhy > jjh} > bujjhati

√chid + ya + ti/ te {dy > jj} > chijjati
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 185

(2) Groupless Consonant + y

Ry > yr {changing their position}
Ly > ll{assimilation}
Vy > vv > bb {assimilation}
Sy > ss {assimilation}
Hy > yh {changing their position}

Exception
√kar + (i)ya + ti/ te > kariyati/ kariyate {r-y > y-r} > kayirati/ kayirate ~ is done

Y
Root ending in vowel + ya
√nī + ya + ti/te > nīyati/ nīyate ~ is led
{īy > iyy} > niyyati/ niyyate

SR
√su + ya + ti/ te {u > ū} > sūyati/ sūyate ~ is heard
{ūy > uyy} > suyyati/ suyyate
anu √bhū + ya + ti/te > anubhūyati/ anubhūyate ~ is experienced
[Long vowel + single consonant = Short vowel + double consonants]
[Long vowel = Short vowel + single consonant]
.I
√dā + ya + ti/te {ā > ī} > dīyati/ dīyate ~ is given
√pā + ya + ti/te {ā > ī} > pīyati/ pīyate ~ is drunk
√mā + ya + ti/te {ā > ī} > mīyati/ mīyate ~ is measured
EN

√ge + ya + ti/te {e > ī} > gīyati/ gīyate ~ is sung

√ve + ya + ti/ te {e > ī} > vīyati/ vīyate ~ is woven

Exception
√ñā + ya + ti/ te > ñāyati/ ñāyate ~ is known
ā √khā + ya + ti/ te > akkhāyati/ akkhāyate ~ is said
V

Va of the root > vu

√vac + ya + ti/ te {va > vu, cy > cc}> vuccati/ vuccate ~ is said
√vas + ya + ti/ te {va > vu, sy > ss}> vussati/ vussate ~ is lived
√vah + ya + ti/ te {va > vu, hy > yh} > vuyhati/ vuyhate ~ is carried

Subject Object Verb

Nom. Acc. Active Verb
Puriso odanaṁ pacati. {a man cooks rice.}
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 186

Puriso kammaṁ karoti

Puriso kammāni karoti.

Inst. Nom. Passive Verb

Purisena/ Purisehi odano pacīyati/ paccati.
{rice is cooked by a man/ by men.}

Rājā maṁ daṇdeti (active)

Rāj(i)nā > rājnā {ā > a, jn > jñ > ññ} raññā
Raññā ahaṁ daṇḍīyāmi ~ I am punished by the king.

Puriso odanaṁ pacati.

Y
Purisena odano paccati/ paccatu/ pacceyya.
Purisena odano pacito hoti/ ahosi/ bhavissati

SR
√bhuj + ya > bhujja (passive verbal base) + all verbal terminations
Bhuñja + īya > bhuñjīya (passive verbal base) + all verbal terminations

Purisehi odano pacīyati

Purisā odanaṁ pacanti.
.I
19 July 2023
(1) Passive Present Pariticiple
PPP → object {they agree in gender, number, and case}
Passive Verbal Base + -māna > passive present participle
EN

Bhuñjīyati
Bhuñjīya + māna > bhuñjīyamāna ~ being eaten
Bhattaṁ bhuñjīyamānaṁ ~ while a meal is being eaten
Deseti ~ he expounds
Desīyati ~ it is expounded
Desīyamāna ~ being expounded
V

Karoti ~ he does
karīyati/ kayirati ~ it is done
karīyamāna/ kayiramāna ~ being done

Chindati ~ he cuts down

Chijjati ~ it is cut down
Chijjamāna ~ being cut down

(2) Future Passive Participle or Gerundive

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 187

-tabba, -anīya, -ya

-(what/ who) should be
(a) √root + -tabba, -anīya, -ya
(b) active verbal base + tabba

-tabba
(a) root + tabba {assimilation, change of consonant}
√kar + tabba {rt > tt} > kattabba ~ what should be done
√gam + tabba {m > n} > gantabba ~ what should be gone
√bhuj + tabba {u > o, jt > tt} > bhottabba ~ what should be eaten

(b) active verbal base + (i)tabba {‘i’ is inserted before ‘tabba’}

Y
Bhuñjati
Bhuñja + (i)tabba > bhuñjitabba ~ what should be eaten
Chindati

SR Chinda + (i)tabba > chinditabba ~ what should be cut down

Bhavati
Bhava + (i)tabba > bhavitabba ~ what should be
Deseti
Dese + tabba > desetabba ~ what should be expounded
.I
-anīya, -ya
√root + -anīya
√kar + anīya > karaṇīya ~ what should be done
EN

√gam + anīya > gamanīya ~ what should be gone

√bhuj + anīya {u > o} > bhojanīya ~ what should be eaten
√bhū > bho > bhav + anīya > bhavanīya ~ what should be

√root + ya {radical vowel changing as a > ā, i/ī > e, u/ū > o}

√kar + ya > kār(i)ya > kāriya
V

√vac + ya {cy > cc} > vācca

√bhū > bho > bhav + ya > bhavya {vy > vv > bb} > bhabba
√gam + ya > gamya {my > mm} > gamma

- Root -ā + ya {ā > e, y > yy}

√dā + ya > deyya ~ what should be given
√ñā + ya > ñeyya ~ what should be known
√pā + ya > peyya ~ what should be drunk
√si + ya {i > e, y > yy} > seyya (adj.) ~ where should lie down,
Seyya + ā > seyyā (f.) a bed
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 188

Khādanīya, bhojanīya
√khād + anīya
√bhuj + anīya
√khād + ya {dy > jj} > khajja
√bhuj + ya {jy > jj} > bhojja

Buddho dhammaṁ deseti. ~ the Buddha expounds the Dhamma.

Buddhena dhammo desetabbo ~ the Dhamma should be expounded by the Buddha.

Gerundive used impersonally, takes neuter gender, singuler number.

Agent is with inst.

Y
Gāmaṁ gacchati. He goes to the village.
Purisena gantabbaṁ ~ a man should go.
Mayā gantabbaṁ ~ I should go.

SR
Bhavati
Bhavitabbaṁ
Purisena bhavitabbaṁ ~ a man should be.
Mayā bhavitabbaṁ ~ I should be.
.I
Pariññeyyaṁ < pari √jñā + ya
Pahātabbaṁ < pa √hā + tabba
Sacchikātabbaṁ < sacchi √kar {ar > ā} + tabba
EN

Bhāvetabbaṁ < bhāve + tabba

Gerundive {passive}
Subj. (inst.) obj. (nom.) gerundive (nom.)
Buddhena dhammo desetabbo.
{the Dhamma should be expounded by the B.}
V

Gerundive {impersonally}
Subj. (inst.) obj. (acc.) gerundive (nt. Sl. nom.)
Buddhena dhammaṁ desetabbaṁ.
{Expounding the Dhamma by the B.}
{the Buddha should expound the Dhamma.}

21 July 2023

Pāṭikaṅkha ~ to be expected
Sujīva ~ easy to live
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 189

Dujjīva ~ hard to live

Sukara ~ easy to do
Dukkara ~ difficult to do
These adjectives are used impersonally {nt. sl.} and Their agent takes Inst.
or genitive case.
E.g., kalyāṇamittassa (kalyāṇamittena) etaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ
~ this is to be expected by one who is a good friend.
E.g., sujīvaṁ ahirikena ~ it is easy to live for the shameless one.
E.g., hirīmatā ca dujjīvaṁ, niccaṁ sucigavesinā. ~ it is difficult to live for one who is
shameful, and seeking for purity.
E.g., nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā. ~ this is not easy to do for one who
inhabits the household life.

Y
E.g., sukaraṁ sādhunā sādhuṁ, sādhuṁ pāpena dukkaraṁ. ~ it is easy to do good
deed for the good one, but it is difficult to do good deed for the evil one.

-
SR-to {inst. / abl., / loc.}

Aniccato, dukkhato, anattato ~ by means of impermanence, suffering, nonself.

(Inst.)
- Gāmato, nagarato, rukkhato ~ from the village, from the town, under the tree.
.I
(Abl.)
- Ādito, pariyosānato ~ in the beginning, in the end. (Loc.)
EN

The Agent of Past Passive Participle takes Inst. or Gen.

-kata ~ done
Kammaṁ kataṁ ~ the work is done.
Purisena/ purisassa kammaṁ kataṁ. ~ the work is done by a man.

Attha + ṁ (acc.) is used as a preposition ~ in order to {infinitive sense}

V

Dassana ~ seeing
Dassanatthaṁ ~ in order to see {passituṁ, daṭṭhuṁ}
Gamana ~ going
Gamanatthaṁ ~ in order to go {gantuṁ}
Karaṇa ~ doing
Karaṇatthaṁ ~ in order to do {kātuṁ}

Attha + āya (dat. For purpose) is used as a preposition ~ for the sake of
Dassanatthāya ~ for the sake of seeing
Gamanatthāya ~ for the sake of going
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 190

Karaṇatthāya ~ for the sake of doing

Double Pronouns are used to give emphasis to the sense of the form.
Yo yo ~ whatever
Yo so ~ whatever
Ye ye
Yo koci
Ye keci
Sabbe te ~ every, all
Te te
Tesaṁ tesaṁ

Y
24 July 2023

Vocabulary

SR
Gaṇa + in > gaṇin

Mahat ~ great
Mahat + purisa > mahāpurisa ~ a great man
Mahat + dhana {tdh > ddh} > mahaddhana ~ great wealth, wealthy, rich
.I
Mahat + phala > mahapphala ~ fruitful, great result
Mahat + ogha > mahogha ~ great flood

Māṇava ~ young, youth, young gentleman

EN

Māṇavaka ~
Mānusa ~ human
Mānusaka ~ human

Assa ~ a horse
Assaka ~ a baby horse
V

Bāla ~ foolish
Bālaka ~ a child

Saṁ + parā √i + a > samparāya

Pati √vah + a {va > ū, i > y, ty > cc} > paccūha

Ācariyena saddhiṁ viharati > saddhivihāriko ~ a fellow monk, pupil

Saddhi(ṁ) + vi √har + (ṇ)ika > saddhivihārika
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 191

Upa + adhi + √i + (ṇ)a {i > y, dhy > jjh, i > e > āy} > upajjhāya
Uttara (higher) + āsaṅga (clothing) > uttarāsaṅga ~ an upper robe

Mahintale (Sinhālese) < mahinda + thala

Macchariya {r-y > y-r} > [macchayira] {ayi > e} > macchera
Ācariya {r-y > y-r} > [ācayira] {ayi > e} > ācera

Mukha (face, mouth) + udaka {au > o} > mukhodaka

√bhū + e > bhāve + ana > bhāvana + ā (f.) > bhāvanā

√vid + e > vede + ana > vedana + ā (f.) > vedanā ~ feeling
√cit + e > cete + ana > cetana + ā (f.) > cetanā ~ volition

Y
Cakkhu + vi √jñā + ya {ā > e, y > yy} > cakkhuviññeyya
Dur + abhi + saṁ √bhū + a > durabhisambhava

SR
Dvi (two) + aṅgula (finger) + paññā (wisdom) ~
Vītarāga ~ passionless

Sat √kar + tabba {tk > kk, ar > ā} > sakkātabba

.I
garu(ṁ) √kar + tabba {ar > ā} > garukātabba

√man + e > māne + tabba > mānetabba

EN

26 July 2023
Sāmaṁ, sayaṁ, attanā ~ by oneself
Kāla ~ time
Kālo ~ right time
Kālena ~ at right time
V

Kālaṁ karoti ~ dies, passes away

Kāle kāle ~ from time to time
Kālassa ~ in the morning
Kālasseva ~ in the early morning

Puna ~ again
Punappunaṁ ~ again and again, repeatedly

Ttha, tra, hiṃ, haṁ ~ at place

Ta ~ that
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 192

Tattha, tatra, tahiṁ ~ at that place = there

Dā, dācanaṁ, rahi ~ at time

Tadā ~ at that time ~ then
Kadā ~ at what time? When?
Yadā ~ at what time, when
Kudācanṁ ~ when?
Tarahi/ carahi ~ at that time, then
Etarahi ~ at this time, now

Sota ~ current of water

Anu + sota > anusotaṁ ~ along with the current

Y
Pati + sota > patisotaṁ ~ against the current

Khudda ~ minor

SR
Khudda + anukhudda > khuddānukhudda (adj.) ~ lesser and minor

Sama (adj.) ~ even, justice, right

Visama (adj.) ~ uneven, injustice, wrong
Samavisama (adj.) right and wrong
.I
Samavisama + ṁ (adv.) rightly and wrongly

√han + ya + ti {ny > ññ} > haññati

√bhaj + a + ti > bhajati ~ to associate
EN

√bhaj + (ī)ya + ti > bhajīyati ~ to be associated

√bhaj + e + ti > bhājeti ~ to divide
Bhāje + (ī)ya + ti > bhājīyati ~ to be divided

√tud + ya + ti {dy > jj} > tujjati

(a)√sak + (s)iṁ {ks > kkh} > asakkhiṁ
V

√vah + ya + ti {va > vu, hy > yh} > vuyhati

Paṭi √vidh + ya + ti {dhy > jjh} > paṭivijjhati
Pariyatti, paṭipatti, paṭivedha
Paṭi √vidh + ta {dht > ddh} > paṭividdha (pp)

Saṁ √dis + ya + ti {sy > ss} > sandissati ~ is seen, is found

Anu √yuj + ṁ-a > anuyuñja + ti > anuyuñjati ~

Vi + upa √sam + ya + ti {i is dropped, u > ū, my > mm} > vūpasammati

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 193

Vi + upa √sam + ta {m > n} > vūpasanta (pp)

Paṭi + saṁ √khā (khyā) + ti > paṭisaṅkhāti

Paṭi + saṁ √khā {cikkhā} + a + ti > paṭisañcikkhati ~ thinks over, reflects
√khyā > khākhyā {h is silent, ā > i}> kikhyā {k > c, khy > kkh}> cikkhā

nis/ nir √vā + ti {sv/ rv > vv > bb} > nibbāti

nis/ nir √vā + āpe + ti > nibbāpeti

Saṁ √yam + a + ti {ṁy > ññ} > saññamati

Pa √hā > jah + a +ti > pajahati

Y
Pa √hā + (ī)ya + ti > pahīyati

Ud √dhar + a + ti > uddharati

SR
Pari √khi (kṣī > (k)khī) + a + ti {i > e > ay}> pari(k)khayati
Pari √khī (kṣī > kkhī) + ya + ti > parikkhīyati ~ to be exhausted
.I
√k(i)lis + ya + ti {sy > ss} > kilissati ~

Pati + ava √ikkh + a + ti {i > y, ty > cc, ai > e} > paccavekkhati

Ava > o √muc + ṁ-a > muñca + ti > omuñcati
EN

Pa √ap + aya + ti > pāpayati

28 July 2023
Exercise
Translate into English
1. Ambho, kimevidaṁ, (yaṁ) harīyati jañña-jaññaṁ viya? M I 31.
V

Kimevidaṁ < kiṁ + eva + idaṁ

Friend, what is this (that is) carried like a beautiful thing?

2. Idaṁ vuccatāvuso dukkhaṁ. M 148.

Vuccatāvuso < vuccati + āvuso
Friend, this is called suffering.

3. Dadato puññaṁ pavaḍḍhati, saññamato veraṁ na cīyati. Ud 85.

Dadato ~ dadant/ dadat + o (dat. sl.) ~ to one who gives
Saññamato ~ saññamant/ saññamat + o ~ to one who restraints
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 194

To one who gives merit increases, to one who restraints enmity is not stored up.

4. Tasmiṁ kho brāhmaṇa yaññe neva gāvo haññiṁsu, na rukkhā chijjiṁsu

yūpatthāya, na dabbhā lūyiṁsu barihisatthāya. D I 141.
Hanati (active) → haññati (passive. pr.)→ haññiṁsu
Chindati (active) → chijjati (passive. pr.) → chijjiṁsu
Lunāti (active) → lūyati (passive. pr.) → lūyiṁsu
Brahmin, in that festival of feeding, neither oxen were killed, nor trees were cut
off for a sacrificial post, nor Kusa grass were reaped for sacrificial grass.

5. Atha kho so bhikkhu taṁ bhikkhuniṁ etadavoca “Gaccha, bhagini, amukasmiṁ

okāse bhikkhā dīyatī”ti. Vin IV 59.

Y
Dadāti (active) → dīyati (passive)
Then the monk said this to the nun “Go, sister, in such a place meal is offered.”

SR
6. Tena kho pana samayena saṁghassa cīvaraṁ bhājīyati. Vin IV 59.
Bhājeti (causal active) → bhājīyati (causal passive)
At that time, to the Order of Saṁgha, robe is divided.

7. So ḍayhati sūlehi tujjamāno. M II 73.

.I
Ḍahati (active) → ḍayhati (passive)
Tudati (active) → tujjati (passive) → tujjamāna (passive, pr.p)
He is burnt being pricked by the sharp-pointed instrument.
EN

8. Kassa sodhīyati maggo? Buddh A 85.

Sodheti (causal active) → sodhīyati (causal passive)
For whom is the road cleaned?

9. Asakkhiṁ vata attānaṁ uddhātuṁ udakā thalaṁ, vuyhamāno mahoghena saccāni

paṭivijjhituṁ. Th I 88.
V

Asakkhiṁ < (a)√sak + (s)iṁ {ks > kkh}

Uddhātuṁ < ud √dhar > dhā + tuṁ
Vahati (active) → vuyhati (passive) → vuyhamāna (passive pr.p)
Paṭivijjhituṁ < paṭi √vidh + ya > vijjha + (i)tuṁ
I was able, indeed, to draw myself out of water to the land and to penetrate the
noble truths, while carried away by great flood,.

10. Na kho brāhmaṇa sandissanti etarahi brāhmaṇā porāṇānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ

brāhmaṇa-dhamme. Sn 50.
Sampassati (active) → sandissati (passive)
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 195

Brahmin, now brahmins are not found in the brahmanic lore of the ancient
brahmins.

11. Atha kho so mānavo āyasmatā upālinā anuyuñjiyamāno etamatthaṁ ārocesi. Vin
I 88.
Anuyuñjati (active) → anuyuñjiyati (passive) → anuyuñjiyamāna (passive pr.p)
Then the young man, being asked by Venerable Upāli, replied this information.

12. So tattha nadiyaṁ patati, so tattha anusotampi vuyhati, paṭisotampi vuyhati. M

III 185.
He falls in the river there, he is carried along the current as well as against the
current.

Y
02 Aug 2023
13. Cakkhuṁ kho bhikkhave aniccato jānato passato avijjā pahīyati vijjā uppajjati. S
IV 31.

SRPajahati (active) → pahīyati (passive)

Jānāti → jānant/ jānat (pr.p) + -ssa/ -o > jānantassa/ jānato
Passati → passant/ passati (pr.p) + -ssa/ -o > passantassa/ passato
Oh monks, Ignorance is removed, wisdom arises to one who sees and
understands the eye as (by means of) impermanence.
.I
14. Na hiraññena suvaṇṇena parikkhīyanti āsavā. Th II 347.
Pari √khī + ya + anti {kh > kkh} > parikkhīyanti
Mental defilements are not exhausted by means of bullion or gold.
EN

15. Sujīvaṁ ahirikena, kākasūrena dhaṃsinā. Dhp 244.

It is easy to live for the shameless one (who is) as cleaver as a crow and
obtrusive.

16. Gamanīyo samparāyo, kattabbaṁ kusalaṁ, caritabbaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, natthi

V

jātassa amaraṇaṁ. S I 108.

√gam + anīya > gamanīyo ~ should be gone
Life after death should be gone {is to be gone}, meritorious deed should be
performed, holy life should be lived, there is no deatlessness to one who is born.

17. Bahū hi saddā paccūhā, khamitabbā tapassinā.

na tena maṅku hotabbaṁ, na hi tena kilissati. S I 201.
Hoti → ho + tabba > hotabba ~ should be
So hotabbo → tena hotabbaṁ ~ he should be
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 196

√k(i)lis + ya + ti {sy > ss} > kilissati

There are many noises that disturb, that should be endured by a recluse, he
should not be discouraged, he is not impure with that.

18. Yaṁ taṁ isīhi pattabbaṁ, ṭhānaṁ durabhisambhavaṁ.

Na taṁ dvaṅgula-paññāya, sakkā pappotumitthiyā. S I 129.
Yaṁ taṁ ṭhānaṁ isīhi pattabbaṁ durabhisambhavaṁ
Whatever state difficult to achieve should be attained by the seers, that state is
not possible to be attained by a woman who has knowledge of two finger
breadths.

“That state so hard to achieve

Y
Which is to be attained by the seers,
Can’t be attained by a woman
With her two-fingered wisdom.

SR
19. Maccherā ca pamādā ca, evaṁ dānaṁ na dīyati.
Puññamākaṅkhamānena deyyaṁ hoti vijānatā. S I 18.
Due to stinginess or negligence, thus offering is not given. Offering should be
given by a wise one who wishes merit.
.I
Pañcasatāni bhikkhu
Pañcamattehi bhikkusatehi
EN

04 Aug 2023
20. Saddhivihārikena bhikkhave bhikkhunā upajjhāyamhi sammā vattitabbaṁ. Vin I
46.
Vattati → vatta + (i)tabba > vattitabbaṁ (impersonally)
V

Oh monks, a fellow monk should behave (himself) well towards the preceptor.

21. Kālasseva vuṭṭhāya upāhanā omuñcitvā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā

dantakaṭṭhaṁ dātabbaṁ, mukhodakaṁ dātabbaṁ, āsanaṁ paññāpetabbaṁ. Sace
yāgu hoti, bhājanaṁ dhovitvā yāgu upanāmetabbā. Vin I 46.
Having got up early in the morning, having taken off slippers, having arranged
the upper robe over one shoulder, tooth pick should be offered (by him), water to wash
the face should be offered (by him), the seat should be prepared (by him). If there is rice
gruel, having washed the bowl, rice gruel should be offered.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 197

22. Ye te samaṇa-brahmaṇā cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu avītarāgā avītadosā avītamohā

ajjhattaṁ avūpasanta-cittā sama-visamaṁ caranti kāyena vācāya manasā,
evarūpā samaṇa-brahmaṇā na sakkātabbā na garukātabbā na mānetabbā na
pūjetabbā. M III 291.
Vijānāti → vi √jñā + ya (ā > e, y > yy) > viññeyya
Sakkaroti {sat √kar + o + ti} → sat √kar > kā + tabba > sakkātabba
Garukaroti {garu √kar} → garu √kar > kā + tabba > garukātabba
Māneti {√man + e} → māne + tabba > mānetabba
Vūpasantā cittā yesaṁ > vūpasantacittā

Whoever recluses and brahmins, who are not free from lust, anger, delusion in
regard to visible forms which are to be perceived by eye, whose minds are not inwardly

Y
calmed, both rightly and wrongly conduct themselves bodily, verbally and mentally.
Such recluses and brahmins should not be treated with respect, honoured, revered, or
worshipped.

SR
23. Puna ca sāriputta bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ, “bhāvitā nu kho samatho ca
vipassanā cā?”ti. Sace sāriputta bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti
“abhāvitā kho me samatho ca vipassanā cā”ti, tena sāriputta bhikkhunā
samatha-vipassanānaṁ bhāvanāya vāyamitabbaṁ. M III 297.
.I
Paṭisañcikkhati → paṭisañcikkha + (i)tabba > paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ
(impersonally)
Vāyamati → vāyama + (i)tabba > vāyamitabbaṁ (impersonally)
samathavipassanānaṁ bhāvanāya = samathavipassanaṁ bhāvetuṁ
EN

Again, Sāriputta, A monk should reflect (himself) thus “have tranquility and
insight meditation been developed (by me)?” Sāriputta, if a monk, while reflecting,
knows thus “tranquility and insight meditation have not been developed yet (by me).”
the monk, Sāriputta, should make effort to develop tranquility and insight meditation.

24. Ye keci gaṇino loke satthāro’ti pavuccare,

V

Paramparābhataṁ dhammaṁ desenti parisāya taṁ.

Na hevaṁ tvaṁ mahāvīra dhammaṁ desesi pāṇinaṁ,
Sāmaṁ saccāni bujjhitvā kevalaṁ bodhipakkhiyaṁ. Ap 340.
Pavuccare = pavuccanti
They whoever are called teachers who have host of followers in the world
expound the Dhamma handed down by tradition in the assembly. Mahāvīra, after
realizing the truths and all the Enlightenment factors by yourself, you did not expound
the Dhamma to beings in this way.

25. Ajjāpi maṁ mahāvīra, ḍayhamānaṁ tihaggihi. (tīhi aggīhi)

 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 198

Nibbāpesi tayo aggī, sītibhāvañca pāpayi. Ap 580.

pāpeti/ pāpayati ~ pāpaya + i > pāpayi
Tvaṁ tīhi aggīhi ḍayhamānaṁ maṁ sītibhāvaṃ pāpayi, tvaṁ tayo aggī
nibbāpesi. {nir √vā + āpe + (s)i}
Mahāvīra, even today you have cooled me being burnt by three kinks of fire, and
have extinguished three kinds of fire.

09 Aug 2023
Lesson 34
7 conjugational signs; ‘a’, ‘ṃ-a’, ‘ya’, ‘ṇu*, ṇā, uṇā’, ‘nā’, ‘o, u’, and ‘e, aya’

(1) 1st conjugational sign ‘a’

Y
Root + Conjugational sign + VT > Verb
(a) Radical vowel ‘a, ā’ remains unchanged.
E.g., √pac + a > paca {to cook}

SR √dhāv + a > dhāva {to run}

(b) ‘i, ī’ > e, ‘u, ū’ > o.
E.g., √i > e {to go}
√is + a > isa > esa {to seek}
√ruh + a > ruha > roha {to grow up}
.I
√rud + a > ruda/ roda {to cry}
(c) ‘e’ followed by a vowel > ‘ay’, ‘o’ followed by a vowel > ‘av’
E.g., √i + a > ia > ea > aya {to go}
√nī + a > nīa > nea > naya {to lead}
EN

√bhū + a > bhūa > bhoa > bhava {to become}

(d) Radical vowel of some roots remains unchanged.
E.g., √kir + a > kira {to scatter}
√tud + a > tuda {to pierce}
√īr + a > īra {to shake}
V

(2) 2nd conjugational sign ‘ṁ-a’

- ‘ṁ’ is inserted before the ending consonant of the root
- ‘ṁ’ > ṅ, ñ, ṇ, n, or m based on the following consonant
E.g., √chid + ṃ-a > chiṃda > chinda {to cut}
√bhuj + ṃ-a > bhuṃja > bhuñja {to eat}

(3) 3rd conjugational sign ‘ya’

- If the root is ending in vowel, ‘y’ remains unchanged.
- ‘Y’ is assimilated to the ending consonant of the root.
- ‘Y’ is palatalized preceded by the ending dantal consonant of the root.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 199

E.g., √ghā + ya > ghāya {to smell}

√sā + ya > sāya {to taste}
√jhā + ya > jhāya {to burn, to meditate}
√siv + ya > sivya > sibya > sibba {to sew}
√budh + ya > budhya {dhy > jjh} > bujjha

(4) 4th conjugational sign ‘ṇu*, ṇā, uṇā’

- ‘ṇu’ > ṇo
E.g., pa √ap + ṇu{ > ṇo} > paapṇo > pāpṇo > pāppo > pappo {to reach, to
obtain}
√su + ṇā > suṇā {to listen, to hear}
pa √ap + uṇā > pāpuṇā {to reach, to obtain}

Y
(5) 5th conjugational sign ‘nā’
- Long vowel ‘ī’ before ‘nā’ becomes short.

SR
-
-
After some roots ‘n’ > ‘ṇ’
‘hn’ > ‘hṇ’ > ‘ṇh’
E.g., √ci + nā > cinā {to collect}
√ji + nā > jinā {to win}
√jñā + nā > jñānā {jñ > jj > j} > jānā {to know}
.I
√kī + nā > kīnā > kinā > kiṇā {to buy}
√gah + nā > gahnā > gahṇā > gaṇhā {to take, to grasp}

NB., √kī = krī (skt) ~ n > ṇ

EN

√gah = grah (skt) ~ n > ṇ

(6) 6th conjugational sign ‘o’

With attanopada ‘o’ > ‘u’
E.g., √kar + o > karo ~ karoti {he makes}
√kar + o > karo > karu > kuru + te > kurute {he makes}
V

√tan + o > tano ~ tanoti {he spreads}

√tan + o > u > tanu + te > tanute {he spreads}

(7) 7th conjugational sign ‘e’ ‘aya’

- The radical vowel ‘a’ > ‘ā’, ‘i’ > ‘e’, ‘u’ > ‘o’ when followed by a single
consonant.
- The radical vowel remains unchanged when followed by a conjunct
consonant.
E.g., √bhū > bho > bhav + e > bhave > bhāve {to develop}
√bhū > bho > bhav + aya > bhavaya > bhāvaya
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 200

√dis + e > dise > dese {to expound}

√dis + aya > disaya > desaya
√cur + e > cure > core {to steal}
√cur + aya > curaya > coraya
√cint + e > cinte {to consider}
√cint + aya > cintaya

11 Aug 2023
Lesson 35
Word-building
Three ways of word-building in Pāḷi
1) Substantives + Substantives > Word {Samāsa ~ Compounded Word}

Y
[Lesson 29, 30]
2) Substantive + Suffix > Word {Taddhita ~ Secondary Derivative}
3) Root/ Verbal Base + Suffix > Word {Kita ~ Primary Derivative}

SR
2) Taddhita ~ Secondary Derivative;
1. Patronymics [Apacca-taddhita]
2. Words Expressive of Possession [Assatthi-taddhita]
3. Abstract Nouns [Bhāva-taddhita]
.I
4. Numeral Derivatives [Saṅkhyā-taddhita]
5. Pronominals,
6. Feminine Bases, and
7. Misacellanous
EN

1) Patronymics
The suffixes in Patronyimic are -(ṇ)a, (-ava,) -(ṇ)āyana, -(ṇ)āna, -(ṇ)eyya,
-(ṇ)era, and -(ṇ)ya. These suffixes express descendency.
V

N.B; In the suffix with ‘ṇ’ such as (ṇ)a and so on, ‘ṇ’ is just the indicatory latter
(anubandha). It is not used in word-formation. But the indicatory latter lets us
know the beginning vowel changing in the word {a > ā, i/ī > e, u/ū > o} (vuddhi).

- -(ṇ)a,
Vasudeva + a > vāsudeva
{3 genders}; vāsudevo (m.) ~ the son of Vasudeva,
vāsudevaṁ (n.) ~ the family of Vasudeva,
vāsudevī (f.) ~ the daughter of Vasudeva
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 201

Baladeva + a > bāladeva ~ the son of Baladeva

- If a substantive ends in ‘u’, the ‘u’ before ‘a’ is changed to ‘o’ and to ‘av’.
- (-(ṇ)ava)
Manu {u > o > av} + a > mānava ~ descendent of Manu
Upagu + a > opagava ~ descendent of Upagu
Paṇḍu + a > paṇḍava ~ descendent of Paṇḍu

- -(ṇ)āyana, -(ṇ)āna
Kacca + āyana/ āna > Kaccāyana, Kaccāna ~ Son or descendent of Kacca
Kati + āyana
Moggali {-li > ly > ll} + āyana/ āna > Moggallāyana, Moggallāna ~ Son or descendent

Y
of Moggali
Aggivessa + āyana, āna > Aggivessāyana, Aggivessāna ~ Son or descendent of
Aggivessa

SR
- -(ṇ)eyya
Bhaginī (sister) + eyya > bhāgineyya ~ the son of the sister: nephew

- -(ṇ)era
.I
Samaṇa (recluse) + era > sāmaṇera ~ the son of the recluse: a novice
Vidhavā (a widow) + era > vedhavera ~ the son of the widow

- -(ṇ)ya
EN

Kuṇḍanī + ya > koṇḍanya {ny > ññ} > koṇḍañña ~ the son of Kuṇḍanī

2) Expressive of Possession; possessing or having sth

-a saddhā (f.) + a > saddha (adj.) ~ possessing faith, having faith, devoted, a
devotee
-āla vācā (f.) {word} + āla > vācāla (adj.) ~ talkative
V

-ālu dayā (f.) {mercy} + ālu > dayālu (adj.) ~ merciful

-ava kesa (n.) {hair} + ava > kesava (adj.) ~ hairy: having too much hair on one’s
head
-ita phala (n.) {fruit} + ita > phalita (adj.) ~ fruitful
dukkha (n.) {sorrow, grief} + ita > dukkhita (adj.) ~ sorrowful, grievous
-ika dhamma + ika > dhammika (adj.) ~ possessing Dhamma, righteous
-in ñāṇa (n.) {wisdom} + in > ñāṇin (adj.) ~ wise
Pakkha {wing} + in > pakkhin ~ having wings: a bird
Dukkha + in > dukkhin ~ sorrowful
-ila paṅka {mud} + ila > paṅkila ~ muddy
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 202

Sikatā {sand} + ila > sikatila ~ sandy

-mant dhiti {courage} + mant > dhitimant ~ courageous
-vant bala {power} + vant > balavant ~ powerful
-vin medhā {wisdom} + vin > medhāvin ~ wise
Māyā {deceit} + vin > māyāvin ~ deceitful
Tejas {glory} + vin {sv > ss} > tejassin ~ glorious
Yasas {fame} + vin > yasassin ~ famous

14 Aug 2023
Abstract Nouns {bhāva}
Noun/ Adjective + -(ṇ)a, -ka(ṇ), -tta, -ttana, -tā, or -(ṇ)ya > Abstract Noun (State of
Sth)

Y
-(ṇ)a garu (heavy, teacher) + a {a > ā, u > o > av} > gārava {heaviness, respect}
gārava = garubhāva ~ heaviness, respect
Paṭu (clever) + a > pāṭava (cleverness)

SR
Visama (uneven) + a {i > e} > vesama (unevenness)
Uju (straight) + a > ajjava (straightness)
Uju (ṛju) + a > ṛjava {ṛ > ar} > arjava {rj > jj} > ajjava
Mudu (soft) + a > maddava (softness)
Mudu (mṛdu) + a > mṛdava {ṛ > ar} > mardava {rd > dd} > maddava
.I
-ka(ṇ) ramaṇīya (attractive) + ka {a > ā, ī > e, ey > eyy}> rāmaṇeyyaka (attractiveness)
Manuñña (lovely) + ka > manuññaka (loveliness)
EN

-tta, -ttana buddha (the Buddha) + tta > buddhatta (Buddhahood)

Manussa (human being) + tta > manussatta (state of human being)
Jāyā (a wife) + tta, ttana > jāyatta, jāyattana (state of a wife)
Jāra (paramour) + tta, ttana > jāratta, jārattana (state of a paramour)

-tā sabbaññu (omniscient) + tā > sabbaññutā (omniscience)

V

Mudu (soft) + tā > mudutā (softness)

Lahu (light) + tā > lahutā (lightness)
Surūpa (handsome, beutiful) + tā > surūpatā (handsomeness, beauty)

-(ṇ)ya dubbala (weak) + ya > dubbalya (weakness)

Vikala (deformed) + ya {i > e, ly > ll}> vekalla (deformity)
Alasa (lazy) + ya {a > ā} ālasya ~ ālas(i)ya > ālasiya (laziness)
Kusala (skillful) + ya {u > o, ly > ll} > kosalla (skillfulness)
Jāgara (wakeful) + ya > {jāgar(i)ya} > jāgariya (wakefulness)
Macchara (stingy) + ya > {macchar(i)ya} > macchariya (stinginess)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 203

Karuṇā + ya > kāruṇya > kāruñña

Isi (ascetic) + ya > ārisya (state of an ascetic)
Ṛśi > ṛsi + ya > ṛsya > arsya > ār(i)sya > ārisya

Miscellaneous Derivatives

-(ṇ)ika ghata (ghee) + ika > ghātika (mixed with ghee)

Nāvā (boat) + ika > nāvika (connected with a boat, boatman)
Dvāra (door) + ika > dovārika (connected with a door, gatekeeper)
D(u)vāra + ika {u > o} > dovārika
Abbhokāsa (open space) + ika > abbhokāsika (living in the open space)

Y
Rājagaha (a name of city) + ika > rājagahika (born or living in the Rājagaha city)
Apāya (woeful state) + ika > āpāyika (destined to a woeful state)
Abhidhamma + ika > ābhidhammika (who learns the Abhidhamma)

SRSuttanta + ika > suttantika (who learns the discourses)

Vinaya + ika > venayika (who learns the Vinaya)
Balisa (fish-hook) + ika > balisika (a fisherman)
Abhidosa (the evening before, last night) + ika > ābhidosika (belonging to the
evening before, last night)
.I
Saṁgha (religious order) + ika > saṁghika {belonging to the Saṁgha}
Kāya (body) + ika > kāyika (bodily)
Vacas (word) + ika {a > ā} > vācasika (verbal)
EN

-ima pacchā (later) + ima > pacchima (latest, last)

(-imant) Putta (children) + imant > puttimant (who has children)

Canda (the moon) + imant > candimant (the moon)

-iya putta (children) + iya > puttiya (having children)

V

Loka (world) + iya > lokiya (worldly)

-(ṇ)eyya pitar (father) + eyya > petteyya (looking after one’s father)
Pitar (pitṛ) {i > e, ṛ > ra ~ petra, tr > tt} + eyya > petteyya
√kṛ > √kar
ṛ > a, i, u, ar, ra
mātar (mātṛ) + eyya > matteyya (looking after one’s mother)

-(ṇ)eyya, -(ṇ)eyyaka Campā + eyya, eyyaka > campeyya, campeyyaka

(living in the city Campā)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 204

Kula (family, house) + eyya, eyyaka > koleyya, koleyyaka

(belonging to the family or house)

-tara (more than) {comparative adj. suffix}

paṭu (clever) + tara > paṭutara (cleverer)
-tama (most) {superlative adj. suffix}
paṭu + tama > paṭutama {cleverest}

-iya, issika (more than) {comparative adj.}

pāpa (bad) + iya, issika > pāpiya, pāpissika (worse)

-iṭṭha (most) {superlative adj.}

Y
Pāpa + iṭṭha > pāpiṭṭha {worst}

-(ṇ)a kasāva (colour of boiled bark) + a > kāsāva {dyed with a colour of boiled bark}

SR
ayas (iron) + a > āyasa (made of iron)

-maya (made of)

ayas {as > o} (iron) + maya > ayomaya (made of iron)
manas {as > o} (mind) + maya > manomaya (made of mind)
.I
rajata (silver) + maya > rajatamaya (made of silver)
kaṭṭha (wood) + maya > kaṭṭhamaya (made of wood, wooden)

-tā jana (being, a person) + tā > janatā (folk, group of people)

EN

deva (deity) + tā > devatā (deity)

dhamma (nature) + tā > dhammatā (nature)

-ka(ṇ) virajja (foreign country) + ka > verajjaka (belonging to a foreign country)

Kosala + ka > kosalaka (belonging to Kosala country)
nagara + ka > nāgaraka (belonging to the city)
V

Parivatta (exchange) + ka > pārivattaka (that which is exchanged)

Putta (son) + ka > puttaka (a young son)

Paṇḍita (wise, learned) + ka > paṇḍitaka (a pedant)

Samaṇa (monk) + ka > samaṇaka (a contemptible monk, a young monk)

Muṇḍa (shaven) + ka > muṇḍaka (a shaveling)

-īna uccākula (high family) + īna > uccākulīna (descent from high family)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 205

Numeral Derivatives;
-tiya, tha, ma (for ordinal numbers)
Cardinal number + tiya, tha, ma > ordinal number
-tiya dvi {> du} (two) + tiya > dutiya (second)
ti {> ta} (three) + tiya > tatiya (third)
-tha catur (four) + tha > caturtha {rth > tth} > catuttha (fourth)
chas (six) + tha > chastha {sth > ṭṭh} > chaṭṭha (sixth)

-ma pañca (five) + ma > pañcama (fifth)

Satta > sattama
Aṭṭha > aṭṭhama
Nava > navama

Y
Dasa > dasama, and so on

18 Aug 2023

SR
-kkhattuṁ (times)
eka (one) + kkhattuṁ > ekakkhattuṁ (one time, once)
dvi (two) + kkhattuṁ > dvikkhattuṁ (twice, two times)
sata + kkhattuṁ > satakkhattuṁ (a hundred times)
sahassa + kkhattuṁ > sahassakkhattuṁ (a thousand times)
.I
Vāra (time) ~ paṭhamo vāro, dutiyo vāro, and so

-ka (collection)
EN

eka + ka > ekaka (collection of one)

dvi + ka > dvika, duka (collection of two)
tika, catukka, pañcaka, chakka, sattaka, aṭṭhaka, navaka, dasaka, and so on

-dhā (parts, ways, fold)

eka + dhā > ekadhā (in one part)
V

dvi + dhā > dvidhā, duvidhā (twofold, in two ways, in two parts)
tidhā, catudhā, pañcadhā, chadhā, sattadhā, and so on

-aya (collection) {only with dvi and ti}

dvi + aya > dvaya (couple, collection of two, pair)
ti + aya > taya (triple, collection) ~ ratanattaya ~ triple gems

-so (sa) {by, into}

pañca + so > pañcaso (by five, into five), sattaso (by seven, into seven)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 206

Pronominals {Pronoun + suffix > adv.}

-so (by means of)
sabba (all) + so > sabbaso (by means of all, altogether, entirely, wholly,
completely)

-thā (in way)

sabba + thā > sabbathā (in all ways, in every way, thoroughly)
ta (that) + thā > tathā (in that way, as, such as, thus, so)
añña (another) + thā > aññathā (in another way, otherwise)
ya (what) + thā > yathā (in what way, just as, in the following way)

Y
-(t)thaṁ (in way)
kiṁ (what?) > ka + thaṁ > kathaṁ (in what way? how?)

thus)SRima (this) > i + tthaṁ > itthaṁ (in this way, thus, so), itthatthaṁ (in this way,

-tra, ttha (in place)

(im)a (this) > a + tra > atra (in this place, here)
.I
ima > i > e + ttha > ettha (in this place, here)
ta (that) + tra, ttha > tatra, tattha (in that place, there)
ya (what) + tra, ttha > yatra, yattha (in what place, where)
kiṁ (what?) > ku + tra > kutra (in what place? where?)
EN

kiṁ > ka + ttha > kattha

Sabba (all, every) + tra, ttha > sabbatra, sabbattha (in all places, everywhere)

-haṁ, hiṁ (in place) {only with ya and kiṁ}

Ta + hiṁ > tahiṁ (there)
ya + hiṁ > yahiṁ (where)
V

kiṁ > ka + haṁ > kahaṁ (where?)

kiṁ > ku + hiṁ > kuhiṁ (where?)

-dha (in place)

Ima > i + dha > idha (here), i(d)ha > iha (here)

-dā (at time)

ta + dā > tadā (at that time, then)
ya + dā > yadā (when)
Kiṁ > ka + dā > kadā (when?)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 207

Sabba + dā > sabbadā (at all time, forever), sa(bba)dā > sadā (forever)

-dāni (at time)

Ima > i + dāni > idāni (at this time, now), (i)dāni > dāni (now)
Ta (that) + dāni > tadāni (at that time, then)

-rahi (at time) {only with eta}

Eta (this) + rahi > etarahi (at this time, now, nowadays)

-dhunā (at time) {only with ima}

Ima > a + dhunā > adhunā (now)

Y
-jja ima > a + jja > ajja (today)

-jju

-to
SRsamāna (being) > sa + jju > sajju (for the time being, instantly)
apara (following) + jju > aparajju (on the following day)

(from place, from time, reason)

ta + to > tato (from that place, therefrom, from that time, therefore)
.I
Ima > i/ a + to > ito, ato (from this place, from this time, from here)
Ya + to > yato (from where)
Kiṁ > ku + to > kuto (from where?)
Sabba + to > sabbato (from every side)
EN

-dhi {only with sabba}

Sabba + dhi > sabbadhi (everywhere)

Formation of Feminine Bases {masc. > fem.}

-ā, ī, ānī, inī, nī, aka > ikā
V

-ā vaṭṭaka (partridge) + ā > vaṭṭakā (hen partridge)

kokila (cuckoo) + ā > kokilā (hen cuckoo)
aja (goat) + ā > ajā (she goat)
Kata (done) + ā > katā (done)

-ī aja (goat) + ī > ajī (she goat)

miga (deer) + ī > migī (doe)
Brahmaṇa (brahmin) + ī > brahmaṇī (female brahmin)
Taruṇa (young {boy}) + ī > taruṇī (young {girl})
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 208

Kukkuṭa (cock) + ī > kukkuṭī (hen)

Dhamma (doctrinal) + ī > dhammī {kathā} (doctrinal discourse)

21 Aug 2023
- - ‘ī’ is added to a consonantal noun such as dhanavant, dhanavat, dhanin,
gacchant and so on to form a feminine base.
Dhanavant + ī > dhanavantī
Dhanavat + ī > dhanavatī
Dhanin + ī > dhaninī
Gacchant + ī > gacchantī
Gacchat + ī > gacchatī

Y
-nī pati (a husband) + nī > patinī (a wife, a lady)
Bhikkhu (a monk) + nī > bhikkhunī (a nun)

-ānī SR mātula (ancle) + ānī > mātulānī (aunt)

Gahapati (a householder) + ānī > gahapatānī (a housewife)

- -an > in + ī
.I
rājan (a king) > rājin + ī > rājinī (a queen)

- mālā (a garland) + in > mālin (having a garland) + ī > mālinī itthī (a woman
wearing a garland)
EN

-inī yakkha (a male demon) + inī > yakkhinī (a female demon)

- -aka > ikā

Upāsaka (a male devotee) > upāsikā (a female devotee)
Dāyaka (a male donor) > dāyikā (a female donor)
V

Sāvaka (a male follower) > sāvikā (a female follower)

√vid ~ to experience, feel

Vedeti, vedayati ~ he experiences
√vid + ana (-ing) > vedana (experience, feeling) + ā > vedanā (cetasika)
Vi √dis > pass + ana > vipassana (seeing in various ways) + ā > vipassanā
(insight meditation)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 209

Primary Derivatives (Kitanta)

[√root + suffix; infinitive, absolutive, present participle, past participle, agent,
gerundive, and so on]

(1) -(ṇ)a {agent, abstract} in root a > ā, i/ī > e, u/ū > o
√cur (to steal) + (ṇ)a > cora (a thief)
√mar (to kill) + (ṇ)a > māra (a killer)
√yudh (to fight) + (ṇ)a > yodha (a soldier)
√kup (to get angry) + (ṇ)a > kopa (anger)
√kudh (to get angry) + (ṇ)a > kodha (anger)

Y
The ending consonant of the root c > k, j > g
√pac (to cook) + (ṇ)a > pāka (the cook)
√yaj (to sacrifice, offer) + (ṇ)a > yāga (sacrifice, offering)

SR √yuj (to meditate) + (ṇ)a > yoga (meditation practice) ~ yoga + in > yogin
√kī (to purchase) + (ṇ)a {ī > e > ay + a}> kaya (buying, purchasing)
Vi √kī (to sell) + (ṇ)a > vikkaya (selling)
Kaya + vikkaya > kayavikkaya (buying and selling, trading)
√bhū (to exist) + (ṇ)a {ū > o > av}> bhava (existance)
.I
(2) -(ṇ)u {agent}
√kar (to do, to make) + (ṇ)u > kāru (a carpenter)
√vā (to blow up) + (ṇ)u > vā(y)u > vāyu (wind)
EN

(3) -ti {abstract, mostly feminine gender}

[the ending consonant of the root r, m, n are dropped]
√gam (to go) + ti > gati (destination)
√ram (to be delighted) + ti > rati (delight)
√man (to think) + ti > mati (opinion, idea)
V

√sak (to be able) + ti {kt > tt} > satti (ability)

√bhaj (to follow, to be devoted to) + ti {jt > tt} > bhatti (devotion)
√sar (to remember) + ti > sati (rememberance, mindfulness)
√var (to prevent) + ti > vati (fence)
√bhī (to be afraind) + ti > bhīti (fear)

Tapas + (s)in > tapassin + ī > tapassinī

Yasas + (s)in > yasassin + ī . yasassinī
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 210

23 Aug 2023
(4) -ana. (-ing)
Almost all nouns ending in -ana are neuter in gender, except a few nouns.
√kar (to do) + ana > karaṇa (doing, deed)
√mar (to die) + ana > maraṇa (dying, death)
√ñā (to know) + ana > ñāṇa (knowing, knowledge)
√chid (to cut off) + ana > chedana (cutting)
√bhid (to break) + ana > bhedana (breakage)
√sudh (to purify) + ana > sodhana (purifying, purification)
√vid (to feel) + ana > vedana + ā > vedanā (feeling)
√cit (to will) + ana > cetana + ā > cetanā (volition)
√dis (to expound) + ana > desana + ā > desanā (discourse)

Y
√bhū (to develop) + ana {ū > o > av > āv}> bhāvana + ā > bhāvanā (developing,
meditation)
√gam (to go) + ana > gamana (going)

SR√si (to lie down) ana > sayana (lying down, seat)

(5) -tar (agent, doer, and so on)

This suffix is added to the root and to the verbal base to form an agent noun.
√kar (to do) + tar {rt > tt} > kattar (doer)
.I
√sās (to instruct) + tar {st > tth, ā > a} > satthar (the instructor)
√nī (to lead) + tar {ī > e} > netar (a leader)
√su (to listen, hear) + tar {u > o} > sotar (a listener, hearer)
Verbal base ~ bhāve (to develop) + tar > bhāvetar (developer)
EN

Verbal base ~ dese (to preach) + tar > desetar (preacher)

Verbal base ~ kāre (to cause to do) + tar > kāretar (one who causes sb to do,
commander)

(6) -(ṇ)in
This suffix is added to the root prefixed by a noun to form an agent.
V

Pāpa (evil) + √kar + (ṇ)in {a > ā} > pāpakārin (evil-doer)

Dhamma + √car + (ṇ)in > dhammacārin (dhamma-practitioner)
Dhamma + √vad + (ṇ)in > dhammavādin (one who speaks in accordance with
the Dhamma)
Brahma (holy life) + vi √har + (ṇ)in > brahmavihārin (one who lives holy life)
Dīgha (long) + √jīv + (ṇ)in > dīghajīvin (one who lives long life)
Ante (nearby) √vas + (ṇ)in > antevāsin (one who stays nearby, pupil)

(7) -a
This suffix is also added to the root prefixed by a noun to form an agent.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 211

Dhamma + √dhar (to bear) + a > dhammadhara (dhamma-bearer)

Tipiṭaka + √dhar + a > tipiṭakadhara (one who bears Tipiṭaka)

Some monosyllabic root ending in a vowel is added to a noun, the ending

vowel ‘ā’ becomes ‘a’.
Dhamma + √ṭhā > dhammaṭṭha (standing in a Dhamma, righteous)
√ṭhā (Pāḷi) = √sthā (Skt)
Majja (liquor) + √pā (to drink) > majjapa (drunkard)
Anna (meal) + √dā (to offer) > annada (giver of food)
Senā (army) + √nī (to lead) > senānī (general of the army)
Sayaṁ (by oneself) + √bhū (to become) > sayambhū (self-dependent, Buddha)

Y
Compound Noun
Senā + pati > senāpati (general of army)
Geha + pati > gahapati (owner of a house, householder)

SR
Dāna + pati > dānapati

(8) -(r)ū
{the indicatory latter ‘r’ indicates that sometimes the ending consonant of the
root is dropped}
.I
This suffix is added to the root prefixed by a noun.
Pāra (further shore) + √gam + (r)ū > pāragū (one who has gone to a further
shore)
Veda (knowledge) + √gam (to go) + (r)ū > vedagū (one has attained the Perfect
EN

Wisdom)
Loka (the world) + √vid (to know) + (r)ū > lokavidū (one who knows the world)
Sabba (all) + √ñā (to know) + (r)ū > sabbaññū (knowing everything)
√ñā (Pāḷi) = √jñā (Skt)
Dhamma + √ñā + (r)ū > dhammaññū (knowing the Dhamma)
V

25 Aug 2023
(9) -ta / -na {Past Participle}
(1) √root + ta {elision of consonant or consonant assimilation takes place}
(2) √root or verbal base + (i)ta {‘i’ is inserted between base and suffix}
(a) if the root is intransitive, the past participle so formed is Active.
(b) if the root is transitive, the past participle so formed is Passive.

√pat (to fall) + (i)ta > patita (fallen)

Rukkho patati ~ a tree falls
Patito rukkho ~ the fallen tree
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 212

√kath (to speak) + (i)ta > kathita (spoken)

So dhammaṁ katheti ~ he speaks the Dhamma.
Tena kathito dhammo ~ the Dhamma spoken by him

kāre (to cause to do) + (i)ta > kārita (caused to do)

kiṇā (to buy) + (i)ta > kiṇita ~ bought
√kī (to buy) + ta > kīta (bought)

The ending consonant of the root is assimilated to ‘t’ of the suffix.

√muc (to release) + ta {ct > tt} > mutta (released)
pa √ap (to reach, to attain) + ta {paapta ~ a is dropped, pt > tt} > patta (reached,
attained)

Y
√vap (to sow) + ta {pt > tt, a > u} > vutta (sown)
√vac (to say) + ta {ct > tt, a > u} > vutta (said)
√vas (to live) + ta {st > tth, a > u} > vuttha (lived)

SR The ending consonants of the root, m, r, n are dropped.

√gam (to go) + ta {m is dropped} > gata (gone)
√ram (to delight) + ta > rata (delighted)
.I
√sar (to remember) + ta > sata (remembered, mindful)
√kar (to do) + ta > kata (done)
√mar (to pass away) + ta > mata (dead, passed away)
EN

√han (to kill) + ta > hata (killed)

√khan (to dig) + ta > khata (dug)
√tan (to spread) + ta > tata (spread)
√man (to know, think) + ta > mata (known, thought)

The ending consonant ‘m’ of the root is changed to ‘n’.

V

√sam (to appease) + ta {m > n} > santa (appeased)

√vam (vomit) + ta {m > n} > vanta (vomitted)

The ending consonant ‘r’ of the root is dropped and radical vowel ‘a’
is changed to ‘u’.
√phar (to pervade) + ta {r is dropped, a > u, t > ṭ} > phuṭa (pervaded)
nir √var (to cease) + ta {r is dropped, a > u, rv > vv > bb} > nibbuta (ceased)

In the root ending in vowel, that ending vowel is changed to ‘i/ī’.

√ṭhā (to stand) + ta {ā > i} > ṭhita (stood)
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 213

√pā (to drink) + ta {ā > ī} > pīta (drunk)

√ge (to sing) + ta {e > ī} > gīta (sung)

-na {past participle}

√hā (to give up) + na {ā > ī} > hīna (given up, inferior)
√dā (to give) + na {ā > ī} > dīna {īn > inn} > dinna (given, offered)

√bhī (to fear) + ta > bhīta (feared)

√khī (to waste) + na {n > ṇ} > khīṇa (wasted)
{√kṣī + na > ṇa}

{-r + n, n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ, a > i}

Y
√tar (to cross over) + na > tiṇṇa (crossed over)
ā √car (to habitually practise) + na > āciṇṇa (habitually practised)
pa √kir (to scatter) + na > pakiṇṇa (scattered)

SR {-d + n > nn}

√bhid (to break down) + na > bhinna (broken)
√chid (to cut) + na > chinna (cut)
√chad (to cover) + na > channa (covered, roof)
.I
ni √sad > sīd (to sit) + na > nisinna (sat)
pa √sad (to be devoted) + na > pasanna (devoted)

28 Aug 2023
EN

(10) Past Participle

pa √khad (to jump on) + na {dn > nn, kh > kkh}> pakkhanna (jumped forward)
√khad (Pāḷ) = √skadh {sk > (k)kh}
√kir (to scatter) + na {r ~ n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ} > kiṇṇa (scattered)
√pur (to be full, to fill) + na {r ~ n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ} > puṇṇa (full, filled)
√jar (to be old, to decay) + na {r ~ n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ, a > i} > jiṇṇa (old, decayed)
V

√car (to practise) + na {r ~ n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ, a > i} > ciṇṇa (practised)
√tar (to cross over) + na {r ~ n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ, a > i} > tiṇṇa (crossed over)
√lū (to mow, to reap) + na > lūna (mown, reaped)
√hā (to decay) + na {ā > ī} > hīna (decayed)

The radical vowel of some roots remain unchanged.

√ñā (to know) + ta > ñāta (known)
ā √khyā > kkhāt (to say) + ta > ākkhāta (said)
su + ā √khyā > kkhā + ta > svākkhāta (well said)
√yā (to go) + ta > yāta (gone)
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 214

√ji (to conquer) + ta > jita (conquered)

√bhī (to fear) + ta > bhīta (feared)
√jan (to produce) {an > ā} + ta > jāta (produced, born)

[dht > ddh, bht > ddh]

√budh (to enlighten) + ta {dht > ddh} > buddha (enlightened, the Buddha)
√sudh (to purify) + ta {dht > ddh} > suddha (purified)
vi √sudh + ti {dht > ddh} > visuddhi (purification)
ā √rabh (to begin) + ta {bht > ddh} > āraddha (begun)

[ht {t > ḷ, hḷ > ḷh}, u > ū]

√guh (to hide) + ta {t > ḷ, hḷ > ḷh, u > ū} > gūḷha (hidden)

Y
√ruh (to grow) + ta {t > ḷ, hḷ > ḷh, u > ū} > rūḷha (grown)
√muh (to be deluded) + ta {t > ḷ, hḷ > ḷh, u > ū} mūḷha (deluded)
√muh + (ṇ)a {u > o} > moha (delusion)

SR
√vah (to carry) + ta {t > ḷ, hḷ > ḷh, u > ū} vūḷha (carried)

Some anomalous forms;

√pac (to cook) + ta {c > k, kt > kk} > pakka (cooked, boiled)
√luj (to break up) ta {j > g, gt > gg} > lugga (broken up)
.I
√la(g)g (to stick) + ta {ggt > gt > gg} > lagga (stuck)
√bha(ñ)j (to break down) + ta {j > g, gt > gg} > bhagga (broken down)

Passive Past Participle + -vant, -āvin > perfect active participle

EN

√kar (to do) + ta > kata (done)

kata + vant > katavant (who has done)
kata + āvin > katāvin (who has done)

pa √ap (to attain) + ta {pt > tt} > patta (attained)

patta + vant > pattavant (having attained)
V

patta + āvin > pattāvin (having attained)

gata (gone)
gatavant (having gone)
gatāvin (having gone)

hata (killed)
hatavant/ hatāvin (having killed)

chinna (cut)
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 215

chinnavant/ chinnāvin (having cut)

bhutta (eaten)
bhuttavant/ bhuttāvin (having eaten)

√vas (to live) + a + ti > vasati

√vas + (i)ta {a > u} > vusita (lived)
vusitavant/ vusitāvin (having lived)

(11) -ant, -māna, -āna {present participle}

Mostly by adding -ant, -māna, -āna to the verbal base, present participle is
formed

Y
Active Verbal Base + -ant, -mān > Active Pr.P
Gacchati (he goes)
Gaccha + ant > gacchant

SRGaccha + māna > gacchamāna

Gaccha + āna > gacchāna (going)

Pacati (cooks)
Pacant
.I
Pacamāna
Pacāna (cooking)

Deseti (expounds)
EN

Decent
Desemāna {e > aya} > desayamāna (expounding)

Passive verbal base + pr.p suffix -māna > passive pr.p

√pac (to cook) + (ī)ya + ti > pacīyati (is cooked)
Pacīya + māna > pacīyamāna (being cooked)
V

(12) -tabba, -anīya, -ya {Gerundive, Future Passive Participle}

Root + -tabba, -anīya, -ya
√pac + (i)tabba > pacitabba (should be cooked)
√pac + anīaya > pacanīya (should be cooked)
√pac + ya {cy > cc} > pacca (should be cooked)

√bhid (to break) + na {dn > nn} > bhinna

Bhindati ~ bhinda + (i)ta > bhindita
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 216

Gata
He has gone. So gato hoti.
He had gone. So gato ahosi.

√vad (to say) + ta {dt > tt, a > u} > vutta (said)

30 Aug 2023
Vocabulary
ni √dhā + i > nidhi
ni √dhā > dhe + ti > nidheti ~ buries
Dhamma + anudhamma > dhammānudhamma
Sākī + (ṇ)a > sākya > sakya

Y
sa- < saha (together); savitakka ~ being together with vitakka
Sa- < saka (one’ own); sahattha ~ one’s own hattha

SR
sa - < samāna/ sadisa (similar to);

Pāṇa (life) + in > pāṇin ~ living being

√su (to listen) {u > o > av > āv} + (ṇ)vu > aka > sāvaka
.I
pari √vaj {√vraj} (to go about) + (ṇ)vu > aka {v > vv, vv > bb, a > ā} > paribbājaka

saṁ √lap {to converse} + (ṇ)a {ṃl > ll, a > ā} sallāpa
EN

Diṭṭhadhamma ~ present life, belonging to the present life

Samparāyika ~ future life, next life, belonging to the next life

√k(i)lis (to defile) + (ṇ)a > k(i)lesa > kilesa ~ defilement

√kilis + ya + ti {sy > ss} > kilissati ~ defiles
V

Dukkha + khandha > dukkha(k)khandha

Khandha = skandha {sk > kkh, > kh}

√dā (to give) + (ṇ)vu > aka > dā(y)aka > dāyaka ~ giver, donor
Dāyaka {aka > ikā} > dāyikā ~ female donor

√kar (to do) + (ṇ)vu > aka > kāraka ~ a doer

Saṁgha + upaṭṭhāka > saṁghupaṭṭhāka

Upa √ṭhā (to attend) + (ṇ)vu > aka >upaṭṭhāka
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 217

Dvi/ du + hadaya (mind) > duhadaya ~ twofold minded, bad minded

Du + Hadaya {hṛda} > duhada > dohada > dohaḷa

Yakkha (ghost) + inī > yakkhinī (female ghost)

Maha(t) + iddhi > mahiddhi ~ great psychic power

Mahiddhi + ika > mahiddhika ~ having great psychic power
Mahiddhika + tā > mahiddhikatā ~ possession of great psychic power

√car (to go) + (ṇ)vu > aka > cāraka {aka > ikā} > cārikā

Y
√arh (to be worthy) + a + ti > ar(a)hati > arahati
Araha + ant > arahant (being worthy, one being worthy)
Araha + at > arahat (being worthy, one being worthy)

SR
araha(t) + tta > arahatta (arahatship)

Udara ~ stomach
Udara + (ṇ)ika > odarika ~ who has a big stomach; who eats too much
Odarika + tta > odarikatta
.I
√khād (to chew) + anīya > khādanīya ~ what should be chewed, solid food
√bhuj (to eat) + anīya > bhojanīya ~ what should be eaten, soft food
EN

Vi + ā √kar + o + ti {i > y} > vyākaroti {v > b} byākaroti ~ explains, answers

Vi + ā √kar + yu > ana > vyākaraṇa > byākaraṇa ~ explanation, an answer
v(i)yākaraṇa {> viyākaraṇa {i > e, y > yy} > veyyākaraṇa ~ explanation, an answer

√pā (to drink) + anīya > pānīya ~ what should be drunk, drinking water
V

01 Sep 2023
Itthaṁ nāmo yassa > itthannāma
Ābādha (n) ~ disease
Ābādha + in > ābādhin ~ having a disease; sick, ill
Ābādhin + ī > ābādhinī (adj. f.)
Dukkha (n.) suffering, pain
Dukkha + ita > dukkhita ~ afflicted, suffering
Bāḷha ~ strong, serious
Gilāna ~ sick, ill
Bāḷhagilāna ~ seriously ill
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 218

√tha(m)bh + ta {bht > ddh} > thaddha

√lap (to converse) + a > lapa
Siṅga ~ a horn
Siṅga + in > siṅgin ~ having a horn
Samāhita < saṁ + ā √dhā + ta {(d)hā, ā > i}
Na samāhita > asamāhita
Mama ~ mine
Mama + ka(ṇ) {a > ā} > māmaka
Cātumā + eyyaka > cātumeyyaka
Arañña (forest)
Arañña + ka(ṇ) {a > ā} > āraññaka
Nir (non) + upadhi (attachment) + ika (having) > nirupadhika

Y
Na + kiñcana (something) > akiñcana ~ nothing
Natthi kiñcanaṁ yassa ~ who has no something; possessing nothing

SR
Na + añña + √pus + (ṇ)in
Aññaṁ na poseti > anaññaposin ~ who does not nourish other

Aṭṭhaka-nagara ~ a city named Aṭṭhaka

Aṭṭhakanagara + (ṇ)a > aṭṭhakanāgara ~ belonging to the city Aṭṭhaka
.I
Pāṭaliputta ~ a city so named
Pāṭaliputta + aka > pāṭaliputtaka
EN

Vesālī ~ a city so named

Vesālī + ika > vesālika

Pa √nī + ta {n > ṇ} > paṇīta

√yaj + a + ti > yajati ~ sacrifices, offers

V

Yaja + māna > yajamāna

Puñña (merit) + pa √ikkh + a {ai > e} > puññapekkha

Upadhi + (ṇ)ika {u > o} > opadhika

Mahat + phala {tph > pph} > mahapphala

Abhi + cetas + (ṇ)ika > ābhicetasika/ abhicetasika

Nikāma √labh + (ṇ)in {a > ā} > nikāmalābhin
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 219

Nikāmaṁ labhati nikāmalābhī

Akicchena labhati akicchalābhī

Akiccha + √labh + (ṇ)in

Akasirena labhati akasiralābhī

Kapilavatthu ~ a city so called

Kapilavatthu + (ṇ)a {a > ā, u > o > av} > kāpilavatthava

Na cirasseva kārāpeti acirakārāpito (vihāro)

Na cira + kārāpe + (i)ta > acirakārāpita

Y
Eka + tya {ty > cc} > ekacca
Ekacca + sassata + ika > ekaccasassatika

SR
Uḷāra + (ṇ)ika > oḷārika

Saha vitakkena yo vattati savitakko

Saha vicārena yo vattati savicāro
.I
Vivaka √jan > vivekaja

Dukkhena otaratīti dukkhotiṇṇo

EN

Dukkha + ava √tar + na {ava > o, rn ~ n > ṇ, rṇ > ṇṇ} > dukkhotiṇṇa

Dukkha + para √i + ta {ai > e} > dukkhapareta

Gilāna + (ṇ)ya {i > e, ny > ññ, ā > a} > gelañña

V

04 Sep 2023
Bahu
Bahula
Saṁ + bahula > sambahula

Niṭṭhita (ended, finished) + cīvara

Niṭṭhita < ni √ṭhā + ta {ṭh > ṭṭh, ā > i}

Pīti + sukha > pītisukha ~ rapture and ease [dvandasamāsa]

Pīti + sukha > pītisukha ~ which has rapture and ease [bahubbīhisamāsa]
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 220

Deva ~ deity
Dev(a) + (ṇ)ya > devya {vy > vv > bb} > debba {e > i} > dibba ~ belonging to deity,
divine

vi √sudh + ta {dht > ddh} > visuddha ~ purified

Atikkanta + mānusaka
Ati √kam + ta {k > kk, m > n} > atikkanta
mānusa/ mānusaka ~ human

Attan + tapa > attantapa ~ tormenting oneself

Y
Na + paraṁ + tapa > aparantapa ~ not tormenting other

nis + chāta {s + ch > cch} > nicchāta

SR
nir √vā + ya + ti {rv > vv > bb} > nibbāyati ~ calmes, ceases

nir √vā (vṛ > vu) + ta > nirvuta {rv > vv > bb} > nibbuta
.I
Sukha + paṭi + saṁ √vid + (ṇ)in > sukhapaṭisamvedin > -dī

Manas(i/ī) + karoti > manasikaroti/ manasikāra

EN

Sa + akkha > sakkha > saccha(i) + karoti > sacchikaroti, sacchikaraṇa, sacchikata

Sīta (cool) (ī) + √bhū + ta > sītībhūta

Brahma + bhūta
V

Dhamma + anudhamma + pati √pad + na {dn > nn} > dhammānudhammapaṭipanna

√sar (to remember) + a + ti > sarati

√sar + ti > sati ~ rememberance, mindfulness
√sar + ta > sata ~ remembered, mindful

saṃ + pa √jñā + ana {jñ > jj > j} > sampajāna

Pasattha ~ good
Seyya ~ better
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 221

Seṭṭha ~ best

pa + ā √kar + ta > pākaṭa

pa √sad + na {dn > nn} > pasanna

Verbs

Su + ni √dhā + ti {ā > e} > sunidheti ~ well buries

Su + ni √dhā + ta {d is silent, ā > i} > sunihita ~ well buried

√tus (to be glad) + (ṇ)e + ti > toseti ~ makes sb glad; gladens someone

Y
√ba(ṁ)dh (to tie, to bind) + a + ti > bandhati

SR
Ā √nī + a + ti > ānayati/ āneti
Ā √ni + ta > ānīta

Pa √vis + a + ti > pavisati

Pa √vis + ta {st > ṭṭh} > paviṭṭha
.I
Saṁ + ni √pat + a + ti > sannipatati ~ gathers
Saṁ + ni √pat + (ṇ)e + ti > sannipāteti ~ causes to gather
EN

Saṁ + pa √var + (ṇ)e + ti > sampavāreti

√dā + ti {dādā > dadā} > dadāti

√dā + na {ā > ī} > dīna {īn > inn} > dinna
√dā > dad(ā) + ta > dadta {dt > tt} > datta
Devadatta ~ given by a deity
V

Brahmadatta ~ given by the Brahmā

Buddhadatta ~ given by the Buddha

Pa √jñā + (ṇ)āpe + ti {jñ > ññ} > paññāpeti

Saṁ + ā √dhā + a + ti {dhādhā > dahā} > samādahati

Saṁ + ā √dhā + ti {d is silent, ā > i} > samāhita

Anu √yu(ṁ)j + a + ti > anuyuñjati

Anu √yuj + ta {jt > tt} > anuyutta
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 222

Nir √vā + ti {rv > vv > bb} > nibbāti

Nir √vā (vṛ > vu) + ta {rv > vv > bb} > nibbuta

Saṁ + pa √jñā + nā + (ṇ)ya {jñ > jj > j} > sampajān(ā) + ya {ny > ññ} > sampajañña

Adhi √ṭhā ~ adhiṭṭhāti, adhiṭṭhahati

Pa √hā ~ pajahati
√dā ~ deti, dadāti
√dhā ~ nidheti, nidahati

06 Sep 2023
Pati √pad + ya + ti {pati > paṭi, dy > jj} > paṭipajjati

Y
Paṭipatti < pati √pad + ti {pati > paṭi, dt > tt}
Pati √pad + na {pati > paṭi, dn > nn} > paṭipanna

SR
Vitakka + e/aya + ti > vitakketi/ vitakkayati

√gah + nā + ti {n > ṇ, hṇ > ṇh} > gaṇhāti ~ takes, grasbs

√gah + (ṇ)e + ti {a > ā} > gāheti ~ causes to obtain
.I
Vi √vic + ya + ti {cy > cc} > viviccati
Vi √vic + ya > vivicca ~ having secluded {gerund, absolutive}

Upa + saṁ √pad + ya + ti {dy > jj} > upasampajjati ~ attains, reaches, is ordained
EN

Upa + saṁ √pad + na {dn > nn} > upasampanna ~ ordained

Upa + saṁ √pad + ya {dy > jj} > upasampajja ~ having ordained {gerund, absolutive}

Vi √har + a + ti > viharati

Vi √har {ar > ā} + (s)iṁ > vihāsiṁ
√kar + o + ti > karoti
V

(a)√kar {ar > ā} + (s)iṁ > akāsiṁ

Ava √tar + a + ti {ava > o} > otarati

Ava √tar + na {ava > o, n > ṇ, a > i, rṇ > ṇṇ} > otiṇṇa

√tar (Pāḷi) = √tṛ (Skt){ṛ > ar, ir}

Pa √jñā + nā + ti {jñ > jj > j} > pajānāti ~ knows thoroughly

Pa √jñā + ta {jñ > ññ} > paññāta
Pa √jñā + ya + ti {jñ > ññ} > paññāyati ~ is known
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 223

Pa √kam + a + ti {k > kk} > pakkamati

√kam (Pāḷi) = √kram (Skt) {kr > kk > k}
Pa √kam + ta {k > kk, m > n} > pakkanta

√su + ṇā + ti > suṇāti ~ listens, hears

(a)√su + (s)i {u > o, s > ss} > assosi ~ listened, heard
√su (Pāḷi) = √śru (Skt) {ś > s, sr > ss > s}

√pā + a + ti {pā > pāpā, ā > i, p > v} > pivati ~ drinks

Piva + (i)tvā > pivitvā

Upa √dhar + (ṇ)e + ti {a > ā} > upadhāreti

Y
Saṁ + ni √ṭhā {ṭhahā} + a + ti {ṁn > nn, ṭh > ṭṭh}> sanniṭṭhahati
√ṭhā > ṭhāṭhā > ṭha(ṭ)hā > ṭhahā

SR
√ṭhā (Pāḷi) = √sthā (Skt) {sth > ṭṭh > ṭh}

√nī + a + ti {ī > e > ay} > nayati {aya > e} > neti

Vi √sajj + (ṇ)e + ti > visajjeti/ vissajjeti

.I
√sajj (Pāḷi) = √sṛj (Skt) {ṛ > ar ~ sarj > sajj}

Ud √sajj + e + ti {ds > ss} > ussajjeti

Nis √sajj + e + ti > nissajjeti
EN

Vi √sajj + e + ti > visajjeti > vissajjeti

Ava √sajj + e + ti {ava > o} > osajjeti > ossajjeti

(Pāḷi) (a)√brū > ah + a {aa > ā} > āha ~ he said

(a)√brū > ah + u > āhu ~ they said
V

Abravi, abravuṁ
Abravi, abravittha
Abraviṁ, abravimhā

(Skt) (a)√ah + a > āha

(a) √ah + u > āhu

Ā √har + a + tu > āharatu ~ he may take

Ā √har + (i)ya + tu > āhariyatu ~ it may be taken
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 224

Thena + e/aya + ti > theneti/thenayati

√bhū + a + ti {ū > o > av} > bhavati {b is silent, ava > o} > hoti
√bhū + tvā > (b)hūtvā {ū > u} > hutvā

08 Sep 2023
√khip + a + ti > khipati
√khip + ta {pt > tt} > khitta
Nir √gah + nā + ti {rg > gg, n > ṇ, hṇ > ṇh} > niggaṇhāti
Nir √gah + (i)ta {rg > gg} > niggahita
Nir √vatt + e + ti {rv > vv > bb} > nibbatteti
Pati √labh + a + ti {pati > paṭi} > paṭilabhati

Y
Pati > paṭi √labh + ta {bht > ddh} > paṭiladdha
(a)√ṭhā + (s)i {ṭh > ṭṭh} > aṭṭhāsi
√pucch + a + ti > pucchati

SR
√pucch + ta {ccht > cht > ṭṭh} > puṭṭha

√man (to think) + sa + ti {man > maman ~ m > v, a > ī, n > ṁ} > vīmaṁsati
vīmaṁsa + ā > vīmaṁsā ~ wisdom
.I
Pati > paṭi + pa > pp √sambh + a + ti > paṭippassambhati
Prati > ppaṭi > paṭi
Pra > ppa
√sambh = √śrambh {ś > s, sr > ss > s}
EN

Pati > paṭi + pa > ppa √sa(m)bh + ta {bht > ddh} > paṭippassaddha

√dā + ti > deti, dadāti ~ gives

Ā √dā + ti {ā > e} > ādeti ~ takes
Ā √dā + ya > ādāya
V

Pa √sad > sīd + a + ti > pasīdati ~ is pleased with

Ni √sad > sīd + a + ti > nisīdati ~ sits

Pa √sad + na {dn > nn} > pasanna

Ni √sad > sīd + na {dn > nn} > nisinna

Ā √sad > sīd + a + ti > āsīdati ~ sits near, goes by

Ā √sad + na {dn > nn} > āsanna ~ near
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 225

Cira (adj.) long

Cira + ṁ (acc.) > ciraṁ (adv.)~ for a long time
Na > a + ciraṁ > aciraṁ (adv.) ~ before long

Dhammaṁ (y)eva > dhammaṁ yeva {ṁy > ññ} > dhammaññeva
Taṁ ubhayaṁ {ṁ > d} > tadubhayaṁ
Nagaraṁ (i)ti > nagaraṁ ti {ṁ > n} > nagaran’ti
Āharīyatu iti {i is dropped, u > ū} > āharīyatū’ti

Dhamma-vitakkaṁ (y)eva > dhamma-vitakkaṁ yeva {ṁy > ññ} >

dhamma-vitakkaññeva

Y
Pānīyaṁ ādāya {ṁ > m} > pānīyamādāya

Ito eva {e is dropped} > ito’va

SR
Seyyo iti {i is dropped} > seyyo’ti

Etaṁ buddhāna(ṁ) sāsanaṁ > etaṁ buddhāna sāsanaṁ

Ariyasaccāna(ṁ) dassanaṁ > ariyasaccāna dassanaṁ
.I
Puññapekkhāna(ṁ) pāṇīnaṁ > puññapekkhāna pāṇīnaṁ

Samaya (N) ~ time

Tena kho pana samayena (Inst.)~ at that time, on that occasion {in Vinaya Piṭaka
EN

mostly}
Ekaṁ samayaṁ (Acc.)~ at one time {mostly in Suttanta Piṭaka}
Tasmiṁ samaye (Loc.) ~ at that time {mostly in Abhidhamma}

Cārika ~ a long journey

Caratha bhikkhave cārikaṁ
V

Cārikaṁ pakkāmi
Cārikaṁ āhiṇḍanto

Inst + Acc. ~ from - to

Gāmena gāmaṁ
Nagarena nagaraṁ
Vihārena vihāraṁ
Pariveṇena pariveṇaṁ

11 Sep 2023
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 226

Exercise
1. Eso nidhi sunihito, ajeyyo anugāmiko. Kh 7.
Nidhi (m.)~ buried treasure
Sunihita (pp.) < su + ni √dhā + ta {d silent, ā > i} ~ well buried, well put
Ajeyya (fpp.) <na √ji + (ṇ)ya {na > a, i > e, y > yy} ~ not won
Anugāmika (adj.) < anu √gam + (ṇ)ika {a > ā} ~ following
This buried treasure is well buried, cannot be won (by others), and following (to
him).

2. So bhagavā arahā ceva, arahattāya ca dhammaṁ desesi. Ud 7.

Arahat (pr.p, n) < √ar(a)h + at ~ being worthy, an arahant
Arahatta (abstr. n) < arahat + tta ~ arahatship

Y
The Blessed One was also an Arahant, and expounded the Dhamma for (the
attainment of) the arahatship.

SR
3. Itthannāmā, bhante, bhikkhunī ābādhinī dukkhitā bāḷhagilānā āyasmato
ānandassa pādesu sirasā vandati. A II 145.
Itthannāma (adj.) itthaṁ + nāma ~ named so and so
Ābādha ~ disease ~ ābādha + in > ābādhin + ī ~ sick
Dukkhita (adj.) < dukkha + ita ~ suffered, painful
.I
Bāḷhagilāna (adj.) bāḷha + gilāna ~ seriously ill
Venerable Sir, a nun named so and so, who is sick, suffered, and seriously ill,
worships with (her) head to the feet of venerable Ānanda.
EN

4. Ye te bhikkhave bhikkhū kuhā thaddhā lapā siṅgī unnaḷā asamāhitā, na me te

bhikkhū māmakā. A II 26.
Kuha (adj.) decietful
Thaddha (adj.) stubborn, selfish
Lapa (adj.) talkative
Siṅgin (adj.) astute
V

Unnaḷa (adj.) proud

Asamāhita (pp.) < na + saṁ √dhā + ta {na > a, d silent, ā > i}
~uncontrolled
Māmaka (adj.) < mama + (ṇ)aka {a > ā} ~ devoted, loving, making one’s
own
Monks, whatever monks are deceitful, stubborn, talkative, astute, proud, and
uncontrolled. Those monks are not devoted to me.

5. Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa ñātī-dāsī ābhidosikaṁ

kummāsaṁ chaḍḍetukāmā hoti. M II 62.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 227

Ābhidosika (adj.) belonging to last evening

Kummāsa (n.) ~ cake
Chaḍḍetukāma (adj.) < chaḍḍetuṁ + kāma ~ wishing to throw away
At that time, a female servant of relatives of venerable Raṭṭhapāla is wishing to
throw away a cake belonging to last evening.

6. Tena kho pana samayena cātumeyyakā sakyā santhāgāre sannipatitā honti. M I

456.
Cātumeyyaka (adj.) < cātuma + (ṇ)eyyaka ~ belonging Cātuma city
Sakyā (adj. n.) Sakyan people
Santhāgāra (n.) a council hall
Sannipatita (pp.) < saṁ + ni √pat + (i)ta ~ gathering, gathered

Y
At that time Sakyan people living in Cātuma city are gathering in a council hall.

7. Piyaṅkara-mātā yakkhinī puttakaṁ evaṁ tosesi. S I 209.

SR Piyaṅkara-mātar ~ a mother of Piyagkara

Yakkha (m.) a male demon, + inī > yakkhinī ~ a female demon
Tosesi < √tus + (ṇ)e + (s)i ~ pleased
A female demon who is Piyaṅkara’s mother pleased (her) young child in this
way.
.I
8. Taṁ rāga-pāsena āraññamiva kuñjaraṁ bandhitvā ānayissāmi. S I 124.
Rāga-pāsa (n.) a snare of lust
Ārañña (adj.) < arañña + (ṇ)a ~ wild
EN

Ānayissāmi < ā √nī + a + ssāmi ~ I will bring towards

I will catch him with a snare of lust and bring towards just like a wild elephant.
Āraññaṁ kuñjaraṁ (pāsena bandhitvā ānayati) iva, taṁ rāgapāsena bandhitvā
ānayissāmi.

13 Sep 2023
V

9. Abbhutaṁ vata bho samaṇassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā. S I 141.

Abbhuta (nt.) marvellous
Mahiddhikatā (abstr. f.) state of having psychic power,
{mahat + iddhi > mahiddhi + ika > mahidhhika + tā > mahiddhikatā}
Mahānubhāvatā (abstr. f.) majesty
Marvellous, certainly, friends, Possession of psychic power and majesty of the
recluse!

10. Eso hi te brahmaṇi brahmadevo,

nirupadhiko atidevaputto.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 228

Akiñcano bhikkhu anañña-posī,

Yo te so piṇḍāya gharaṁ paviṭṭho. S I 141.
Nirupadhika (adj.) free from attachment to rebirth
Atidevaputta (m.) a son of the Buddha
Akiñcana (adj.) having no possession
Anaññaposin (adj.) not maintaining any other
Paviṭṭha (pp.) ~ entered {pa √vis + ta}
Yo so piṇḍāya te gharaṁ paviṭṭho, akiñcano anaññaposī bhikkhu.
Eso hi brahmaṇi brahmadevo te nirupadhiko atidevaputto.
He who entered your home for alms is a monk having no possession, not
maintaining any other.
Oh female brahmin, for you, he is Brahmadeva free from attachment to rebirth, a

Y
son of the Buddha.

11. Kumbhīla-bhayanti bhikkhave odarikattassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ. M I 146.

SR Kumbhīlabhayanti etaṁ (padaṁ), bhikkhave odarikattassa adhivacanaṁ.

Oh monks, The word ‘kumbhīlabhaya’ is the term for gluttony.
‘Peril of crocodile’ is designation of gluttony.
‘The fear of crocodile’ is metaphorical expression of gluttony.
.I
12. Atha kho dasamo gahapati aṭṭhakanāgaro pāṭaliputtake ca vesālike ca bhikkhū
sannipātāpetvā paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi
sampavāresi. M I 353.
Atha kho ~ then
EN

Aṭṭhakanāgara (adj.) living in Aṭṭhaka city

Saṁ + ni √pat + (ṇ)āpe + tvā ~ having made them gathered
Sahattha (m.) one’s own hand + ā (inst./abl.) with one’s own hand
Saṁ √tapp + (ṇ)e + (s)i ~ pleased, satisfied
Saṁ + pa √var + (ṇ)e + (s)i ~ served with
Then the householder, Dasama living in Aṭṭhaka city gathered monks living in
V

Pāṭaliputta and in Vesālī and with his own hand pleased (them) and served with
excellent soft and solid food.

13. Yajamānanaṁ manussānaṁ, puññapekkhāna pāṇinaṁ.

Karotamopadhikaṁ puññaṁ, saṁghe dinnaṁ mahapphalaṁ. S I 233.
Yajamānānaṁ manussānaṁ, {√yaj + a + māna} ~ for men who are giving
an alms
Puññapekkhānaṁ pāṇīnaṁ, ~ for beings who expect for merit
Opadhikaṁ puññaṁ karotaṁ, {√kar + o + at} ~ performing worldly merit
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 229

Saṁghe dinnaṁ mahapphalaṁ ~ an offering given to Saṁgha is great

fruitful.
15 Sep 2023
14. Ariyasāvako evaṁ catunnaṁ jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ
diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī akicchalābhī akasiralābhī. M I 357.
Ariyasāvako (m.) the noble disciple
Ābhicetasika (adj.) depending on higher consciousness
Diṭṭhadhamma ~ the present life
Sukhavihāra ~ dwelling at ease
Nikāmalābhin ~ (one who is) acquiring at will
Akicchalābhin ~ gaining without difficulty
Akasiralābhin ~ gaining with no trouble

Y
Catu + naṁ {u > ū} > catūnaṁ {ūn > unn} > catunnaṁ
The noble disciple is one who is acquiring at will, gaining without difficulty,
gaining with no trouble four jhānas depending on higher consciousness, leading to

SR
dwelling at ease at the present life.

15. Tena kho pana samayena kāpilavatthavānaṁ sakyānaṁ navaṁ santhāgāraṁ

acirakārāpitaṁ hoti. M I 353.
Kārāpita (pp.) ~ built <{ kārāpeti ~ builds}
.I
Cira ~ long
Acira ~ not so long
Acirakārāpita ~ not built so long
Then new council hall has been built not so long for Sakyans living in
EN

Kapilavatthu city.

16. Santi hi bhikkhave eke samaṇabrahmaṇā ekaccasassatikā (ye) ekaccaṁ sassataṁ

lokaṁ attānaṁ ca paññapenti. D I 17.
Ekaccasassatika (adj.) eternalistic with regard to certain things
Ekacca ~ some
V

Sassata ~ eternalism
Loka ~ the world
Attan ~ oneself
Paññapeti < pa √jñā + āpe + ti ~ paññāpeti/ paññapeti ~
There are, oh monks, some recluses and brahmins who are eternalistic with
regard to certain things, they declare the world as well as soul as partly eternal {they
declare that the world as well as soul is partly eternal}.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 230

17. So kho ahaṁ aggivessāna oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāretvā balaṁ gahetvā vivicceva
kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ
pītisukhaṁ pathamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. M I 247.
Oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāretvā ~ having eaten gross food
Balaṁ gahetvā ~ becoming strong
Vivicceva kāmehi ~ being secluded from sensualities
Vivicca akusalehi dhammehi ~ being secluded from unwholesome states
Savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ
upasampajja ~ being endowed with first jhāna with vitakka and vicāra, produced by
detachment, possessed of rapture and ease,
Agginvessāna so ahaṁ vihāsiṁ ~ Aggivessāna, I dwelt.

Y
18. Idha bhikkhave ekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti
‘otiṇṇo’mhi jātiyā jarāmaraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi
upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa

SR dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. M I 192.

agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito (pp.) hoti ~ has gone forth from homelife
to homeless life
Saddhā (f.) faith, saddhā + ā (abl.) > saddhā ~ due to faith
Here, oh monks, some young son of family has gone forth from homelife to
.I
homeless life due to faith, (having thought)
Otiṇṇa (pp.) ava √tar + na ~ crossed over, beset with
“I am beset with birth, decay, death, sorrow, lamentation, physical pain, mental
pain, and despair, I am beset with suffering, and invaded with suffering,
EN

Appeva nāma (it would be better if) + Optative verb

It would be better if the end of this whole mass of suffering (would) be known.”

20 Sep 2023
19. Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū bhagavato cīvarakammaṁ karonti
‘niṭṭhitacīvaro bhagavā temāsaccayena cārikaṁ pakkamissatī’ti. M I 428.
V

Cīvarakamma ~ robe-making
Cīvarakammaṁ karoti ~ makes robe-making = works in robe-making, is
busy with robe-making.
Niṭṭhitacīvara (adj.) whose robe has been made
Temāsa + accayena ~ after three months
Cārikaṁ pakkamati ~ sets out for a long journey
Pa √kam + a + ti {k > kk (√kam = √kram)} > pakkamati
At that time, many monks are busy with robe-making for the Blessed One,
(having thought) that the Blessed One whose robe has been made will set out for a long
journey after three months.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 231

20. Assosi kho bhagavā dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhikāya atikkanta-mānusikāya

bhāradvājagottassa brahmaṇassa māgadhiyena paribbājakena saddhiṁ imaṁ
sallāpaṁ kataṁ. M I 502.
Assosi < (a)√su + (s)i {su = śru ~ s > ss, u > o} ~ heard
Visuddhika ~ purified
Atikkanta < ati √kam + ta {k > kk, m > n} surpassed
Mānusika ~ belonging to human
Māgadhiya ~ living in Magadha
Sallāpa ~ conversation
Bhagavā dibbāya sotadhātuyā imaṁ sallāpaṁ assosi.
The Blessed One with element of divine ear purified and surpassed humen’s ear,

Y
heard this conversation of the brahmin of Bāradvāja-clan, talked with the wandering
ascetic living in Magadha.

SR
21. Katamo ca gahapati puggalo neva attantapo nātta-paritāpanānuyogamanuyutto,
yo anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto
sukhapaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati? M I 412.
Attan + tapas ~self-tormentor
Na + atta + paritāpana + anuyogaṁ + anuyutto
.I
Anuyogaṁ anuyutto ~ practising
Attaparitāpana ~ self-tormenting
neva attantapo nātta-paritāpanānuyogamanuyutto ~ who is neither
self-tormentor nor practising self-tormenting
EN

Na + attantapo > anattantapo ~ not a self-tormentor

Na + paraṁ + tapo > aparantapo ~ not a tormentor of others
Nis + chāta > nicchāta (adj.) having no craving
Nibbuto ~ calmed, pleased
Sītībhuta ~ cooled
Sukhapaṭisaṁvedin ~ experienced bliss
V

Katamo puggalo + neve attantapo …..

Katamo puggalo + yo viharati ← anattantapo….

Householder, which person is neither a self-tormentor nor practising

self-tormenting, one who is not a tormentor of oneself or other, desireless,
calmed, cooled, and dwells experiencing bliss, being himself a noble one in this
very life?

22 Sep 2023
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 232

22. Dhammānudhammapaṭipannassa bhikkhuno ayamanudhammo hoti

veyyākaraṇāya ‘dhammānudhammapaṭipannoyanti. Bhāsamāno dhammaññeva
bhāsati no adhammaṁ, vitakkayamāno dhammavitakkaññeva vitakketi no
adhammavitakkaṁ. Tadubhavaṁ ca abhinivajjetvā upekkhako viharati sato
sampajāno. Iti 81.

(a) Dhammānudhammapaṭipannassa bhikkhuno ayamanudhammo hoti

veyyākaraṇāya ‘dhammānudhammapaṭipanno’(yan)ti.
Ayaṁ + anudhammo
Ayaṁ {dhammānudhammapaṭipannassa} bhikkhuno
{“dhammānudhammapaṭipanno”ti} veyyākaraṇāya anudhammo hoti.
{(because he has practised the Dhamma) this is proper to the monk (who

Y
follows the Dhamma) to declare “I am a follower of the Dhamma”}
Veyyākaraṇa (explanation, answer) + āya (for)
Yaṁ ~ yena kāraṇena anudhammena (Cty)

SR (b) Bhāsamāno dhammaññeva bhāsati no adhammaṁ, vitakkayamāno

dhammavitakkaññeva vitakketi no adhammavitakkaṁ.
When he speaks, he just speaks right (speech), not wrong one, when he
considers he just consider right thought, not wrong thought.
.I
(c) Tadubhayaṁ ca abhinivajjetvā upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno.
after avoiding these two ways, he also dwells being equanimous, mindful, and
thoughtful.
- Abhi + ni √vajj + e + tvā ~ having avoided
EN

- Dhammānudhammapaṭipanna (adj) who has got into the path of Dhamma

in its fullness ~ who has followed the Dhamma in accordance with
Dhamma
- Veyyākaraṇa ~ explanation, answer
- Upekkhaka (adj.) neutral, equanimous
- Sata (adj.) mindful
V

- Sampajāna (adj.) ~ thoughtful, being aware of

23. Tesu eko pānīyatthāya agantvā attano pānīyaṁ rakkhamāno itarassa tumbato
pivitvā sayaṁ araññā nikkhamitvā nahāyitvā ṭhito, ‘atthi nu kho me
kāyadvārādīhi ajja kiñci pāpaṁ katanti upadhārento thenetvā pānīyassa
pītabhāvaṁ disvā saṁvegappatto hutvā ayaṁ vaḍḍhamānā maṁ apāyesu
khipissati, imaṁ kilesaṁ niggaṇhissāmī’ti pānīyassa thenetvā pītabhāvaṁ
ārammaṇaṁ katvā vipassanaṁ vaḍḍhetvā paccekabodhiñāṇaṁ nibbattetvā
paṭiladdhañāṇaṁ āvajjento aṭṭhāsi. J, A, IV 114.
- Tumba ~ a pot
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 233

- Saṁvegappatta (adj.) ~ reached agitation

- Tesu eko ~ one of them

- pānīyatthāya agantvā ~ did not go for the sake of drinking water
- attano pānīyaṁ rakkhamāno ~ maintained his own drinking water,
- itarassa tumbato pivitvā ~ drunk from other’s pot
- sayaṁ araññā nikkhamitvā ~ left the forest by himself
- nahāyitvā ṭhito, took a shower and stood.
- ‘atthi nu kho me kāyadvārādīhi ajja kiñci pāpaṁ katanti upadhārento ~
while reflecting (himself) ‘today, is there any evil deed bodily, verbally or
mentally done by me?’ [kāyadvāra + ādi]
- thenetvā pānīyassa pītabhāvaṁ disvā ~ saw ‘(the evil of) stealing and

Y
drinking water’
- saṁvegappatto hutvā ~ (had) reached religious emotion
- ‘ayaṁ vaḍḍhamānā maṁ apāyesu khipissati, imaṁ kilesaṁ

SR niggaṇhissāmī’ti (cintetvā) ~ thought ‘this evil will increase and throw

me down in woeful states, I will oppress this defilement’
- pānīyassa thenetvā pītabhāvaṁ ārammaṇaṁ katvā ~ took the object of
(the evil) ‘stealing water and drinking’
- vipassanaṁ vaḍḍhetvā ~ developed insight meditation
.I
- paccekabodhiñāṇaṁ nibbattetvā ~ arose (attained) the knowledge of lesser
Enlightenment,
- paṭiladdhañāṇaṁ āvajjento aṭṭhāsi. ~ stood reflecting the knowledge that
he obtained.
EN

25 Sep 2023
24. Atha naṁ mahāsatto ‘kiṁ pana tvaṁ samma maṁ attano atthāya bandhi udāhu
aññassāṇattiyā’ti pucchitvā tena tasmiṁ kāraṇe ārocite, ‘kinnu kho me itova
cittakūṭaṁ gantuṁ seyyo udāhu nagaran’ti vīmaṁsanto ‘mayi nagaraṁ gate
luddaputto dhanaṁ labhissati deviyā dohaḷo paṭippassambhissati sumukhassa
mittadhammo pākaṭo bhavissati, tathā mama ñāṇabalena khemañca saraṁ
V

abhayadakkhiṇaṁ katvā labhissāmi, tasmā nagarameva gantuṁ seyyo’ti

sanniṭṭhānaṁ katvā luddaṁ ‘amhe kājenādāya rañño santikaṁ nehi, sace rājā
vissajjetukāmo bhavissati, vissajjissatī’ti āha. J, A, IV, 427.

Atha naṁ mahāsatto (obj.) pucchitvā ārocite (obj.) vīmaṁsanto sanniṭṭhānaṁ

katvā (obj. + obj.) āha. ~ then a great being asked him, if (it) is said, while investigating,
determined, and said.

- Atha naṁ mahāsatto ~ then a great being

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 234

- ‘kiṁ pana tvaṁ samma maṁ attano atthāya bandhi udāhu aññassāṇattiyā’ti
pucchitvā ~ asked ‘friend, did you tied me for your own business or for other’s
order?’
- tena tasmiṁ kāraṇe ārocite, ~ when the fact is replied by him {the hunter}
- ‘kinnu kho me itova cittakūṭaṁ gantuṁ seyyo udāhu nagaran’ti vīmaṁsanto ~
while investigating (himself) ‘for me, from here is it better to go back to
Cittakūṭa or to a town?’
- ‘mayi nagaraṁ gate luddaputto dhanaṁ labhissati, deviyā dohaḷo
paṭippassambhissati, sumukhassa mittadhammo pākaṭo bhavissati, tathā mama
ñāṇabalena khemañca saraṁ abhayadakkhiṇaṁ katvā labhissāmi, tasmā
nagarameva gantuṁ seyyo’ti sanniṭṭhānaṁ katvā ~ decided ‘when I go to a
town, a young hunter will gain property, the loning of the queen will be allayed,

Y
Sumukha’s friendly duty will become obvious, similarly with the virtue of my
intelligence, I will make the Khema lake as a safe-gift and obtain, therefore, it is
just better to go to the town’
-
SR
luddaṁ ‘amhe kājenādāya rañño santikaṁ nehi, sace rājā vissajjetukāmo
bhavissati, vissajjissatī’ti āha. ~ said to the hunter ‘take us with (your) carrying
pole and bring to a king, if the king wishes to release, he will release.’

25. Tena kho pana samayena bārāṇasiyaṁ suppiyo ca upāsako suppiyā ca upāsikā
.I
ubho pasannā honti dāyakā kārakā saṁghupaṭṭhākā. Atha kho suppiyā upāsikā
ārāmaṁ gantvā vihārena vihāraṁ pariveṇena pariveṇaṁ upasaṅkamitvā bhikkhū
pucchati, ‘ko bhante gilāno, kassa kiṁ āharīyatū’ti. Vin I 216.
EN

- Tena kho pana samayena bārāṇasiyaṁ suppiyo ca upāsako suppiyā ca upāsikā

ubho pasannā honti dāyakā kārakā saṁghupaṭṭhākā. ~ at that time, in Bārāṇasī,
the layman Suppiya and laywoman Suppiyā are both devoted, donors, those who
give service, and the attendances of the Saṁgha.
- Atha kho suppiyā upāsikā ārāmaṁ gantvā vihārena vihāraṁ pariveṇena
pariveṇaṁ upasaṅkamitvā bhikkhū pucchati, ‘ko bhante gilāno, kassa kiṁ
V

āharīyatū’ti. ~ then laywoman Suppiyā goes to the park, approaches from a

dwelling place to a dwelling place, from a room to a room, and askes the monks
‘Sir, who is sick?, for whom what should be brought?’
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 235

27 Sep 2023
Lesson 36
Syntax
A noun is placed in one case or in another depending on its relation to a verb,
another noun, an adjective, a preposition, or a prepositional adverb. The only exception
is the vocative case, which usually stands by itself.
(A grammar of the Pali Language, Ven. Perniola, P.150)

Nominative Syntactic Relation/ Function

(1) To express the stem form (liṅga) ~ buddho, cittaṁ, itthī
(2) To express the subject of the active verb.

Y
E.g., so puriso nisīdati. The man sits down.
Buddho dhammaṁ deseti. The Buddha expounds the Dhamma.
Subject = kattar < √kar + tar ~ doer (of the action)

SR
Accusative Syntactic Relation/ Function
(1) To express the direct object of the active verb/ participle and so on.
E.g., buddho dhammaṁ deseti. The Buddha expouds the Dhamma.
Object = kamma ~ work < √kar + ma {what is done}
Buddho dhammaṁ desitavā. The Buddha has expounded the Dhamma.
.I
(2) To express the goal of motion.
E.g., puriso gāmaṁ gato. The man went to the village.

(3) To express duration of time.

EN

E.g., satta me vassāni lohitakumbhiyaṁ vutthāni. I lived in a vessel of blood

(womb) for seven years.
Imasmiṁ vihāre imaṁ temāsaṁ vassaṁ upemi. I (will) live in this
dwelling place for these three months.

(4) To express extension of space

V

E.g., ābhā yojanaṁ phuṭā ahosi. The light had spread (for) about a league.

(5) These roots ‘√si’, to lie down, ‘√ṭhā’, to stand, ‘√vas’, to dwell, ‘ni +√sad’, to
sit, compounded with these prefixes; adhi, anu, ā, upa, abhi govern the
accusative case.
E.g., √ṭhā ~ to stand
adhi √ṭhā ~ to attend to
Pāpaniko kammantaṁ adhiṭṭhāti. The shopkeeper attends to (his) work.

Ni √sad ~ to sit ~ mañce nisīdati ~ he sits down on bed.

PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 236

Abhi + ni √sad ~ abhinisīdati ~ sits down.

Mañcaṁ abhinisīdati. He sits on a bed.

√vas ~ to dwell ~ gehe vasati ~ he dwells in a house.

Ā + √vas ~ to dwell ~ āvasati. He dwells.
Gharaṁ āvasanto ~ dwelling in a house.

Ud + √pad ~ to be born, to appear ~ buddho loke uppajjati. The Buddha

appears in the world.
Upa + √pad ~ to be born in~ upapajjati. He is born in
Saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. He is born in a heaven world.

Y
(6) The prefix ‘adhi’, ‘pati’ stand as a preposition and govern the accusative case.
E.g., suriyaṁ pati ~ towards the sun

SR 29 Sep 2023

(7) The indeclinables ‘anto, tiro, abhito, parito, samantā, dhī, vinā, antarā, uddissa,
upanidhāya, paṭicca, āgamma,’ and the like govern the accusative case.
.I
Anto (indec.) ~ inside, into
E.g., anto gāmaṁ ~ inside the village
Anto gehaṁ ~ into the house
Anto jālaṁ ~ into the net
EN

N.B anto governs the locative case as well

E.g., anto gabbhe ~ into the chamber
Anto gehe ~ into the house
Anto vasse ~ in the rainy season
Anto sattāhe ~ inside of a week
V

Tiro (indec.)~ outside, beyond, over, across

E.g., tiro pabbataṁ ~ across the mountain
Tiro pākāraṁ ~ outside the fence

Abhito (adv.) ~ round about, near, in the presence of

E.g., uyyānabhūmiṁ abhito ~ by the grove, near the grove
Abhito gāmaṁ ~ round about the village

Parito (adv.) ~ round about

E.g., parito gāmaṁ ~ round about the village
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 237

N.B., found just it with the locative case in Pāḷi canon.

E.g., parito parito janapadesu ~ round about the countrysides
Parito gāmesu ~ round about the villages

Samantā {samanta (adj.) + abl. ā}~ round about

E.g., samantā vesāliṁ ~ round about Vesālī

N.B., with the locative also

E.g., samantā cakkavāḷesu ~ all round the universe

Dhī (indec.)~ shame, woe, fie, disgust {an exclamation of reproach and disgust}
E.g., dhī brāhmaṇassa hantāraṁ ~ shame on him, the killer of the

Y
brahmin.
Dhīratthu’maṁ pūtikāyaṁ {dhī + atthu + imaṁ pūtikāyaṁ} ~
disgust on this foul body

SR
Vinā (indec.)~ except, without, apart from {+ acc./ inst./ abl.}
E.g., na sakkā hi taṁ vinā ~ it is not possible (to do) without him/ that.
Purisehi vinā ~ without men
Antarā {antara (adj.) + abl. ā} ~ between, inside, during {acc./ gen./ loc.}
.I
E.g., antarā ca rājagahaṁ antarā ca nālandaṁ ~ between R. and N.
Antarā magge ~ on the road
Bhikkhuniyā antarā ~ inside the nun
EN

Uddissa (ger ~ adv.) {< ud √dis + ya} ~ as a ger ~ having pointed out, (adv.
pre.p) ~ on account of, with reference to
E.g., bhagavantaṁ uddissa ~ on account of the Lord

Upanidhāya (ger ~ prep.) {< upa + ni √dhā + ya} ~ compared with

E.g., himavantaṁ pabbatarājānaṁ upanidhāya ~ compared with
V

Himalayas, the king of mountains

02 Oct 2023
Upanissāya {upa + nis √si + a īya} ~ depending on, relying on
√si + a + ti > sayati ~ sayitvā
E.g., na ca pūraṇaṁ kassapaṁ sāvakā upanissāya viharanti ~ and the
disciples do not dwell depending on Pūraṇa Kassapa.
Nissāya (nis √si + a + ya) ~ on, near
E.g., pāsāṇa-piṭṭhiṁ nissāyo ~ on a top of the rock.
E.g., sāvatthiṁ nissāya ~ near Sāvatthi
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 238

Upādāya {upa + ā √dā + ya} ~ taking it up (lit), out of, as, for, according to,
compared with
E.g., anukampaṁ upādāya ~ out of pity,
Kālaṁ ca samayaṁ ca upādāya ~ according to time and
convenience,
Manussalokaṁ upādāya ~ compared with the world of men.

Paṭicca {paṭi √i + (t)ya} ~ on account of

E.g., cakkhuṁ ca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṁ ~ seeing
consciousness arises on account of eye base and visible forms.

Āgamma {ā √gam + ya} ~ referring to, concerning, about

Y
Ārabbha {ā √rabh + ya} ~
E.g., kiṃ āgamma kiṁ ārabbha ~ depending on what?

SRSkt. √argh ~ (a) √aggh {rgh > ggh},

worth, to deserve
(b) √arah {ar(g)h > ar(a)h} ~ to be

-agghati, arahati ~ to be worth, to deserve,

E.g., kalaṁ nagghati soḷasiṃ ~ it is not worth 16th part of kalā.
.I
Paṭibhāti ~ paṭi √bhā + ti ~ to be bright, ~ to come to one’s mind
E.g., paṭibhāti maṁ bhagavā ~ it is revealed to me, Lord.
Upamā maṁ paṭibhāti ~ the simile comes to my mind.
Maṁ paṭibhāti pañhaṁ pucchituṁ ~ a question to ask comes to my
EN

mind.
Dassana + āya ~ for seeing = to see
√dis > dass + ana
√dṛś {ṛ > ar} > darś {rś > ss} > dass + ana > dassana ~ seeing
E.g., bhagavantaṁ dassanāya ~ for seeing the Lord, to see the Lord
{bhagavantassa dassanaṁ}
V

{ariyasaccānaṁ dassanaṁ}
Akālo dāni tathāgataṁ yācanāya ~ it is not the right time for asking
the Tathāgata, to ask the Tathāgata.

Adj. + Acc. = adv.

E.g., sukha (adj.) happy, comfortable, easy
Sukhaṁ (adv.) happily, comfortably, at ease

Dīgha (adj.) ~ long

Dīghaṁ (adv.) ~ long
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 239

Cognate object ~ having the same meaning and source with the verb, at least the
same meaning
~ āhāraṁ āhāreti ~ eats
~ vitakkaṁ vitakketi ~ thinks
~ cārikaṁ carati ~ travels
~ jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamati ~ walks up and down

04 Oct 2023
Instrumental Case
(a) to express the instrument while performing an action
E.g., yānena gantvā ~ going by a vehicle.
Cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā ~ seeing the visible form with an eye.

Y
(b) to express an agent of passive verb.
E.g., buddhena desito dhammo ~ the Dhamma expounded by the Buddha

(c)
on
SR
In connection with some indeclinable particles such as ‘saha, saddhiṁ,’ and so

E.g., isidāsiyā saha na vacchaṁ ~ I will not live together with Isidāsi.
{√vas + ssaṁ [sss > ss > cch] > vacchaṁ}
.I
Bhikkhusaṁghena saddhiṁ ~ together with the company of monks.
Vinā daṇḍena ~ without a stick
Aññatra tathāgatena ~ without the Perfect One
Rāgena samo aggi nāma natthi ~ there is no fire like lust.
EN

(d) In connection with the words that express defects in limbs

E.g., akkhiṇā kāṇo ~ blind of one eye.
Pādena khañjo ~ lame of one foot ~ bow-legged, bandylegged

(e) The family names govern the instrumental case. {Khattiya, Gotama}
V

E.g., khattiyo jātiyā … gottena gotamo ~ the Lord is a warrior caste by birth,
Gotama by family.
Sippena vaḍḍhakī ~ as a profession, he is a carpenter.
Vayasā ekūnattiṃso ~ by age, he is 29.
Suvaṇṇena abhirūpo ~ in golden appearance he is handsome.
Tidaṇḍakena tāpaso ~ an ascetic with a tripod
A man with the black coat

(f) The direction in which sth exists is expressed by the Inst. {loc. meaning}
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 240

E.g., puratthimena dhataraṭṭho, dakkhiṇena virūḷhako, pacchimena virūpakkho

~ Dhataraṭṭha in the east, Virūḷhaka in the south, Virūpakkha in the west.
Uttarena kapivanto ~ Kapivanta {is situated} in the north.

(g) The words expressing direction is put in Inst. case followed by Acc. case.
E.g., uttarena setabyaṁ ~ to the north of Setabya.
(h) The words ‘aṭṭīyati, harāyati, jigucchati’ and the like are used with the nouns in
instrumental case.
E.g., iddhipāṭihāriyena aṭṭīyāmi harāyāmi jigucchāmi ~ I loathe, abhor, and am
ashamed of the wonderer of manifestation.

(i) The time during which something happens is expressed by Inst.

Y
E.g., Tena samayena buddho bhagavā nerañjarāyaṁ viharati ~ during that time
the Lord Buddha was staying nearby the river Nerañjara.

(j)
SR To express the proper time inst. is used
E.g., kālena dhammasavanaṁ ~ listening to the Dhamma at proper time
Dhammasavanakālo ayaṁ bhaddantā ~ Sir, this is the proper time for
listening to the Dhamma.
.I
√gam (to go) – ā √gam (to come)
√yā (to go)
√i (to go) – ā √i (to come)
EN

eti ~ he goes, he comes.

√i > e + ti > eti ~ he goes.
ā √i > e + ti > eti ~ he comes.

06 Oct 2023
(k) in connection with some words such as ‘pubba’ and so on
V

Pubba ~ before
E.g., māsena pubbo ~ a month before
Sama, sadisa, tulya ~ similar, equal, like
E.g., agginā samo rāgo ~ lust like fire
Matarā sadiso ~ like a mother
Pitarā tulyo ~ like a father

Puṇṇa ~ full of
E.g., annena puṇṇo ~ full of alms
Sampanna, samannāgata ~ endowed with
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 241

E.g., pañcahi aṅgehi samannāgato ~ endowed with five factors

Vijjāhi ca caraṇehi ca sampanno ~ endowed with knowledges and
practices

attha (there is a need of) {person-dat. + state/thing-inst. + attho}

· sace te bhante piṇḍakena attho... M I.380 “if Sir, there is a need of alms for
you ...”;
· attho me gahapati hirañña-suvaṇṇena D II.176 “there is a need of gold and
wealth, householder, for me”;
· na ca me attho tādisena purisena S I.99 “to me there is no use of such a
person”.

Y
(l) In some examples the instrumental case can be understood in other cases’
meaning.
Nominative meaning

(m)
SR
E.g., attanā attānaṁ sammanati. ~ he selectes himself.
Accusative meaning
E.g., tilehi khette vapati. He sows sasame in the field.

‘at what price’ expressed by Inst.

.I
E.g., satena kīto dāso ~ a slave bought for a hundred pieces.

(n) The agent of infinitive verbs going together with the particles ‘sakkā’, able,
‘labbhā’, possible, is expressed by Inst sometimes.
EN

E.g., na hi sakkā supantena koci attho pāpuṇituṁ. ~ a sleeping one is not able
to attain any success. [any success is not possible to be obtained by a sleeping one]
E.g., na labbhā tayā pabbajituṁ. ~ you are not possible to be ordained.

Pa √ap + uṇā + (i)tuṁ > pāpuṇituṁ ~ to attain

Pa √vaj + (i)tuṁ > pabbajituṁ ~ to ordain
V

When Infinitive word with -tuṁ goes with ‘sakkā’ and ‘labbhā’it sometimes can
be understood in passive sense.

Active ~ na hi sakkā supanto {subj. nom.} kiñci atthaṁ {obj. acc.} pāpuṇituṁ ~
a sleeping one is not able to attain any success.
Passive ~ na hi sakkā supantena {subj. Inst.} koci attho {obj. nom.} pāpuṇituṁ.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 242

Dative Case
Sampadāna {saṁ + pa √dā + ana}~ a person/ a thing to that something is
offered (lit.); recipient (understandable); indirect object (Eng- Grammar)
(a) dative case expresses ‘recipient, indirecto object’ of some verbs.
√dā ~ to give, to provide, to offer
E.g., bhikkhussa cīvaraṁ dadāti. ~ he offers a robe to a monk.

Ā √ruc ~ to inform, to report

E.g., bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ. ~ monks informed this matter
to the Lord.

(b) In special connection with some verbs dative case is used.

Y
√kudh ~ to get angry
E.g., Tassa kujjhāhi. ~ you may get angry with him.

SR
Pa √sad ~ to have faith, to be devoted, to be pleased
E.g., evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ bhoto gotamassa. ~ thus I am pleased with the ven.
Gotama.

(c) In connection with some words dative case is used.

.I
Alaṁ ~ what is the use of {alaṁ + person-dat. + state/thing-inst.}
E.g., alaṁ te idha vāsena. ~ what is the use of living here for you.

Namo ~ homage
EN

E.g., namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa. Homage to Him, to

the Lord, to the Worthy One, to the Fully Self-Enlightened One.

sotthi/ suvatthi ~ safety

E.g., sotthi te hotu sabbadā. ~ may there be safety all the time for you!
V

Svāgata {su + āgata} ~ well coming = welcome

E.g., svāgataṁ te hotu ~ may there be well coming to you! = you’re welcome!

09 Oct 2023
Ablative Case
Ablative Case is used to express
- Starting Point
- Cause
- Separation
- Distance
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 243

- In connection with some prepositions

- Comparison

E.g., so suppārakā pakkāmi. He departed from Suppārāka.

Pakkamati < pa √kam + a + ti ~ to go away

So agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji. He went forth from the household life

to the homeless life.
Pabbajati < pa √vraj + a + ti {vr > vv > bb} ~ to become a religious
person
Agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati ~ to go forth from home to homelessness

Y
Kacchehi sedā muccanti. Sweat comes out of armpits.

Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā ~ because of avijjā saṅkhāras arise.

SR Sāno bhojanā vārenti sūkare. Dogs derive off swine from their crib.

Upajjhāyā antaradhāyati sisso. A student hides himself from his teacher.

.I
Sīlaṁ eva sutā seyyo. Good conduct is higher than learning.

Ayaṁ eva tato mahantataro kaṭaggaho. ~ this is the winning throw greater
than that.
EN

Uddhaṁ (upward), adho (below), ārā, ārakā (far), oraṁ (within), vinā
(without), yāva, ā (as far as), purā (before), aññatra (except), paraṁ (after),

Uddhaṁ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā ~ from the sole of the feet upward
to the crown of the head.
V

Ārā te āsavakkhayā. They are far from the destruction of passions.

Ārakā saṁghamhā ~ far from the Order.

Ārakā te moghapurisā imasmā dhammavinayā. ~ those foolish men are
far from this Dhamma and Vinaya.
Oraṁ vassa-satāpi mīyati. ~ even within a hundred years does one die.
Ā brahmalokā. ~ as far as the brahma world.
Yāva brahmalokā. ~ as far as the brahma world.
Purā aruṇā. ~ before dawn.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 244

Kiṃ aññatara adassanā. ~ what else but from not seeing.

Paraṁ maraṇā. ~ after death.

Upadhinidānā pabhavanti dukkhā. ~ ills come to be because of upadhis.

Saha parinibbānā bhagavato. ~ immediately after demise of the Lord.

Saha vacanā ca pana bhagavato. ~ as soon as the Lord told that.

Sammukhā ca sutaṁ sammukhā ca paṭiggahitaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa.

~from the recluse Gotama himself have I heard and accepted.

Sahatthā santappesi. ~ with his own hand, he served and satisfied the

Y
monks.

11 Oct 2023

SR
Genitive Case
- Possessive ~ Sāmi
- Relation ~ Sambandha
- Other Cases’ Meaning
- Genitive with Adjective
.I
- Genitive with Adverb
- Genitive Absolute Construction

E.g., anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme ~ in the grove of Anāthapiṇḍika (possessive/ relation)

EN

Yāvadeva anatthāya ñattaṁ bālassa jāyati. ~ that which is learnt by the unwise is
conducive to his own destruction. (inst.’s meaning)

Kalyāṇamittassa etaṁ, meghiya, bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṁ ~ it is to be expected,

Meghiya, by a monk who provides with good friends. (inst.’s meaning)
V

Hiraññasuvaṇṇassa puñjaṁ ~ a heap of bullion and gold. (relation)

In Connection with some adjectives such as kusala, kovida, kevalin, sadisa,

and the like;

E.g., kusalā naccagītassa. ~ cleaver at dancing and singing.

Dhammassa akovidā. ~ not skilled in the Dhamma.
Maggāmaggassa kovidā ~ skilled in right and wrong ways.
Brahmacariyassa kevalī ~ perfected in Higher life.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 245

Sadiso me na vijjati. ~ there is nobody equal to me.

Puttā me atthi ~ I have sons.

With agent noun or adjectives ending in these suffixes; aka, āvin, in, and -tar
{Object or Subject of them}
E.g., ariyānaṁ upavādakā ~ scoffers at the Holy Ones. {upa √vad + aka}
Ariyānaṁ adassāvī ~ having not seen the Holy Ones. {na √dis + āvin}
Lābhī annassa pānassa ~ one who receives food and drink. {√labh + in}
Kilamathassa bhāgī ~ coming in for distress. {√bhaj + in}
Yaññassa yājetā ~ one who officiates for him at the sacrifice. {√yaj + (ṇ)e + tar}
Migassa hantā/ migaṁ hantā ~ a hunter of the deer. {√han + tar}
kammassa/ kammaṁ kattā ~ a performer of the action. {√kar + tar}

Y
In Connection with some verbs; pūrati (is full), dussati (offends),
appamaññati (thinks little), tasati, bhāyati (fears, is afraid), and so on

SR
E.g., pūrati bālo pāpassa. ~ the fool is full of evil.
Mā’ppamaññetha puññassa. ~ one should not think little of good.
Sabbe tasanti daṇḍassa. ~ all are afraid of punishment.
Sabbe bhāyanti maccuno. ~ all are afraid of death.
.I
In Connection with action nouns / abstract nouns derived from verbal root
+ ana/ (ṇ)a
E.g., sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṁ. ~ not doing any evil deed. {na √kar + ana}
Kusalassa upasampadā ~ being endowed with good dee. {upa + saṁ √pad +
EN

(ṇ)a} = upasampajjati
Evametaṁ purāṇānaṁ sahāyānaṁ ahu saṅgamo. ~ such was this meeting of the
ancient friends. {saṁ √gam + (ṇ}a) = saṅgacchati
Taṇhānaṁ khayaṁ. ~ destruction of cravings. {√khī + (ṇ)a} = khayati

In connection with the words denoting campass/ direction

V

E.g., uttaraṁ nagarassa ~ to the north of the city.

Pācīnato rājagahassa ~ to the east of Rājagaha.
Puratthimato nagarassa ~ to the east of the city.

In Connection with some adverbial prepositions such as antarā, antarena,

sammukhā, santike, samīpe, avidūre, accayena, and the like
E.g., antarena yamakasālānaṁ ~ between the twin Sal trees.
Antarā satthīnaṁ ~ between the thighs.
Tassa me saṁghassa sammukhā sutaṁ ~ I have heard from the presence of the
company of monks.
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 246

Santike maraṇaṁ tava. ~ near your death.

Mama accayena ~ after my death.
Tassā rattiyā accayena ~ at the end of that night.
Tiṇṇaṁ māsānaṁ accayena ~ after three months.
Bhagavato avidūre ~ not far from the Lord.

13 Oct 2023
Niddhāraṇa - Niddhāraṇīya ~ Collective - Part Relation
Samūha - Avayava ~ Whole - Part Relation
E.g., tiṇṇaṁ kammānaṁ manokammaṁ sāvajjataraṁ ~ of three deeds, the deed of
mind is the most blamable.

Y
E.g., kiṁ sippānaṁ aggaṁ ~ which of crafts is chief?

E.g., cātuddasī pañcadasī aṭṭhamī ca pakkhassa ~ the 14th, 15th, and 8th day of the

SR
half-month.

E.g., telassa yāvadatthaṁ pivitvā ~ having drunk oil as much as he could

E.g., kati jāgarataṁ (jāgarantānaṁ) suttā ~ how many of the awake are sleepy?
.I
E.g., etesaṁ gandhajātānaṁ sīlagandho anuttaro. ~ among these varieties of
perfume, the perfume of virtue is supreme one.
EN

Absolute Construction
No. Subj. Predicate (participles)
01. Nom. Nom. {Nominative Absolute}
E.g., buddho dhammaṁ desento ~ while the B. is expounding the D.
02. Acc. Acc. {Accusative Absolute}
E.g., paraṁ lokaṁ samānaṁ ~ if there is other world
V

03. Gen. Gen. {Genitive Absolute}

E.g., puttassa rodantassa ~ while a child is crying
04. Loc. Loc. {Locative Absolute}
E.g., deve vuṭṭhe ~ while it is raining

Locative
(a) Local & Temporal {place and time}
E.g., bhikkhū abbhokāse caṅkamanti. ~ monks walk up and down in the open air.
Bhagavā anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme viharati. ~ the Lord dwells in the park of
Anāthapiṇḍika.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 247

Mameva tasmiṁ samaye anussareyyātha. ~ on that occasion, you do call me to

your mind.
Ayaṁ hi devaputto pubbe manussabhūto samāno ~ this deity being a human one
in the past.

(b) In Special Connection with Some verbs, locative case is used to denote their
object
E.g., buddhe pasīdati. He is devoted to the B./ He is pleased with the B.
Buddhe kaṅkhati. He has doubt about the B.
Sīho’va saddesu asantasanto ~ like a lion, not feeling fear of sounds
Rūpe snehaṁ na kubbaye.~ one should not dote on a visible form.
Saṁghe ca tibbagāravo. ~ and having deep respect to the Order.

Y
Atthi me tumhesu anukampā. I have sympathy for you.
Yo …. adaṇḍesu dussati. ~ whosoever offends against the harmless

hair.SR Ghaṭikāro jotipālaṁ kesesu parāmasitvā ~ Ghaṭikāra touching Jotipāla on his

Coraṁ cūḷāya gaṇhitvā ~ having seizing the thief by top knot

Chabbaggiyā bhikkhū gāvīnaṁ visāṇesupi gaṇhanti. Chabbaggiya monks catch
hold of cows even by their horns.
.I
Naṁ seṭṭhī sīse cumbitvā ~ the guild-master having kissed her on her head.
Tassa so alagaddo hatthe vā bāhāya vā aññatrasmiṁ vā aṅgapaccaṅge
ḍaseyya. ~ a snake would bite him on his hand, arm, or other part of the body.
Paccekabuddhe aparajjitvā ~ having offended the Silent Buddha.
EN

Puttesu dāresu ca yā apekkhā ~ fond of sons and wives.

16 Oct 2023
(c) To denote the sense of “among, amidst”
Evaṁ nindāpasaṁsāsu na samiñjanti paṇḍitā. ~ the wise will not falter among
praise and blame.
V

Danto seṭṭho manussesu. ~ the tamed one is the best among men.

(d) To denote a person in whom sth is done in connection with some verbs;
Bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi. ~ I will live the Higher life under the
guidance of the Lord.
Kathaṁ mayaṁ bhante tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjāma. ~ How should we treat
the remains of the Perfect One?
Dvīsu bhikkhave sammā paṭipajjamāno paṇḍito … bahuṁ puññaṁ pasavati. ~
Monks, the wise one who behaves rightly towards two persons begets much merit.
Sattesu vippaṭipajjanti. ~ they wrongly behave towards living beings.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 248

Suddhavāsesu devesu antarahito. ~ having vanished from the Devas of Pure

Abodes.

(d) In connection with some adjectives; such as kovida, kusala, and so on

Kusalo vīṇāya tantissare. ~ were you clever at the lute’s stringed music?

(e) To express the cause;

Omasavāde pācittiyaṁ. On account of insulting speech there is an offence of
expiation.

(f) In expression the sense “with regard to, in regard to, as regards, with respect to”
Pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhuṁ udapādi. ~ the vision arose in me in

Y
regard to things not heard by me before.

(g) In absolute construction

away
SRParinibbute bhagavati ~ when the Lord passed away,
acira-pakkantesu jaṭilesu ~ not long after the ascetics of matted hair had gone

Bhagavatā oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne ~ even when so broad a hint was being
dropped by the Lord. {√kar + (i)ya + māna (r-y > y-r)}
.I
Sāriputtassa vaṇṇē bhaññamāne ~ while the praise of Sāriputta was being uttered
{√bhaṇ + ya + māna (ṇy > ññ)}

Adjectives
EN

(a) adj. = noun {in gender, number, and case}

Pāpakā akusalā dhammā uppajjanti. ~ the mean and unwholesome states rise up
in mind.
Pāpakā and akusalā {nom. Pl. masc.} → dhammā {nom. pl. masc.}

(b) Adj. used as a noun, and takes a case as noun does.

V

Saṁvāsena kho mahārāja sīlaṁ veditabbaṁ, tañca kho paññavatā no

duppaññena. ~ it is by living together with a person that one should learn his moral
conduct, that is only if one is wise, and is not unwise.

(c) But numeral adjectives are different from ordinary adjectives.

Vīsati cittāni ~ 20 minds
Vīsati {fem. nom. sl.} → cittāni {neut. nom. Pl.}
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 249

(d) In Comparison with the Comparative Adjectives, the noun takes abl. or inst.
Mānusakehi kāmehi dibbā kāmā abhikkantatarā paṇītatarā ca. ~ the heavenly
pleasure are more pleasing and more excellent than human pleasures.

(e) In Comparison with the Superlative Adjectives, the noun takes gen. or loc.
Virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṁ. ~ passionlessness is the best of mental states.

Danto seṭṭho manussesu. ~ the tamed one is the best among men.

18 Oct 2023
Pronouns
(a) Personal Pronoun

Y
- 3rd Personal pronoun tad ~ Declinable, Adjective, 3 genders,
- but 1st and 2nd personal pronouns ~ amha, tumha are non-gender, non-adj.,
declinable

SR
E.g., so bhikkhu jahāti ora-pāraṁ. ~ that monk quits bounds both the lower and the
higher ones.
So vippajaheyya mānaṁ. ~ he would abandon conceit.
Ahaṁ dhammaṁ suṇāmi. ~ I listen to the D..
.I
(b) Relative Pronoun ~ yad
(1) Ya → ta {where is ya, there is ta}
- Gender and number of yad is the same as its antecedent ~tad
- Its case is determined by its function in its own sentence.
EN

E.g., ye āsavā saṁkilesikā, pahīnā te tathāgatassa. ~ which are cankers and

defilements, those have been got rid of by Tathāgata.
Yena saṁgho attamano hoti, taṁ karomī’ti āha. ~ he said that by what the Order
becomes pleased, I will do that.
Yā imasmiṁ janapade janapadakalyāṇī, taṁ icchāmi. ~ I long for that (lady) who
is the most beautiful one in this district.
V

(2) Double pronoun with Relative one

Ya ya → ta ta {whosoever, whatsoever}
E.g., so yena yena icchati, tena tena gacchati, yattha yattha icchati, tattha tattha
tiṭṭhati. ~ wherever he likes (to go) there he goes, wherever he likes (to stands) there he
stands.

Yo {relative} koci {indefinite} ~ whosoever, whatsoever, any whatsoever

E.g., yo hi koci bhikkhave ime satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya satta vassāni… ~
whosoever, monks, should develop these applications of mindfulness for seven years.
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 250

Yaṁ kiñci sithilaṁ kammaṁ, ~ whatever perfunctory deed,

Yassa kassaci bhikkhuno ime pañca ceto-khilā pahīnā. ~ by whatever monk
these five forms of mental barrenness are got rid of.

Yo {relative} vā ko {interrogative} vā ~ whosever

E.g., yo vā ko vā ~ whosoever

Yo {relative} vā so {demonstrative} vā ~ whosoever, whatever, [this or that, ordinary]

E.g., yo vā so vā yakkho ~ an ordinary yakkha.

(c) 3 Demonstrative Pronouns; ta, eta, ima/idaṁ

Frequently found as so ahaṁ, so tvaṁ, ayamahaṁ, eso’haṁ, taṁ maṁ, tassa

Y
mayhaṁ, and the like. The preceding pronoun in these example means the sense
‘aforesaid’, ‘mentioned before’.
E.g., so ahaṁ vicarissāmi gāmā gāmaṁ nagarā nagaraṁ. ~ I (who have understood

city.SR
the doctrine as mentioned before) will now go from village to village, and from city to

Sometimes etad and idaṁ/ imam preceded by tad to to emphasize the sense of
succeeding pronoun.
.I
E.g., so eso, so ayaṁ ~ this very same person.

In some place tad means ‘there’, while etad/ idaṁ do ‘here’.

E.g., so dārako gacchati. (there the boy goes)
EN

Eso (ayaṁ) dārako āgacchati. (here this boy comes.)

Double Demonstrative Pronoun ta ta means ‘this or that’, ‘several or various’.

E.g., taṁ taṁ kāraṇaṁ āgamma. ~ concerning this or that / various incidents.

20 Oct 2023
V

Verb
Tenses; Present (vattamāna), Aorist (ajjattanī), Imperfect (hiyyatanī), Past Perfect
(parokkhā), Future (bhavissanti), and Conditional (kālātipatti)
Moods; Indicative, Imperative (pañcamī), Optative (sattamī)
Indicative Mood; Affirmative statement, Negative statement, Interrogative statement.
Affirmative; bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati. The Lord stays in Sāvatthi.
Negative; so paṭhaviṁ na maññati. He does not think the earth in wrong way.
Interrogative; (1) kāyadaṇḍanti, tappasī vadesi? Tapassī, do you say
“kāyadaṇḍa”?
(2) santi te evarūpā ābādhā? Do you have disease like these?
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 251

(3) api nu naṁ brāhmaṇā mante vāceyyuṁ vā na vā? Would these Brahmins
teach their Verses or not?
(4) ko pana bhante hetu? What is the cause, reveard sir?
(5) kattha’dāni so bhagavā viharati? Where does the Lord stay, now?

Present Tense; Simple Present Tense, Present Continuous Tense, Historical Present
Tense, Existing Fact, Nearest Past, and Nearest Future
(1) Simple Present Tense; sadiso me na vijjati. There is no one like me.
(2) Present Continuous Tense; gacchāmi kāsinaṁ pursaṁ. I am going to the city of
Kāsis.
(3) Existing Fact; na hi verena verāni sammantīdha kudācanaṁ. Hatreds are never
calmed down by returning hatred.

Y
(4) Historial Present Tense; tena kho pana samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṁ
viharati. At that time, the Lord Buddha dwells in Verañjā.
(5) Nearest Past; gambhīraṁ bhāsasī vācaṁ. You have just spoken a word of deep

SRmeaning.
(6) Nearest Future; kāyassa bhedā duppañño nirayaṁ so upapajjati. At the body’s
wreck, that foolish person will go to the state of misery.

Past Tense; Aorist, Imperfect, Past Perfect~ āha, āhu, āhaṁsu (frequently found)
.I
Future Tense; action performed in the time yet to come, can, must
E.g., ayaṁ mahesakkhāya devatāya adhiggahīto bhavissati. This tree must be
occupied by the powerful tree-spirit.
EN

Imperative Mood; Command, Entreaty, Blessing, Curse, Request, and Aspiration.

Optative Mood; Hope, Preyer, Wish, Condition, Probability, Capability, Permission,

etc.,
V

Conditional Tense; the Past Condition with, implied impossibility or supposition,

Contrary to facts.

√sthā = √(ṭ)ṭhā
√bhū + a
bhūbhū + (v)a
Babhūva (parokkhā)
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 252

23 Oct 2023
Participles
Two kinds; declinable and indeclinable
Indeclinable Past Participle; Gerund {called Some Grammarians}
Declinable Participle; Present Participle, Past Participle, and Gerundive or Future
Passive Participle ~ adj. inflected in gender, number, and case of the nouns which they
refer to.
The Past Participle and Gerundive are also used predicatively in sentences.

- The Present Participle translated “while, whilst”, sometimes used

substantively and translated “he who, that which”.
E.g., so dibbena cakkhunā … satte passati cavamāne uppajjamāne. (he, by the divine

Y
eye, sees beings who are passing hence and uprising there.)

- The Present Participle used in the sense of potential verb “if”.

SR
E.g., idha panekacco gilāno labhanto sappāyāni bhojanāni no alabhanto … vuṭṭhāti
tamhā ābādhā. (here again there is a patient that recovers from his illness if he gets
proper diet … but not if he does not get it.) Pug. 20.

- The Past Participe Both Active and Passive frequently play the part of a past
.I
verb (either as Aorist, Imperfect Past, or Past Perfect) and agree with the subject
of the sentence (or the clause) in gender, number, and case. This is the
predicative use of the past participles.
EN

- Sometimes the verb “hoti, ahosi, etc.,” of √bhū follows the past participle, and
can be understood “have, has, had, have been, and so on”.
E.g., Dasamo gahapati pāṭaliputtaṁ anuppatto hoti. (the householder Dasama has
arrived at Pāṭaliputta). M, I, 354.
Āsanāni paññattāni honti. (seats have been prepared.) M, I, 354.
V

- Declinable Participle used as Noun as well as Adjective

Buddha ~ awakened, the Buddha {√budh + ta}
Sugata ~ gone well, an Epithet of the Buddha, sometimes as an Adjective
{su √gam + ta}
Some more examples;
Attano’va avekkheyya katāni akatāni ca. (one should take notice of what one has
done or not done.) Dhp 50.
Atthi bhikkhave ajātaṁ abhūtaṁ akataṁ asaṅkhataṁ. (there, monks, is a
not-born, a not-become, a not-made, a not-compounded.) Ud 80.
Mahant ~ great <√mah + ant
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 253

Bhavant ~ dear, friendly < √bhū + ant

Sant ~ a good person < √as + ant

- Past Participle used as an abstract noun;

E.g., nissitassa calitaṁ, anissitassa calitaṁ natthi. (there is wavering for him who has
clung, but for him who has not clung, there is no wavering.) Ud 81.

- Declinable Past Participle used as a gerund;

E.g., ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho sā devatā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca. (that deity, having
stood aside, said this to the Lord.) S, I, 1.
Atha kho tā devatāyo … suddhāvāsesu devesu antarahitā bhagavato purato
pāturahaṁsu. (then, those gods, having disappeared from among the gods of Pure

Y
Abodes, appeared before the Lord.) S, I 26.

Agent of Passive Past Participle by Inst. or Gen.

SR
E.g., bhotā gotamena sammā bhikkhusaṁgho paṭipādito. (the Order of the monks has
been led properly by the good Gotama)
Sāvatthiyā avidūre aññatarassa puggalassa āvasathapiṇḍo paññatto hoti. (alms
food has come to be prepared in a public rest house near Sāvatthi by some guild.) Vin
IV 60.
.I
- Gerundive or Future Passive Participle
- fitness, propreity, obligation, necessity, or capability, “is to be, ought to be,
should be”, occasionally “can be, could be, may be, might be”
EN

- Play the part of predicate,

- Agree in gender, number, and case with the noun they refer to
- Their agent by Inst. or Gen.
- Sometimes used impersonally, in neuter gender, singular
- Sometimes used also as neuter noun.
E.g., apāṇātipātaṁ nissāya pāṇātipāto pahātabbo. (through not killing living being,
V

killing living being should be got rid of.) M I 360. [predicative function]
Antarāmagge nadī taritabbā hoti. (on the way there is a river {which is} to be
crossed) [adjective function]
Āraññakenāpi kho āvuso moggallāna ime dhammā samādāya vattitabbā pageva
gāmantavihārinā. (these things, venerable Moggallāna, are certainly to be taken up and
practised by a monk living in a forest, all the more by one staying near a village.)
[predicative function]
Kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ. (what is to be done has been done) [noun function]
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 254

Dasamo gahapati pāṭaliputtaṁ anuppatto hoti kenacideva karaṇīyena. (the

householder Dasama has arrived at Pāṭaliputta on some business or other.) [noun
function]

25 Oct 2023
Infinitive

- For the purpose; to, in order to

- Infinitive + icchati, kāmo (wishes, desires, wants), arahati (deserves), sakkoti
(is able to, can), pahoti (is capable of) sakkā, labbhā (possibe, suitable), alaṁ
(ought to), sukara (easy), āciṇṇa (is a custom to)
- Agent of Infinitive by Inst. (passive) or Nom. (active), and its obj by Acc.

Y
(impersonal)

E.g., so na sakkuṇeyya gaṅgāya nadiyā tiriyaṁ bāhāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ

SR
gantuṁ. (he would not be able, having cut across the stream of the river Ganges
using his arms, to go safely beyond.) M I 435.

Icchāma mayaṁ, mārisa, nimiṁ rājānaṁ daṭṭhuṁ. (we wish, good sir, to see the
king Nimi.) M I 78.
.I
Na’dāni sukaraṁ amhehi lābhasakkārasiloke pariccajituṁ. (it is not easy for us
to give up gains, honours, and fame.) M I 524.
EN

Khattiyopi hi pahoti asmiṁ padese … mettaṁ bhāvetuṁ. (on this supposition, a

noble too is capable of developing loving-kindness.) M I 151.

Āciṇṇaṁ kho panetaṁ buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ āgantukehi bhikkhūhi

saddhiṁ paṭisammodituṁ. (it is the custom of the Lord Buddhas to exchange
friendly greetings with the monks coming from a distant place.) Vin IV 24.
V

Arahati pabbajito pabbajitassa piṇḍaṁ paṭiggahetuṁ. (a monk is worthy to

accept the alms-food of a monk.) Vin IV 24.

Alameva nibbindituṁ. (for sure, one ought to turn away from.) D II 198.

sakkā sāmaññphalaṃ paññāpetuṃ. (would one be able to point out a result of

samaṇaship) D i.51
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 255

sakkā etaṃ mayā ñātuṃ? can I ascertain this? D i.187 {is it possible to be known
by me?}

na sakkā maggo akkhātuṃ. (the way cannot be shown) Mil 269;

Direct and Indirect Speech

“Iti” is added to the end of quotation sentence or direct speech.

E.g., sace me bhagavā byākarissati “sassato loko”ti vā “asassato loko”ti vā …
evamahaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi. (if the Lord will explain to me
“the world is eternal” or “the world is not eternal”, then will I live the higher life
under the Lord.) M I 427.

Y
“Ūmi bhayan”ti kho bhikkhave kodhūpāyāsassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ. (the peril of
waves, monks, is a designation for angry despair.) M I 460.

SRBhikkhū … aññataraṁ paccantimaṁ vihāraṁ paṭisaṅkharonti “idha mayaṁ

vassaṁ vasissāmā”ti. (the monks were repairing a large dwelling place in the
countryside, thinking “we will spend the rains here”.) Vin IV 44.
.I
So ekadivasaṁ … ekaṁ vanappatiṁ disvā “ayaṁ mahesakkhāya devatāya
adhiggahīto bhavissatī”ti tassa heṭṭhābhāgaṁ sodhāpetvā … (one day, he,
seeing a large forest tree, thought: “this tree must have been tenanted by a
powerful spirit,” and having caused the ground under the tree to be cleared.)
EN

DhA I 3.

Indirect Speech
The nouns that express the statement (like the word “bhāva”) becoming the last
member of compound denote the sense of indirect speech.
E.g., satthā tassa antogehā nīharitvā tattha nipajjāpitabhāvaṁ ñātvā … (the Master
V

became aware that he had been removed from the house and laid there …) DhA I
261.

Pañcasatehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ āgatabhāvaṁ sutvā … (having heard that he

had come with five hundred monks) DhA I 62.

27 Oct 2023
Vocabulary
Masculine Nouns
Pabbajita < pa + √vraj + (i)ta {gone forth} ~ pabbajati ~ goes forth
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 256

Anuyoga < anu √yuj + (ṇ)a ~ anuyuñjati ~ practises, gives oneself up to

Kilamatha < √k(i)lam + a + tha ~ kilamati ~ to be tired
Tathāgatha < tathā + āgata ~ one who has come like that (previous Buddhas)
Sampayoga < saṁ + pa √yuj + (ṇ)a
Vippayoga < vi + pra + √yuj + (ṇ)a
Upādānakkhandha < upādāna + khandha
Samudaya < saṁ + ud + √i + a
Nirodha < ni √rudh + (ṇ)a
Rāga < √ra(n)j + (ṇ)a
Cāga < √caj + (ṇ)a
Paṭinissagga < pati + nis √sajj + (ṇ)a
Punabbhava < punar + bhava

Y
Saṅkhāra < saṁ(s) √kar + (ṇ)a {saṁskāra > saṁ(k)khāra > saṅkhāra}

Feminine Nouns

SR
Allikā < ā √lī + aka {ālīka > allika + ā > allikā}
Paṭipadā < pati + √pad + a + ā
Abhiññā < abhi √jñā
Sammappaññā < sammā + paññā {pra √jñā}
Mutti < √muc + ti
.I
Vijjā < √vid + (ṇ)ya > vidya > vijja + ā
Saññā < saṁ √jñā
Ñāṇadassana < ñāṇa + dassana
EN

Neuter Nouns
Maraṇa < √mar + ana
Upādāna < upa + ā √dā + ana
Veyyākaraṇa < vi +(y > yy) ā √kar + ana
Byākaraṇa < vi (i > y, v > b) + ā √kar + ana
Brahmacariya
V

Manoviññāṇa < manas + viññāṇa

Saṅkhitta < saṁ √khip + ta ~ saṅkhipiyati ~ is summarized
Itthatta < ittha + tta
Vedayita (nt.) vedanā (f.) ~ √vid (to experience) + e/ aya + ti > vedeti/ vedayati
Phoṭṭhabba < √phus + tabba {u > o, st > ṭṭh}

Adjectives
Pañcavagga ~ a group of five
Pañcavagga + iya > pañcavaggiya
Gāma ~ a village
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 257

Gām(a) + (ṇ)ya > gāmya > gamma

Ariya ~ holy
Na > an + ariya > anariya ~ unholy
Na > an + attha > anttha + saṁhita > antthasaṁhita
Na > a + piya (priya) > appiya
√is > icch + a + ti > icchati ~ he wishes, wants
Iccha + nt > icchant ~ wishing, wanting
Sesa ~ remaining
Na > a + sesa > asesa ~ all
√gam + (ṇ)in > gāmin ~ who goes ~ gāmin + ī > gāminī (f. adj.)

06 Nov 2023

Y
Dvādasa + ākāra > dvādasākāra ~ twelve aspects (dependent determinate compound),
having twelve aspects (attributive or related compound)
√su + tavant {suta + vant} > sutavant ~ who has learned {tavant ~ perfect active

SRparticiple suffix}
Na + dukkha > adukkha
Na > an + Vowel; e.g., na + ariya > anariya
Na > a + Consonant; e.g., na + dukkha > adukkha
Na + sukha > asukha
.I
Saha + deva(ka) > sadevaka ~ being with gods
Saha devehi vattati > sadevo + ka > sadevako
Saha + māra(ka) > samāraka ~ being with Māra
Saha + samaṇabrahmaṇa > sassamaṇabrahmaṇa ~ being with recluses and brahmans,
EN

fem. sassamaṇabrahmaṇa + ī > sassamaṇabrahmaṇī

Samaṇā ca brahmaṇā ca samaṇabrahmaṇā ~ recluses and brahmans {copulative
compound}
Saha samaṇabrahmaṇehi vattati sassamaṇabrahmaṇo
Saha + brāhma(ka) > sabrāhmaka ~ being with higher gods
Anta + ima > antima ~ final {the most ending} [superlative adj. suffix ~ ima]
V

Vi (vigata) + raja > viraja ~ spotless

Puthujjana + (ṇ)ika > pothujjanika

Ṇāṇaṁ + karaṇaṁ > ñāṇakaraṇa ~ producing knowledge

Ñāṇena karaṇaṁ > ñāṇakaraṇa ~ producing wisely

Punar (again) + bhava (existance) + (ṇ)ika > ponobhavika ~ that causes re-becoming
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 258

Abhi √nand + in > abhinandin ~ that finds pleasure in

Abhinandin + ī > abhinandinī (f.)
Ti + parivaṭṭa > tiparivaṭṭa ~ three rounds (dependent determinate compound), having
three rounds (attributive compound)

Su + vi √sudh + ta > visuddha ~ well purified

Vi √sudh + ti > visuddhi ~ purification

Ud (prefix) ~ high
Ud + tara (comperative adj. suffix) > uttara ~ higher
Ud + tama (superlative adj. suffix) > uttama ~ the highest

Y
Na + uttara > anuttara ~ not higher (dependent determinate compound), having no
higher one (than himself); the highest (attribute compound)

SR
Na + kuppa > akuppa ~ not shaking

Atta + mana > attamana ~ one’s own mind, having one’s own mind; delighted, pleased

Vīta < vi √i + ta ~ free from, being without

.I
Vīta + mala > vītamala ~ stainless

Pati + uppanna > paccuppanna ~ present {happening at the present moment}

Ati + √i + ta > atīta ~ gone beyond, passed; past
EN

Na + ā √gam + ta > anāgata ~ not come yet; future

Bahi {adv. outside} + (ṇ)ira > bāhira ~ external

Adhi + atta > ajjhatta ~ related to oneself; internal

Hīna ~ inferior
V

Majjhima ~ middle
Paṇīta ~ superior

Verbs and Participles

Na upagacchati < upa √gam + a + ti ~ does not approach, does not go into
Upa √gam + ya > upagamya > upagamma (ger.) ~ having gone into
Na + upagamma > anupagamma ~ having not gone into

Ud √pad + ya + ti > uppajjati, uppanna (pp.), uppajjitvā (ger.), uppajjamāna (prp)

Ud (a)√pad + i (past) > udapadi > udapādi ~ arose
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 259

Pa √k(r)am + i > pakkami, > pakkāmi ~ departed

Abhi + saṁ √budh + ya + ti > abhisambujjhati,
Abhi + saṁ √budh + ta > abhisambuddha (pp)

√labh + a + ti > labhati (active) ~ obtains

√labh + ya + ti > labbhati (passive) ~ is obtained
√labh + ta > laddha (pp.)
√labh + ya + māna > labbhamāna (passive pr.p) being obatined
-dh, bh, h + t > ddh {pp.}

Pari √jñā + nā + ti > parijānāti ~ knows thoroughly

Pari √jñā + (ṇ)ya > pariññeyya (FPP) ~ what should be thoroughly known

Y
08 Nov 2023
Compounded verb with √bhū and √kar

SR
Sacchi √kar + o + ti > sacchikaroti ~ realizes, understands (lit., makes sth with one’s
own eye)
Sacchi < saha + acchi < akkhi (eye) ~ with one’s own eye
Sacchi ~ saha akkhinā
Sacchi √kar {> kā}+ tabba > sacchikātabba (fpp.) ~ what should be realized
.I
Sacchikata (pp) ~ realized
Sacchikatvā (ger.) ~ having realized
Manasikaroti < manas (i) √kar ~ makes sth with/in one’s mind; pays attention
Manasikatvā, manasikātabba, manasikāra
EN

Sita (cool) √bhū > sitībhavati ~ becomes cool

√bhū + (ṇ)e > bhāve + ti > bhāveti ~ causes sth to become/ happen; develops
Bhāve + tabba > bhāvetabba ~ what should be developed
Bhāve + (i)ta (PP) > bhāvita
Bhāvanā < √bhū + (ṇ)e > bhāve + ana > bhāvana + ā (fem.)
V

Deseti > desanā

Vedeti > vedanā
Ceteti > cetanā
Pati > paṭi √jñā + nā + ti > paṭijānāti
Pati (a)√jñā + (s)iṁ (past, 1st., sl.) > paccaññāsiṁ
Ud + ā √nī + a + ti {ī > e > ay} > udānayati {aya > e} udāneti ~ gives utterance
Ud + ā √nī + a + (s)i > udānesi

√jñā + nā + ti > jānāti ~ knows

√jnā + ta > ñāta (pp)
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 260

Ā √jñā + nā + ti > ājānāti

Ā √jñā + ta > {jñ > ññ, ā > a} > aññāta (pp)

Nir √vi(ṁ)d > vind + a + ti {rv > vv > bb} > nibbindati ~ is tired
Nir √vid + a + ā > nibbidā

Vi √muc + ya + ti {cy > cc} vimuccati ~ is liberated

Vi √muc + ti {ct > tt} > vimutti ~ liberation
Vi √muc + ta (PP.) > vimutta ~ liverated

√khī + ya/a + ti > khīyati/ khayati

√khī + na > khīṇa (pp)

Y
(skt.) ś, ṣ, s, ṛ + t/n > ṭ/ṇ
Kṣī (skt.) = khī {kṣ > kkh > kh}

SR
Pa √jñā + nā + ti > pajānāti ~ understands
Pa √jñā + ya + ti > paññāyati ~ is understood
Pa √jñā > paññā ~ wisdom
.I
√kar + anīya > karaṇīya ~ what should be done
(skt) √kṛ = (pāḷ) √kar

√dīp + ya + ti > dippati ~ sets fire

EN

Ā √dīp + ta {pt > tt} > āditta ~ burning

Pari √jñā + nā + ti > parijānāti ~ knows thoroughly

Pari √jñā + ta (pp) > pariññāta
Pa √hā + a + ti {hā > hāhā > jahā} > pajahati ~ gets rid of, dispells
Pa √hā + tabba (FPP) > pahātabba ~ what is to be dispelled
V

√as + ti > asti {st > tth} > atthi ~ there is

Na + atthi > natthi ~ there is not
√jñā + nā + ti > jānāti
(a)√jñā + (s)i {jñ > ññ} > aññāsi ~ knew, understood, realized
√labh ~ to get, to obtain
√labh + ya > labbha + ti > labbhati ~ to be obtained; to be possible
√raj + ya > rajja + ti > rajjati ~ is attached
√raj + (ṇ)a {a > ā, j > g} > rāga ~ lust, attachment
Vi + rajjati > virajjati ~ is detached
 PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 261

Virāga ~ detachment, without lust

√vas + a + ti > vasati ~ lives, dwells, stays

√vas + a > vasa + (i)ta (PP) > vasita {a > u} > vusita
Upa + ā √dā + (i)ya +ti > upādiyati ~ is taken
Upa + ā √dā + ya (ger.) > upādāya
Na + upādāya > anupādāya

√jñā ~ jānāti ~ knows

Ñāṇa ~ knowledge
Pa √jnā ~ pajānāti ~ understands
Paññā ~ knowledge, wisdom

Y
Ā √jñā ~ ājānāti ~ realizes
Aññā ~ knowledge of arahatship
Pari √jñā ~ parijānāti ~ knows thoroughly

SRPariññā

Indeclinables and Adverbs

10 Nov 2023

Seyyathidaṁ < seyyathā + idaṁ

.I
Seyyathā < taṁ yathā ~ just like that, as follows, such as
Taṁ + yathā > ta(d)yathā ?> sadyathā ?> sayyathā ?> seyyathā

Yathābhūtaṁ < yathābhūta (adj.) + ṁ (nt. nom. sl./ acc. sl.) > adv.
EN

Yathā (as) + bhūtaṁ (been) > yathābhūta ~ as been/ as being, as it is/ as it really is/ as
they really are/ as it has really been

Bahiddhā ~ bahi (outside)

Bahir + dhā > bahiddhā
Dvi (two) + dhā > dvidhā ~ in two ways, twofold
V

Itihidaṁ < iti + hi + idaṁ

Yāva kīvaṁ < yāva + kīva + ṁ
Dve’me < dve + ime ~ these two
Cāyaṁ < ca + ayaṁ {aa > ā}

Kāmasukhallikānuyogo < kāmasukha (sensual pleasure) + allika (attached/ hooked) +

anuyoga (practice)
Allika < ā √lī + aka > ālīka {āl > all} > allīka > allika
Attakilamathānuyogo < atta (oneself) + kilamatha (tiredness) + anuyogo
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 262

Ayaṁ + eva > ayameva {ṁ > m}

Domanassupāyāsa < domanassa (mental pain) + upāyāsa (suffering)
Yampicchaṁ < yaṁ (whatever) + api + icchaṁ (desire,)
Yampicchaṁ na labbhati, tampi dukkhaṁ ~ whatever he wishes is not obtained, that is a
kind of suffering.

Taṅkhopanidaṁ < taṁ (kho pana) idaṁ

Idamavoca < idaṁ + avoca ~ he said this
Avoca < (a)√vac + ā > a {past 3rd. sl.}
Māhesun’ti < mā ahesuṁ iti
Ahesuṁ {past 3rd. Pl.} < (a)√(b)hū + (s)uṃ {ahūsuṁ (ū > e)> ahesuṁ}
Ahosi {past 3rd. Sl.}

Y
Tasmātiha < tasmā(t) + iha
Tassāyeva < tassā (y) eva
Ariyasaccanti < ariyasaccaṁ + iti {ṁ + iti}

SR
No hetaṁ < no hi etaṁ ~ this (is) not (right)
Nesohamasmi < na eso ahaṁ asmi. ~ this is not I.

13 Nov 2023
Summary of the Pāḷi grammar through the Pāḷi Made Easy
.I
4 Parts of Speech in Pāḷi
1) Prefix (upasagga or upasāra) [lesson 29]
2) Indeclinable Particles (Nipāta) [ca, na, atha, vā, and so on]
3) Finite verb (Ākhyāta) (3 tenses, 3 moods) [Lesson 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 27, 28, 31,
EN

32, 33, 34]

4) Declinable Stems (Nāma; noun, adj., pronoun, compound noun, derivative noun)
(a) Vowel ending nouns [lesson 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20]
(b) Consonantal ending nouns [lesson 21, 22, 23, 24, 25]
(c) Pronoun [lesson 26, 27]
(d) Numerals [lesson 30]
V

1) Nāmanāma (pure noun; (1) vowel ending noun except pp. prp. Fpp.
(2) consonantal nouns; -as, -an)
2) Sabbanāma (pronoun)
3) Samāsanāma (compound noun {nāma + nāma}) [lesson 29, 30]
4) Taddhitanāma (secondary derivative noun {nāma, prefix, particle +
suffix}) [lesson 21, 28 {para 131.} 35 {para. 206 - 211}]
5) Kitanāma (primary derivative) {√root + suffix}
Kita;
(1) indeclinable derivative i.e., gerund, infinitive [lesson 9]
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 263

(2) declinable derivative i.e., participles, agent noun, abstract noun

and so on [lesson 15 {pp.}, 22 {pr.p}, 23 {agent -tar}, 35 {para.
213}]
Lesson 36
(a) Syntax of cases
Para. 215; Nominative Case
Para. 216; Accusative Case
Para. 217; Instrumental Case
Para. 218; Dative Case
Para. 219; Ablative Case
Para. 220; Genitive Case
Para. 221; Locative Case

Y
(b) Syntax of Adjectives {para. 222}
(c) Syntax of Pronouns {para. 223}
(d) Syntax of Verbs {para. 224}

SR (e) Syntax of Participles {para. 225}

(f) Syntax of Gerundives or Future Passive Participles {para. 226}
(g) Syntax of Infinitives {para. 226}
(h) Direct and Indirect Speech
(i) Syntax of Gerund {Practical Grammar of the Pāḷi Language, para. 618,
.I
pg. 164 ebook}
15 Nov 2023
(i) The Gerund always denotes an action completed before another: it may be
translated by the word "having" followed by a past participle as: gantvā, having
EN

gone; or by the past tense followed by the conjunction "and": gantvā, he went
and... The gerund, therefore, being very extensively used, is the most common
connective in Pali, and practically does away with the Pāli conjunction equivalent
to the English "and" connecting two sentences. so taṁ ukkhipitvā gharaṁ netvā
catudhā vibhajitvā danādīni puññāni katvā yathākammaṁ gato, He lifted it up,
V

took it home, divided into four parts, practised alms-giving and other good deeds,
and went according to his deeds.
- Having V-ed/en
E.g., gantvā ~ having gone
- Verb and
E.g., gantvā ~ goes and/ go and/ went and/ will go and
E.g., ukkhipitvā netvā vibhajitvā katvā gato ~ lifted up, took, divided, did,
and went
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 264

(ii) The word va (=eva) following a gerund, may be translated by "as soon as":
taṁ vacanaṁ sutvāva, as soon as he heard these words...; so vānaro attano
puttaṁ disvāva, the monkey, as soon as he saw his offspring…
- Sutvā’va {sutvā eva} ~ as soon as he heard, as soon as having heard
- Disvā’va {disvā eva} ~ as soon as he saw, as soon as having seen

(iii) The particle "api" coming after a gerund, may be translated by "although":
akataññū puggalo cakkavattirajjaṁ datvāpi tosetuṁ na sakkā, an ungrateful man
cannot be satisfied although he be given universal sovereignty.
- Datvā’pi {datvā api} ~ although he be given, although having been given

Y
√dā + tvā > datvā ~ having given

(iv)

SR Before a gerund, a may be translated by "without": papañcaṁ akatvā,

without making delays, without any delay; ekampi akilametvā, without harming
even one person.
- Papañcaṁ akatvā {na katvā} ~ having not made delays, without making
delays
.I
- Akilametvā {na kilametvā} ~ having not harmed, without harming

(v) Some gerunds are used prepositionally; the principal of them are: paṭṭhāya
EN

since, beginning from, from, after; sandhāya, with reference to, concerning;
ārabbha concerning, with reference to; sañcicca, intentionally; asallakkhetvā,
inadvertently, unawares: nissāya, upanissāya, on account of, through, near;
ādāya, with; paṭicca by, through, on account of; ṭhapetvā, except, excepting.
- Gerund as a preposition
V

E.g., tato paṭṭhāya {ger. of patiṭṭhāti} ~ beginning with that, starting from
that
Sandhāya {ger. of sandahati}
Ārabbha {ger. of ārabhati}

(vi) The Gerund may sometimes be translated by the present participle; idha
āgantvā aham coraṁ passiṁ, coming here I saw the thief.
- Gerund as present participle
E.g., nisīditvā ~ having sat, sitting
PĀḶI MADE EASY FOR EVERYONE PAGE 265

Āgantvā ~ having come, coming

(vii) The Gerund may have a passive signification: corajeṭṭhakena gahetvā,

having been seized by the robber chief.
- Gerund as passive
Root + tvā
Base + (i)tvā
√gah + (i > e)tvā > gahetvā ~ having been taken

Y
SR
.I
EN
V